Contents

Toyota GR86 2022 Sports Car Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 449
1 of 449

Summary of Content for Toyota GR86 2022 Sports Car Owner's Manual PDF

GR 86_U

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Pictorial index Search by illustration

For safety and security

Make sure to read through them (Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)

Vehicle status information and indicators

Reading driving-related information (Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)

Before driving Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment before driving (Main topics: Keys, doors, seats)

Driving Operations and advice which are necessary for driving (Main topics: Starting engine, refueling)

Interior features Usage of the interior features (Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)

Maintenance and care

Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures (Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)

When trouble arises

What to do in case of malfunction and emergency (Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire)

Vehicle specifications

Vehicle specifications, customizable features (Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)

For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt, SRS airbag and headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners

Index Search by symptom

Search alphabetically

2 TABLE OF CONTENTS

For your information ........................ 5 Reading this manual ........................ 9 How to search................................10 Pictorial index ................................11

1-1. For safe use Before driving........................20 For safe driving .....................21 Seat belts ..............................23 SRS airbags..........................27 Front passenger occupant clas-

sification system..................55 Exhaust gas precautions.......61

1-2. Child safety Riding with children...............62 Child restraint systems..........63

1-3. Emergency assistance Safety Connect .....................74

1-4. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer system ...79 Alarm.....................................80

2-1. Instrument cluster Warning lights and indicators

............................................84 Gauges and meters ..............88 Multi-information display .......93

3-1. Key information Keys ................................... 102

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Doors ................................. 105 Trunk .................................. 107

Smart key system .............. 111 3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats ......................... 119 Rear seats.......................... 121 Head restraints................... 123

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Steering wheel ................... 125 Inside rear view mirror ....... 126 Outside rear view mirrors... 127

3-5. Opening, closing the win- dows and moon roof Power windows .................. 129

4-1. Before driving Driving the vehicle.............. 132 Cargo and luggage ............ 140 Vehicle load limits .............. 143 Trailer towing...................... 143 Dinghy towing .................... 144

4-2. Driving procedures Engine (ignition) switch ...... 145 Automatic transmission...... 149 Manual transmission .......... 153 Turn signal lever................. 155 Parking brake..................... 156 ASC (Active Sound Control)

......................................... 157 4-3. Operating the lights and wip-

ers Headlight switch................. 158 High Beam Assist............... 162 Windshield wipers and washer

......................................... 165 4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap .. 167 4-5. EyeSight

EyeSight............................. 170

1 For safety and security

2 Vehicle status information and indicators

3 Before driving

4 Driving

3TABLE OF CONTENTS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Pre-Collision Braking System ......................................... 179

Adaptive Cruise Control ..... 190 Conventional Cruise Control

......................................... 207 Pre-Collision Throttle Manage-

ment ................................. 215 Lane Departure Warning.... 219 Lane Sway Warning ........... 221 Lead Vehicle Start Alert...... 223 List of alert/notification sounds

......................................... 225 EyeSight malfunction and tem-

porary stop ....................... 227 4-6. Using other driving systems

BSD/RCTA ......................... 231 Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system................... 239 Rear view camera .............. 249 Conventional Cruise Control

......................................... 254 Driving mode select switch

......................................... 257 Hill-start assist control ........ 258 Driving assist systems........ 261

4-7. Driving tips Winter driving tips............... 265

5-1. Using the air conditioning system Automatic air conditioning sys-

tem................................... 270 Seat heaters....................... 276

5-2. Using the interior lights Interior lights list ................. 277

5-3. Using the storage features List of storage features ...... 279 Trunk features .................... 282

5-4. Using the other interior fea- tures Other interior features ........ 283

6-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the

vehicle exterior................. 288 Cleaning and protecting the

vehicle interior.................. 291 Cleaning and protecting the

Ultrasuedearea .............. 293 6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements ......................................... 295

General maintenance......... 296 Emission inspection and mainte-

nance (I/M) programs ...... 299 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precau- tions ................................. 300

Hood .................................. 302 Positioning a floor jack ....... 303 Engine compartment.......... 305 Tires ................................... 312 Replacing the tire ............... 319 Tire inflation pressure......... 324 Wheels ............................... 326 Air conditioning filter........... 327 Electronic key battery......... 329 Checking and replacing fuses

......................................... 331 Headlight aim ..................... 333 Light bulbs.......................... 334

7-1. Essential information Emergency flashers ........... 338

5 Interior features

6 Maintenance and care

7 When trouble arises

4 TABLE OF CONTENTS

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency .............. 338

If the vehicle is submerged or water on the road is rising ......................................... 339

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle needs to be towed

......................................... 341 If you think something is wrong

......................................... 346 Fuel pump shut off system

......................................... 347 If a warning light turns on or a

warning buzzer sounds .... 348 If a warning message is dis-

played .............................. 357 If you have a flat tire........... 358 If the engine will not start ... 367 If you lose your keys .......... 368 If the fuel filler door cannot be

opened............................. 369 If the electronic key does not

operate properly............... 369 If the vehicle battery is dis-

charged ............................ 371 If your vehicle overheats .... 374 If the vehicle becomes stuck

......................................... 376

8-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level,

etc.) .................................. 380 Fuel information ................. 388 Tire information .................. 390

8-2. Customization Customizable features ....... 400

9-1. For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S.

owners ............................. 408 Reporting safety defects for

Canadian owners............. 409 Seat belt instructions for Cana-

dian owners (in French) ... 409 SRS airbag instructions for

Canadian owners (in French) ......................................... 411

Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ......................................... 422

What to do if... (Troubleshooting) ......................................... 426

Alphabetical Index.............. 429

8 Vehicle specifications

9 For owners

Index

5

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle and the illustrations used may differ from your vehicle. All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. Over time, your vehicle may receive updates that modify the vehicle and make material in this manual incomplete and/or inaccurate. Because of Toyotas interest in continual product improvement, Toyota reserves the right to make changes to this manual at any time without notice. If Toyota chooses to update the manual, updated versions can be viewed by selecting your vehicle by model and year at the following URL or on your mobile device if you have access to the Toyota app. www.toyota.com/owners

Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from

under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a mal- function.

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their per- formance, repair, or replace- ment, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle. This vehicle should not be modi- fied with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regu- lations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic

For your information

Main Owners Manual

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

6

systems such as: Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/sequential multiport fuel injection system

EyeSight system Cruise control system Anti-lock brake system Vehicle dynamics integrated

management SRS airbag system Seat belt pretensioner system Be sure to check with your Toy- ota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

The vehicle is equipped with sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as: Engine speed / Electric motor

speed (traction motor speed) Accelerator status Brake status Vehicle speed Operation status of the driving

assist systems Images from the cameras Your vehicle is equipped with cam- eras. Contact your Toyota dealer for the location of recording cameras. The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped.

These computers do not record conversations or sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations. Data Transmission Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Toyota and third parties contracted by Toyota without notification to you. Data usage Toyota and third parties contracted by Toyota may use the data recorded in this computer to diag- nose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality. Toyota and third parties contracted by Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except: With the consent of the vehicle

owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased

In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency

For use by Toyota in a lawsuit For research purposes where the

data is not tied to a specific vehi- cle or vehicle owner To learn more about the vehi-

cle data collected, used and shared by Toyota, please visit www.toyota.com/privacyvts/.

Vehicle data recording

7

If your Toyota has Safety Con- nect and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the Safety Connect Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage. To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by Toyota, please visit www.toyota.com/privacyvts/.

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 sec- onds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your

vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelera- tor and/or brake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was trav- eling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the cir- cumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-triv- ial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. How- ever, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of per- sonally identifying data rou- tinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufac- turer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the spe- cial equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Disclosure of the EDR data Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: An agreement from the vehicles

owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained

Usage of data collected through Safety Connect (U.S. mainland only)

Event data recorder

8

In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency

For use by Toyota in a lawsuit However, if necessary, Toyota may: Use the data for research on

vehicle safety performance Disclose the data to a third party

for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemi- cals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the sys- tems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified ser- vice shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard- ouswaste/perchlorate. Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control bat- teries.

The word QR Code is regis- tered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and other countries.

Scrapping of your Toyota

Perchlorate Material

QR Code

WARNING General precautions while

driving Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to oper- ate your vehicle. Alcohol and cer- tain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coor- dination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Any- thing that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

General precaution regarding childrens safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure them- selves by playing with the win- dows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

9

Reading this manual

Explains symbols used in this manual.

Symbols in this manual

Symbols Meanings

WARNING: Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to peo- ple.

NOTICE: Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause dam- age to or a malfunc- tion in the vehicle or its equipment.

Indicates operating or working proce- dures. Follow the steps in numerical order.

Symbols in illustrations

Symbols Meanings

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.

Indicates the out- come of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Symbols Meanings

Indicates the compo- nent or position being explained.

Means Do not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen.

10

Searching by name Alphabetical index: P.429

Searching by installation position

Pictorial index: P.11

Searching by symptom or sound

What to do if... (Troubleshoot- ing): P.426

Searching by title Table of contents: P.2

How to search

11Pictorial index

Pictorial index Exterior

Doors................................................................................... P.105 Locking/unlocking ................................................................ P.105 Opening/closing the side windows....................................... P.129 Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key .................. P.369 Warning lights ...................................................................... P.348

Trunk ................................................................................... P.107 Opening from inside the cabin ............................................. P.109 Opening from outside........................................................... P.109 Warning lights ...................................................................... P.348

Outside rear view mirrors ................................................. P.127 Adjusting the mirror angle .................................................... P.127 Folding the mirrors ............................................................... P.127 Defogging the mirrors .......................................................... P.272

Windshield wipers.............................................................. P.165 Precautions for winter season.............................................. P.265

Fuel filler door .................................................................... P.167

A

C

D

12 Pictorial index

Refueling method................................................................. P.167 Fuel type/fuel tank capacity ................................................. P.381

Tires..................................................................................... P.312 Tire size/inflation pressure ................................................... P.386 Winter tires/tire chain ........................................................... P.265 Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system .................. P.312 Coping with flat tires............................................................. P.358

Hood.................................................................................... P.302 Opening ............................................................................... P.302 Engine oil ............................................................................. P.382 Coping with overheating ...................................................... P.374 Warning messages .............................................................. P.357

Headlights........................................................................... P.158 Parking lights/daytime running lights.............................. P.158 Turn signal lights ............................................................... P.155 Side marker lights.............................................................. P.158 Stop lights/tail lights/side marker lights/ turn signal lights ........................................................ P.155, 158 License plate lights............................................................ P.158 Back up light Shifting the shift lever to R ........................................... P.150, 153

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving (Replacing method: P.334, Watts: P.387)

13Pictorial index

Instrument panel

Engine switch..................................................................... P.145 Starting the engine/changing the mode ............................... P.145 Emergency stop of the engine ............................................. P.338 When the engine will not start .............................................. P.367 Warning messages .............................................................. P.357

Shift lever..................................................................... P.149,153 Changing the shift position............................................ P.150,153 Precautions for towing ......................................................... P.341

When the shift lever does not move*1 .................................. P.150

Multi-information display .................................................... P.93 Display ................................................................................... P.93 When a warning message is displayed................................ P.357

Meters ................................................................................... P.88 Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel lights ..... P.88 Warning lights/indicator lights ................................................ P.84 When a warning light comes on........................................... P.348

A

C

D

14 Pictorial index

Parking brake ..................................................................... P.156 Applying/releasing................................................................ P.156 Precautions for winter season.............................................. P.266 Warning lights ...................................................................... P.348

Headlight switch ............................................................... P.158 Turn signal lever................................................................. P.155 Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/side marker lights/daytime run- ning lights............................................................................. P.158

Windshield wiper and washer switch............................... P.165 Usage................................................................................... P.165 Adding washer fluid.............................................................. P.311

Emergency flasher switch................................................. P.338 Hood lock release lever..................................................... P.302 Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever................ P.125 Adjustment ........................................................................... P.125

Air conditioning system .................................................... P.270 Usage................................................................................... P.270 Rear window defogger ......................................................... P.272

Audio system*2

*1:Vehicles with an automatic transmission *2:Refer to MULTIMEDIA OWNERS MANUAL.

15Pictorial index

Switches

Instrument panel light control dial ..................................... P.91 Trunk opener switch .......................................................... P.109 Outside rear view mirror switches ................................... P.127 Door lock switches ............................................................ P.106 Power window switches.................................................... P.129 Window lock switch........................................................... P.130

Meter control switches ........................................................ P.94 Paddle shift switches ................................................ P.151, 152

A

C

D

A

16 Pictorial index

(Following distance setting) switch*1 ........................ P.178

Cruise control switch

Adaptive cruise control*1 ...................................................... P.190

Conventional cruise control*1 ....................................... P.207, 254

Talk switch*2

Audio remote control switches*2

Telephone switches*2

*1: If equipped *2:Refer to MULTIMEDIA OWNERS MANUAL.

VSC OFF switch ................................................................. P.261 Driving mode select switch*.............................................. P.257 TRACK switch .................................................................... P.262 Seat heater switches* ........................................................ P.276

*: If equipped

C

D

A

C

D

17Pictorial index

Interior

SRS airbags.......................................................................... P.27 Floor mats............................................................................. P.20 Front seats.......................................................................... P.119 Head restraints................................................................... P.123 Seat belts .............................................................................. P.23 Console box/cup holders .................................................. P.280 Inside lock buttons ............................................................ P.107 Cup holders* ....................................................................... P.281 Rear seats........................................................................... P.121

*: If equipped

A

C

D

18 Pictorial index

Ceiling

Inside rear view mirror ...................................................... P.126 Sun visors........................................................................... P.284 Vanity mirrors..................................................................... P.284 Vanity mirror lights* ........................................................... P.284 Interior lights ...................................................................... P.277 SOS button*/i button*.................................................... P.74

*: If equipped

A

C

D

19

1

1

For safety and security

For safety and security

.

1-1. For safe use Before driving.................20 For safe driving ..............21 Seat belts .......................23 SRS airbags...................27 Front passenger occupant classification system ....55

Exhaust gas precautions .....................................61

1-2. Child safety Riding with children........62 Child restraint systems...63

1-3. Emergency assistance Safety Connect ..............74

1-4. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer system

.....................................79 Alarm..............................80

20 1-1. For safe use 1-1.For safe use

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet. 1 Insert the retaining hooks

(clips) into the floor mat eye- lets.

2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.

Always align the marks .

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

Before driving

Observe the following before starting off in the vehicle to ensure safety of driving.

Floor mats

A

WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause the drivers floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehi- cle. This could lead to an acci- dent, resulting in death or serious injury.

When installing the drivers floor mat

Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.

Only use floor mats designed for the drivers seat.

Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.

Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

Do not place the floor mat bot- tom-side up or upside-down.

211-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

Adjust the angle of the seat- back so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (P.119) Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (P.119) Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (P.123) Wear the seat belt correctly. (P.23)

WARNING Before driving Check that the floor mat is

securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be espe- cially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.

With the engine stopped and the shift lever in P (Automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission), fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

For safe driving

For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appro- priate position before driv- ing.

Correct driving posture

A

C

D

22 1-1. For safe use

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (P.23) Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the

child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicles seat belt. (P.63)

Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. (P.126, 127)

WARNING For safe driving Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Do not adjust the position of the drivers seat while driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.

Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.

When driving over long dis- tances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired. Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force your- self to continue driving and take a break immediately.

Correct use of the seat belts

Adjusting the mirrors

231-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

Seat belts

Make sure that all occu- pants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

WARNING Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

Wearing a seat belt Ensure that all passengers wear

a seat belt.

Always wear a seat belt prop- erly.

Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including chil- dren.

Toyota recommends that chil- dren be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P.24) Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt com- pletely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area. If the seat belt is not worn prop- erly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a colli- sion.

People suffering illness Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P.24)

When children are in the vehi- cle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a childs neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle can- not be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

24 1-1. For safe use

Extend the shoulder belt so

that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.

Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

Do not twist the seat belt.

Child seat belt usage The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size. Use a child restraint system

appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicles seat belt. (P.63)

When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehi- cles seat belt, follow the instruc- tions regarding seat belt usage. (P.23)

1 To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.

2 To release the seat belt,

WARNING Seat belt damage and wear Do not damage the seat belts

by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.

Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehi- cle has been involved in a seri- ous accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer. Inap- propriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.

Correct use of the seat belts

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

251-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

press the release button .

Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. When the seat belt locks, pull the belt strongly and then release the belt, then a slow and easy pulling will allow the belt to extend. Automatic locking retractor

(ALR) When a passengers shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold a child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P.63)

When fastening a front seat belt, ensure that it is passed through the seat belt guide. Passing the seat belt through the guide enables the seat belt to be eas- ily extended. When you get into or out of the rear seats, release the seat belt from the seat belt guide.

The pretensioners help the seat belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is sub- jected to certain types of severe frontal collision or a vehicle roll- over. The front seat belt pretensioners also activate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe side collision. The pretensioners do not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact or a rear impact.

Seat belt guide

A WARNING When using the seat belt

guide Always make sure that the belt

is not twisted, and runs freely through the guide.

Regardless of whether the guide is used or not, always secure the seat belt guide but- ton.

Do not hang from or pull the guide forcefully.

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

26 1-1. For safe use

Replacing the belt after the pre- tensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will acti- vate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subse- quent collisions.

WARNING Seat belt pretensioners Do not place anything, such as

a cushion, on the front passen- gers seat. Doing so will disperse the passengers weight, which prevents the sen- sor from detecting the passen- gers weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passengers seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

If the pretensioner has acti- vated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.

271-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

Location of the SRS airbags The SRS airbags are stowed in the following locations.

SRS airbags

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) name is used because the airbag system supplements the vehicles seatbelts. This vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system which consists of seven airbags. The configurations are as follows. Drivers and front passengers frontal airbags Drivers and front passengers side airbags Curtain shield airbags (for driver, front passenger and rear pas-

sengers) Knee airbag for driver

These SRS airbags are designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners. For operation instructions and precautions concerning the seat- belt pretensioner, refer to P.25.

Components

28 1-1. For safe use

Drivers SRS frontal airbag: in the center portion of the steering wheel

An SRS AIRBAG mark is located on the pad of the airbag. Front passengers SRS frontal airbag: near the top of the right side of dashboard

An SRS AIRBAG mark is located on the right corner of the dashboard. SRS side airbag: in the door side of each front seat seatback

An SRS AIRBAG marks are located on the door side of each front seat cushion.

SRS curtain shield airbag: in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat)

SRS AIRBAG marks are located at the top of each center pillar. SRS knee airbag: under the steering column

An SRS AIRBAG mark is located at the door of the airbag.

A

C

D

291-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

SRS airbag system components

Front impact sensor (left-hand side) Front impact sensor (right-hand side) SRS warning light Frontal airbag module (drivers side) Airbag control module (including impact sensor and rollover sen- sor) Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator Frontal airbag module (front passengers side) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passengers side) Curtain shield airbag module (right-hand side) Side impact sensor (door right-hand side) Side airbag module (front passengers side) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter (front passen- gers side) Side impact sensor (center pillar right-hand side) Airbag wiring Side impact sensor (rear wheel house right-hand side) Front passengers occupant detection system sensor

A

C

D

30 1-1. For safe use

Side impact sensor (rear wheel house left-hand side) Side airbag module (drivers side) Side impact sensor (center pillar left-hand side) Seatbelt pretensioner (drivers side) Side impact sensor (door left-hand side) Knee airbag module (drivers side) Curtain shield airbag module (left-hand side)

If the SRS airbag deploys If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel sup- ply will be cut off to reduce the risk of fire caused by leaking fuel. For details about restarting of the engine, refer to P.347. SRS Airbag System Servicing In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. The front part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which only the drivers SRS frontal air- bag or both drivers and front pas- sengers SRS frontal airbags did not deploy.

The pad of the steering wheel, the cover over the front passengers SRS frontal airbag, or either roof side (from the front pillar to a point over the rear seat) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The center pillar, door, rear wheel house or rear sub frame, or an area near these parts, was involved in an accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS cur- tain shield airbag did not deploy.

The fabric or leather of either front seatback is cut, frayed, or other- wise damaged.

The rear part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which no SRS airbag was deployed.

When you sell your vehicle When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to inform the buyer that the

vehicle is equipped with SRS air- bags. Also, notify the buyer of the applicable section in this Owners Manual.

WARNING General Precautions regard-

ing SRS Airbag System To obtain maximum protection

in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers must always wear seatbelts when in the vehicle. The SRS airbag is designed only to be a supple- ment to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best protection in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag. For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, refer to P.23.

311-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

WARNING The SRS side airbags and SRS

curtain shield airbags are designed only to be a supple- ment to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. They do not eliminate the need to fas- ten seatbelts. It is also important to wear a seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant is not seated in a proper upright position.

The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are not seated in proper upright position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer serious injury. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehi- cle control, and the front pas- senger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

Do not sit or lean close to either door. The SRS side airbags are stored in both front seat seat- backs next to the door, and they provide protection by deploying rapidly in the event of a side impact collision. However, the force of SRS side airbag deployment can injure an occu- pant whose body is too close to an SRS airbag.

Since your vehicle is equipped with SRS curtain shield airbags, do not sit or lean close to the door on either side. Do not put body parts out of the window. The SRS curtain shield airbags on both sides of the cabin are stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point behind the rear quarter glass), and they provide protection by deploying rapidly in the event of a side impact, rollover or an off- set frontal collision. However, the force of its deployment can injure an occupant whose body is too close to an SRS airbag.

32 1-1. For safe use

WARNING Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an occu- pant whose body is too close to SRS airbag. It is also important to wear seat- belts to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in their proper position. Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor injury, such as abrasions and bruises to the face or arms, because of the SRS airbag deployment force.

Keep arms away from either door or its internal trim. They could be injured in the event of SRS side airbag deployment.

Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS air- bag. If the SRS airbag deploys, these objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

If the SRS airbag deploys When the SRS airbag deploys,

some smoke will be released. This smoke could cause breath- ing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.

A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.

General Precautions regard- ing SRS Airbag System for Accessories and Any Objects

Do not put any objects (includ- ing straps or cord) over the steering wheel pad, column cover, or dashboard.

These objects could be entan- gled with the steering wheel, preventing the SRS frontal air- bag, etc. from operating prop- erly.

If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, these objects could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

331-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

WARNING Do not put any objects under

the drivers side of the instru- ment panel. If the SRS knee air- bag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be pro- pelled inside the vehicle, caus- ing injury.

Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or fit an extra-wide mirror over the inside rear view mirror. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could become projectiles that could seriously injure vehicle occu- pants.

Do not attach accessories to the door trim or near either SRS side airbags and do not place objects near the SRS side air- bags. In the event of SRS side airbag deployment, they could be propelled dangerously toward the vehicles occupants and cause injuries.

Do not attach a hands-free microphone or any other acces- sory to a front pillar, a center pil- lar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side window, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain shield airbag. A hands-free microphone or other accessory in such a location could be pro- pelled through the cabin with great force by the curtain shield airbag, or it could prevent cor- rect deployment of the curtain shield airbag. In either case, the result could be serious injuries.

Do not put any kind of clothes or other objects over the front seatback and do not attach labels or stickers to the front seat surface on or near the SRS side airbag. They could prevent proper deployment of the SRS side airbag, reducing protection available to the front seats occupant.

Do not install a seat cover unless it is a genuine Toyota seat cover exclusively designed for use with the SRS airbag. Even when using a genuine Toyota seat cover, the SRS side airbag system may not function normally if the seat cover is not installed correctly.

34 1-1. For safe use

WARNING General Precautions regard-

ing SRS Airbag System and Children

Place children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill chil- dren, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child restraint systems) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropri- ate for the childs age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint systems (including for- ward facing child restraint sys- tem) in the REAR seats at all times. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat- ing positions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, refer to P.63.

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passen- gers seat. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

Never allow a child to do the fol- lowing.

Kneel on any passengers seat facing the side window

351-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

WARNING Wrap his/her arms around the

front seat seatback

Put his/her head, arms or other parts of the body out of the win- dow

In the event of an accident, the force of SRS side airbag and/or SRS curtain shield airbag deploy- ment could injure the child seri- ously because his/her head, arms or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side airbag and/or SRS curtain shield airbag.

Since your vehicle is also equipped with a front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag, chil- dren should be placed in the rear seat and should be prop- erly restrained at all times.

SRS Airbag System Servicing The SRS airbag has no user-ser- viceable parts. Do not use electri- cal test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, consult your nearest Toy- ota dealer. Tampering with or dis- connecting the systems wiring could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury.

Precautions against Vehicle Modification

To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the sys- tem inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modi- fications should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS airbag system. This includes following modifi- cations.

Installation of custom steering wheels

Attachment of additional trim materials to the dashboard

Installation of custom seats

Replacement of seat fabric or leather

Installation of additional fabric or leather on the front seat

Attachment of a hands-free microphone or any other acces- sory to a front pillar, a center pil- lar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain shield airbag.

36 1-1. For safe use

WARNING Installation of additional electri-

cal/electronic equipment such as a mobile two-way radio on or near the SRS airbag system components and/or wiring is not advisable. This could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.

Modifications on or inside the door panels for the purpose of a speaker replacement or sound insulation

The impact sensors, which detect the pressure of an impact, are located in the doors. Do not modify any components of the doors or door trims, such as the addition of door speakers for example. Any modifications to the doors will create a risk of the airbag system becoming inoperative or unintended air- bag deployment.

Do not perform any of the fol- lowing modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the SRS air- bag system.

Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genu- ine Toyota accessory parts to the front end.

Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.

Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers center pillar or specified for indi- vidual vehicle models in this Owners Manual.

Attachment of any equipment (side steps or side sill protec- tors, etc.) other than genuine Toyota accessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your Toyota dealer if you want to install any acces- sory parts on your vehicle.

NOTICE SRS Airbag System Servicing When discarding an airbag

module or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your Toyota dealer.

If you need service or repair in areas indicated in the following list, have the work performed by an authorized Toyota dealer. The SRS airbag control module, impact sensors and airbag mod- ules are stored in these areas.

Under the center of the instru- ment panel

On both the right and left sides at the front of the vehicle

Steering wheel and column and nearby areas

Bottom of the steering column and nearby areas

Top of the dashboard on front passengers side and nearby areas

Each front seat and nearby area

Inside each center pillar

Inside each door

In each roof side (from the front pillar to a point over the rear seat)

371-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

This vehicle is equipped with a Toyota advanced frontal airbag system that complies with the advanced frontal airbag require- ments in the amended Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 208. The Toyota advanced frontal air- bag system automatically deter- mines the deployment force of the drivers SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment as well as whether or not to activate the front passengers SRS frontal airbag and, if activated, the deployment force of the SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment. Always wear your seatbelt. The Toyota advanced frontal airbag system is a supplemental restraint system and must be used in combination with a seat- belt. All occupants should wear a seatbelt or be seated in an

appropriate child restraint sys- tem. For the locations of the SRS air- bags, refer to P.27. In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the following compo- nents deploy. SRS frontal airbag for driver SRS frontal airbag for front

passenger

SRS curtain shield airbag*

SRS knee airbag for driver *: When an offset frontal collision

that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.

These components supplement the seatbelts by reducing the impact to the occupants head, chest and knees. Drivers SRS frontal airbag The drivers SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact. Front passengers SRS

frontal airbag The front passengers SRS fron- tal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact. Occupant detection system The occupant detection system sensors are installed between the seat and seat rails, and

NOTICE Between the rear seat cushion

and rear wheel house on each side

In the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, replacement of the system should be performed only by an authorized Toyota dealer. When the components of the SRS airbag system are replaced, use only genuine Toy- ota parts.

Toyota Advanced Frontal Airbag System

38 1-1. For safe use

monitor the physique and pos- ture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occu- pant detection system deter- mines whether the front passengers SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not.

Occupant detection sensors The occupant detection system may not inflate the front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag even when the drivers SRS frontal airbag deploys. This is normal. In this case, although the front passengers SRS frontal airbag does not operate, the front pas- sengers seatbelt pretensioner operates with the drivers seat- belt pretensioner. For details about the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to P.25. Passengers frontal airbag

ON and OFF indicators Refer to P.85.

Front passengers frontal air- bag OFF indicator Front passengers frontal air- bag ON indicator

Operation Drivers side

SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs. After deployment, SRS AIR- BAGs start to deflate immedi- ately so that the drivers vision is not obstructed.

A

A

A

391-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

Passengers side

SRS AIRBAG deploy as soon as a collision occurs. After deployment, SRS AIR- BAG start to deflate immedi- ately so that the drivers vision is not obstructed.

The SRS airbags can function only when the engine switch is in ON. The Toyota advanced frontal air- bag system is designed to deter- mine the activation or deactivation condition of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag depending on the charac- teristic of item(s) or person on the front passengers seat moni- tored by the front passengers occupant detection system sen- sor. For this reason, only the drivers SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a collision, but this does not mean failure of the system. If the following sensors detect a

predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only drivers module or both drivers and front passengers modules) instructing the module(s) to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The front impact sensors The impact sensors in the air-

bag control module On the drivers side, the SRS knee airbag also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag. The drivers and front passen- gers SRS frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. The two inflators of each airbag are trig- gered either sequentially or simultaneously, depending on the severity of impact, in the case of the drivers SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the char- acteristic of item(s) or person on the seat in the case of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag. After deployment After deployment, the SRS air- bag immediately starts to deflate so that the drivers vision is not obstructed and the drivers abil- ity to maintain control of the vehicle is not impaired. The time required from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS air- bag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.

A

40 1-1. For safe use

Both when only the drivers SRS frontal airbag deploys and the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags deploy, the drivers and front passengers seatbelt pretensioners operate at the same time. When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle. Example of the type of acci-

dent The drivers SRS frontal airbag and front passengers SRS fron- tal airbag are designed as fol- lows. To deploy in the event of an

accident involving a moderate to severe frontal collision

To function on a one-time-only basis

The drivers SRS frontal airbag and front passengers SRS fron- tal airbag are not designed as follows. To deploy in most lesser fron-

tal impacts*1

To deploy in most side or rear impacts or in most rollover accidents*2

*1:Because the necessary protec- tion can be achieved by the seat-

belt alone. *2:Because deployment of only the

drivers SRS frontal airbag or both the drivers and front pas- sengers SRS frontal airbags would not protect the occupant in those situations.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the vis- ible damage done to the vehicle itself. Example of accident in which

the drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal air- bag(s) will most likely deploy

A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags. The airbag(s) will also be activated when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magnitude to the col- lision described above.

Examples of the types of acci-

411-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

dents in which it is possible that the drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy

Only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers and front passen- gers SRS frontal airbags may be activated when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in the undercarriage area from the road surface (such as when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely impacted or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).

Examples of the types of acci- dents in which deployment of the drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal air- bag(s) is unlikely to occur

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require deployment of drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal air- bag(s). In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the drivers/drivers and front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved. The vehicle strikes an object,

such as a telephone pole or sign pole.

The vehicle slides under the load bed of a truck.

The vehicle sustains an oblique offset frontal impact.

The vehicle sustains an offset frontal collision.

42 1-1. For safe use

The vehicle strikes an object that can move or deform, such as a parked vehicle.

Examples of the types of acci- dents in which the drivers/drivers and front pas- sengers SRS frontal air- bag(s) are not designed to deploy in most cases

The drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags are not designed to deploy in most of the following cases. If the vehicle is struck from the

side or from behind

If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed frontal collision

In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the drivers and/or front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first impact of sufficient severity. Example: In the case of a dou- ble collision, first with another vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immediate succession, once either or both of the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags is/are acti- vated on the first impact, it/they will not be activated on the sec- ond impact.

431-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

Warning labels and tag This vehicle has warning labels on the drivers and front passengers sun visors beginning with the phrase EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS and a tag attached to the glove box lid beginning with the phrase Even with Advanced Air Bags. Make sure that you carefully read the instructions on the warning labels and tag.

Toyota advanced frontal airbag system

The SRS side airbag and seatbelt pretensioner are not controlled by the Toyota advanced frontal air- bag system.

The front passengers SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield air- bag are not controlled by the Toy- ota advanced frontal airbag system.

Conditions in which front pas- sengers SRS frontal airbag is not activated

The front passengers SRS frontal airbag will not be activated when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passengers seat:

The seat is empty. The seat is equipped with an

appropriate child restraint system and an infant or a child is restrained in it. (See WARNING that follows.)

The front passengers occupant detection system is malfunction- ing.

Conditions in which front pas- sengers SRS frontal airbag is activated

The front passengers SRS frontal airbag will be activated for deploy- ment upon impact when any of the following conditions are met regard- ing the front passengers seat. When the seat is occupied by an

adult. When certain items (e.g. jug of

water) are placed on the seat. If the front passengers frontal

airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator turns off

If you think that the Front passen- ger's frontal airbag ON/OFF indica- tor is incorrect, take the following actions. Ensure that no article is placed on

the seat other than the occupant. Ensure that the backward-forward

position and seatback of front pas- sengers seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth.

If the ON indicator still remains illu- minated while the OFF indicator turns off after taking relevant correc- tive actions described above, imme- diately contact your Toyota dealer for an inspection. Even if the system has passed the dealer inspection, it is recom- mended that on subsequent trips the small adult always take the rear seat.

44 1-1. For safe use

If the passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON indicator turns off even when the front passengers seat is occupied by an adult

This can be caused by the adult incorrectly sitting in the front pas- sengers seat. 1 Turn the engine switch off. 2 Ask the front passenger to set

the seatback to the upright posi- tion, sit up straight in the center of the seat cushion, correctly fas- ten the seatbelt, position his/her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to the rearmost position.

3 Turn the engine switch to ON. If the OFF indicator remains illumi- nated while the ON indicator remains off, take the following actions. 1 Turn the engine switch off. 2 Make sure that the front passen-

ger does not use a blanket, extra seat cushion, seat cover, extra seat heater or massager, etc.

3 If wearing excessive layers of clothing, the front passenger should remove any unnecessary items before sitting in the front passengers seat, or should sit in a rear seat.

4 Turn the engine switch to ON and wait 6 seconds to allow the system to complete self-check- ing. Following the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 sec- onds. Now, the ON indicator should illuminate while the OFF indicator remains off.

If the OFF indicator still remains illu- minated while the ON indicator remains off, ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immedi- ately contact your Toyota dealer for an inspection.

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passengers occu- pant detection system have failed

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passengers occupant detec- tion system have failed, the SRS warning light will illuminate. Have the system inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if the SRS warn- ing light illuminates. If the front passengers seat

cushion is wet If the front passengers seat cushion is wet, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat dry naturally and then check the SRS warning light. If the front passengers frontal air- bag ON and OFF indicators do not work properly even when the front passengers seat is dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passen- gers seat and have the occupant detection system checked by your Toyota dealer. Also, if luggage or electronic devices are placed on the front pas- sengers seat, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. This may prevent the front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators from working properly. Check that the indicators work properly. When the OFF indicator turns off and the ON indicator illuminates, the front passengers frontal airbag may deploy during a collision. Remove luggage and electronic devices from the front passengers seat. When to contact your Toyota

dealer If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper function of the Toyota advanced frontal airbag system. Have your vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer. Do not use the front passengers seat while driving the vehicle to your Toy-

451-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

ota dealer.

WARNING When using a child restraint

system NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGERS SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSEN- GERS SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it in the REAR seat in a cor- rect manner. Also, it is strongly recommended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be installed in the REAR seat, and that even children who have out- grown a child restraint system be also seated in the REAR seat. This is because children sitting in the front passengers seat may be killed or severely injured should the front passengers SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest place for children.

General Precautions regard- ing front passengers SRS frontal airbag

When the front passenger's seat is occupied by an adult, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may lessen the load on the front passenger's seat, deacti- vating the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat is occupied by an adult. This may result in personal injury.

Do not allow the rear seat occu- pant to lift the front passenger's seat cushion using his/her feet.

Do not place any article under the front passenger's seat, or squeeze any article from behind and under the seat.

Do not squeeze any article between the front passenger's seat and side trim/pillar, door or center console box. This may lift the seat cushion.

When a small adult is seated in the front passengers seat

When a small adult is seated in the front passengers seat, the Toyota advanced frontal airbag system may or may not activate the front passengers SRS frontal airbag depending on the occu- pants seating posture. If the OFF indicator remains illuminated while the ON indicator turns off when a small adult is seated in the front passenger's seat, refer to P.43.

General Precautions regard- ing occupant detection sys- tem

Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may illuminate to indicate a mal- function of the front passenger occupant detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

After deployment Do not touch the SRS airbag sys- tem components around the steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deploy- ment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deploy- ment.

46 1-1. For safe use

NOTICE Toyota advanced frontal air-

bag system precautions Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may pre- vent the Toyota advanced frontal airbag system from functioning correctly or cause the system to fail.

Do not apply any strong impact to the front passengers seat such as by kicking.

Do not let rear passengers rest their feet between the front seatback and seat cushion.

Do not spill liquid on the front passengers seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off immediately.

Do not remove or disassemble the front passengers seat.

Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a genuine Toyota accessory under the front pas- sengers seat.

Do not place anything (shoes, umbrella, etc.) under the front passengers seat.

Do not place any objects (books, etc.) around the front passengers seat.

Do not use the front passen- gers seat with the head restraint removed.

Do not leave any articles on the front passengers seat or the seatbelt tongue and buckle engaged when you leave your vehicle.

Do not put sharp object(s) on the seat or pierce the seat upholstery.

Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.

Do not use front seats with their backward-forward position adjuster and seatback adjuster not being locked into place securely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to P.119.

When using the front passen- gers seat

Observe the following precautions as it increase the load on the front passenger's seat and not work properly.

Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV onto the seatback.

Do not allow the rear seat occu- pant to place his/her hands or legs on the front passenger's seatback, or allow him/her to pull the seatback.

Occupant detection system Electrical devices, such as cell phones, laptops, portable music players, or electronic games, especially when connected to the accessory power outlet and placed on the front passengers seat or used by the person sitting in the front passengers seat, may affect the operation of the occu- pant detection system. If either of the following situations occurs when using an electronic device in the vehicle, at first try to relo- cate that device to avoid it creat- ing any interference.

The SRS warning light illumi- nates.

The front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators operate erratically.

471-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

SRS side airbag The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat seatback, which bears an SRS AIRBAG mark. In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupants chest and waist. The SRS side airbag operates only for front seat occupants. SRS curtain shield airbag Your vehicle is equipped with a SRS curtain shield airbag sys- tem that complies with the Fed- eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.

The SRS curtain shield airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat). An SRS AIR- BAG mark is located at the top of each center pillar. In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain shield airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the side window and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupants head. In a rollover, SRS curtain shield airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy between the occupant and the side window and supplement the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occu- pants head. In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain shield airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy between the occupant and the side window and supplement the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupants head and chest. Operation The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag can func- tion only when the engine switch is in ON. The following airbags deploy independently of each other since each has its own impact

NOTICE If the device continues to cause interference, the use of that device in the vehicle should be discontinued.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag

48 1-1. For safe use

sensor. Drivers SRS side airbag Front passengers SRS side

airbag SRS curtain shield airbag

(right-hand side) SRS curtain shield airbag

(left-hand side) Therefore, they may not both deploy in the same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploys independently of the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags in the steer- ing wheel and instrument panel. For the locations of the sensors and control modules, refer to P.27. After deployment After the deployment, the SRS side airbag immediately starts to deflate. The time required from detection of an impact to defla- tion of an SRS side airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye. The SRS curtain shield airbag remains inflated for a while fol- lowing deployment then slowly deflates. The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploy even when no one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied. When the SRS side airbag and

SRS curtain shield airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle. Example of the type of acci-

dent The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are designed as follows: To deploy in the event of an

accident involving a moderate to severe side impact collision

To function on a one-time-only basis.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are not designed to deploy in the follow- ing cases: In most lesser side impact In most frontal or most rear

impacts (because the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deployment would not protect the occu- pant in those situations)

The SRS curtain shield airbags are also designed to deploy when the vehicle is in an extremely inclined state such as during a rollover. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser inclined states. SRS side airbag and SRS cur-

491-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

tain shield airbag deployment depend on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a side impact collision. That level dif- fers from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself. Example of the type of acci-

dent in which the SRS side airbag will most likely deploy.

A severe side impact near the front seat.

Examples of the types of acci- dents in which the SRS cur- tain shield airbag will most likely deploy.

The vehicle is involved in a severe side impact near the front seat or the rear seat.

The vehicle rolls onto its side or

the roof.

The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or the skidding vehicles tires hit a curbstone laterally.

An offset frontal collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag.

Examples of the types of acci- dents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain shield airbag will deploy.

50 1-1. For safe use

It is possible that the SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustra- tion. Hitting a curb, edge of pavement

or hard surface

Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

Examples of the types of acci- dents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illus- trated, the SRS side airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved. The vehicle is involved in an

oblique side-on impact.

The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger com- partment.

The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.

511-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.

The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

Examples of the types of acci- dents in which the SRS cur- tain shield airbag is unlikely to deploy.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS curtain shield airbag deploy- ment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS curtain shield airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved. The vehicle is involved in an

oblique side-on impact.

The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger com- partment.

The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.

The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.

52 1-1. For safe use

Examples of the types of acci- dents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases

In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases. The vehicle is involved in frontal

collision with another vehicle (moving or stationary).

The vehicle is struck from behind.

The vehicle pitches end over end.

In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploy only once on the first impact. Example: In the case of a dou- ble side impact collision, first with one vehicle and immedi- ately followed by another from the same direction, once the SRS side airbag and SRS cur- tain shield airbag are activated on the first impact, they will not be activated on the second.

SRS curtain shield airbag SRS side airbag

1 First impact 2 Second impact

A

531-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS airbag system (including seatbelt pretensioners) with the engine switch is in ON. The SRS warning light will show nor- mal system operation by illumi- nating for approximately 6 seconds when the engine switch is turned to ON.

The following components are monitored by the indicator:

Front impact sensor Right-hand side Left-hand side Airbag control module (includ-

ing impact sensor and rollover sensor)

Frontal airbag module Drivers side Front passengers side Knee airbag module Drivers side Side impact sensor Center pillar left-hand side Center pillar right-hand side Forward of rear wheel house

left-hand side Forward of rear wheel house

right-hand side Door left-hand side Door right-hand side Side airbag module Drivers side Front passengers side Curtain shield airbag module Right-hand side Left-hand side Seatbelt pretensioner Drivers side Seatbelt pretensioner and

adaptive force limiter Front passengers side Seatbelt buckle switch Front passengers side Front passengers occupant

WARNING After deployment Do not touch the SRS side air-

bag system components around the front seat seatback with bare hands right after deploy- ment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any part of the SRS curtain shield airbag system (from the front pillar to the part of the roof side over the rear seat). Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

SRS Airbag System Moni- tors

54 1-1. For safe use

detection system sensors Front passengers frontal air-

bag ON and OFF indicator All related wiring

SRS warning light Have the system inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if the SRS warning light illuminates.

WARNING SRS warning light If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, immedi- ately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and consult a Toyota dealer. Unless a technician checks and repairs the system as needed, the seatbelt pretension- ers and/or the SRS airbag may not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may result in injury.

Flashing or flickering of the warning light

No illumination of the warning light when the engine switch is first turned to ON

Continuous illumination of the warning light

Illumination of the warning light while driving

551-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

The front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag. When the engine switch is turned to ON, both the ON and OFF indicators illu- minate while the system is checked, after which both indicators turn off. After that, one of the indicators illuminates depending on the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag determined by the Toyota advanced frontal airbag monitoring system.

SRS warning light Front passengers seat belt reminder light AIR BAG OFF indicator light AIR BAG ON indicator light

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the front passenger airbag.

System components

A

C

D

56 1-1. For safe use

WARNING Front passenger occupant

classification system precau- tions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause the occupant classification system to not function correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.

Wear the seat belt properly.

Do not apply excessive force to the seat.

Do not put sharp object(s) on the seat or pierce the seat upholstery.

Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.

Do not spill liquid on the front passenger seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off immediately and dry the seat. If the SRS warning light illuminates, dry the seat until the warning light turns off. If the SRS warning light stays on even when the seat has dried, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passenger seat and have the system checked by your Toyota dealer. If the SRS warning light does not illuminate, check that the airbag ON/OFF indicator light works properly. If the indicator light does not work properly, do not allow anyone to sit in the front passengers seat and have the system inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Do not remove or disassemble the front passenger seat. Also, do not replace or modify the seat upholstery or foam inside the seat.

Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a genuine Toyota accessory under the front pas- sengers seat.

Do not place a magnetized items near the seat belt buckle.

Never install a rearward facing child seat in the front passen- gers seat even if the front pas- sengers SRS frontal airbag is deactivated. Be sure to install it in the rear seat in a correct manner. Also, it is strongly rec- ommended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be installed in the rear seat, and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint sys- tem be also seated in the rear seat. This is because children sitting in the front passengers seat may be killed or severely injured should the front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag deploy. Toyota believes that the rear seats are the safest place for children.

If luggage or electronic devices are placed on the front passen- ger seat, the OFF indicator may turn off and the ON indicator may illuminate. If this occurs, the front passengers airbag may deploy during a collision. If this is not desirable, remove the luggage or electronic devices from the front passenger seat.

571-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

Adult*2

Child*5, *6

WARNING Modifications for persons with

disabilities that may affect the front passenger occupant clas- sification system. (U.S. only) Removing, replacing or modify- ing any parts of the front seats, seat belts, front bumper, front side frame, instrument panel, meter, steering wheel, steering column, tires, suspension or floor panel can affect the opera- tion of the Toyota front passen- ger occupant classification system.

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system*1

Indicator/warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights AIR BAG ON

SRS warning light Off

Front passengers seat belt reminder light Flashing*3

Devices

Front passenger airbag

On Front side airbag*4

Front curtain shield airbag*4

Front passengers seat belt preten- sioner*4

Indicator/warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights AIR BAG OFF*5

SRS warning light Off

Front passengers seat belt reminder light Flashing*3

58 1-1. For safe use

Child restraint system with infant*6, *7, *8

Unoccupied

Devices

Front passenger airbag Off

Front side airbag*4

OnFront curtain shield airbag*4

Front passengers seat belt preten- sioner*4

Indicator/warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights AIR BAG OFF*9

SRS warning light OffFront passengers seat belt

reminder light

Devices

Front passenger airbag Off

Front side airbag*4

OnFront curtain shield airbag*4

Front passengers seat belt preten- sioner*4

Indicator/warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights AIR BAG OFF

SRS warning light OffFront passengers seat belt

reminder light

Devices

Front passenger airbag Off

Front side airbag*4

OnFront curtain shield airbag*4

Front passengers seat belt preten- sioner*4

591-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

There is a malfunction in the system

*1:The occupant classification system does not operate during selfcheck- ing.

*2:The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.

*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt. *4:The front passengers SRS side airbag, SRS curtain shield airbag and

seat belt pretensioner are not controlled by the occupant classification system.

*5:For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convert- ible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture. Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should always wear the seat belt when sitting in the seat irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated.

*6:Do not place more than one child on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may prevent the front passenger occupant classification system from functioning correctly.

*7:When a child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat, do not place any article on the seat other than the child occupant and a child restraint system. Failure to do so may prevent the front passenger occupant classification system from functioning correctly or cause the system to fail.

*8:Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. See the caution that follows regarding installation of a child restraint system. (P.63)

Indicator/warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights AIR BAG OFF

SRS warning light On

Front passengers seat belt reminder light Off

Devices

Front passenger airbag Off

Front side airbag*4

OnFront curtain shield airbag*4

Front passengers seat belt preten- sioner*4

60 1-1. For safe use *9: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to

installing the child restraint system properly. (P.63)

611-1. For safe use

1

For safety and security

Exhaust gas precau- tions

Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.

WARNING Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

Important points while driving Keep the trunk lid closed.

If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

When parking If the vehicle is in a poorly venti-

lated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the engine.

Do not leave the vehicle with the engine on for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snow- banks build up around the vehi- cle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

Exhaust pipe The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corro- sion, damage to a joint or abnor- mal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

62 1-2. Child safety 1-2.Child safety

Riding with children

Observe the following pre- cautions when children are in the vehicle. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicles seat belt. It is recommended that chil-

dren sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch, etc.

Use the window lock switch to avoid children operating the power window acciden- tally. (P.130)

Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc.

WARNING When children are in the vehi-

cle Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure them- selves by playing with the win- dows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

631-2. Child safety

1

For safety and security

Points to remember: P.63 Child restraint system: P.65 When using a child restraint sys- tem: P.65 Child restraint system installa- tion method Fixed with a seat belt: P.66 Fixed with child restraint

LATCH anchors: P.70 Using an anchor bracket (for

top tether strap): P.72

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. as well as Canada now require the use of child restraint systems. Prioritize and observe the

warnings, as well as the laws and regulations for child restraint systems.

Use a child restraint system until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicles seat belt.

Choose a child restraint sys- tem that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.

Child restraint sys- tems

Before installing a child restraint system in the vehi- cle, there are precautions that need to be observed, different types of child restraint systems, as well as installation methods, etc., written in this manual. Use a child restraint system when riding with a small child that cannot properly use a seat belt. For the childs safety, install the child restraint system to a rear seat. Be sure to follow the installation method that is in the operation manual enclosed with the restraint system.

Table of contents

Points to remember

WARNING When a child is riding Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

For effective protection in auto- mobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system which is correctly installed. For installa- tion details, refer to the opera- tion manual enclosed with the child restraint system. General installation instruction is pro- vided in this manual.

64 1-2. Child safety

WARNING Toyota strongly urges the use of

a proper child restraint system that conforms to the weight and size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

Holding a child in your or some- one elses arms is not a substi- tute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield or between the holder and the interior of the vehicle.

Handling the child restraint system

If the child restraint system is not properly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seri- ously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving, or an accident.

If the vehicle were to receive a strong impact from an accident, etc., it is possible that the child restraint system has damage that is not readily visible. In such cases, do not reuse the restraint system.

Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided with the child restraint system manufacturer and that the system is properly secured.

Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.

If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk.

651-2. Child safety

1

For safety and security

Types of child restraint system installation methods Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system about the installation of the child restraint system.

When installing a child restraint system to a front passenger seat

Child restraint systems cannot be installed to the front passen- ger's seat.

Child restraint system

Installation method Page

Seat belt attachment P.66

Child restraint LATCH anchors attachment P.70

Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) attach-

ment P.72

When using a child restraint system

66 1-2. Child safety

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. Installing child restraint

system using a seat belt (child restraint lock func- tion belt)

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

WARNING When installing a child

restraint system Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Never use a child restraint sys- tem on the front passenger seat. The force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to children in the event of an acci- dent.

Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS cur- tain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the childs shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the childs neck, but not so that it could fall off the childs shoulder.

Use child restraint system suit- able to the age and size of the child and install it to the rear seat.

If the drivers seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

Child restraint system fixed with a seat belt

671-2. Child safety

1

For safety and security

Rear-facingInfant seat/convertible seat

1 Place the child restraint sys- tem on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

2 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

3 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

4 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoul- der belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

5 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (P.69)

Forward-facingConvert- ible seat

1 Place the child restraint sys- tem on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

2 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the

68 1-2. Child safety

buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

3 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

4 While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to

check that it cannot be extended.

5 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturers operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (P.72)

6 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (P.69)

Booster seat 1 Place the child restraint sys-

tem on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Booster type

691-2. Child safety

1

For safety and security

High back type

2 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint sys- tem according to the manu- facturers instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is cor- rectly positioned over the childs shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (P.23)

Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt

Press the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt. When releasing the buckle, the child restraint system may spring up due to the rebound of the seat cushion. Release the buckle while holding down the child restraint

system. Since the seat belt automatically reels itself, slowly return it to the stowing position.

WARNING When installing a child

restraint system Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a childs neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed.

When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the childs shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the childs neck, but not so that it could fall off the childs shoulder.

70 1-2. Child safety

Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the each rear seat. (Buttons dis- playing the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)

When installing in the each rear seats

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. With flexible lower attach-

ments 1 Open the anchor covers, and

install the child restraint sys- tem to the seat.

The bars are installed behind the anchor covers. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint sys- tem indicates the presence of a

WARNING Follow all installation instruc-

tions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm the security of the child restraint system.

When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (P.25)

Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerv- ing or an accident.

Child restraint system fixed with child restraint LATCH anchors

711-2. Child safety

1

For safety and security

lower connector system.

Canada only With rigid lower attachments 1 Open the anchor covers, and

install the child restraint sys- tem to the seat.

The bars are installed behind the anchor covers. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint sys- tem indicates the presence of a

lower connector system.

Canada only 2 If the child restraint has a top

tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturers operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (P.72)

3 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (P.69)

Laws and regulations pertain- ing to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 speci- fications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

A A

72 1-2. Child safety

Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

Anchor brackets are provided for the each rear seat. Use anchor brackets when fix- ing the top tether strap.

Anchor brackets Top tether strap

Fixing the top tether strap to the anchor bracket

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. (P.69)

Hook Top tether strap

Laws and regulations pertain- ing to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 speci- fications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819. When using an anchor bracket

(for top tether strap) Store the removed cover in a safe place. Also, after removing a child restraint system, make sure to install the removed cover to its original posi- tion.

WARNING When installing a child

restraint system Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.

Follow all installation instruc- tions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm the security of the child restraint system.

Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap)

A

A

731-2. Child safety

1

For safety and security

WARNING When installing a child

restraint system Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Firmly attach the top tether strap and make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Do not attach the top tether strap to anything other than the anchor bracket.

Follow all installation instruc- tions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm the security of the child restraint system.

74 1-3. Emergency assistance 1-3.Emergency assistance

*: If equipped

SOS button LED light indicators Microphone i button

Multimedia system screen As with the i button, the Roadside Assist icon displayed on the home screen of the multimedia system can be used to operate Enhanced Roadside Assistance.

Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services avail- able: Automatic Collision Notifica-

tion*

Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (P.76) *: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2 Stolen Vehicle Location Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P.76) Emergency Assistance Button

(SOS button)

Safety Connect*

Safety Connect is a sub- scription-based telematics service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Con- nect is supported by Toy- otas designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hard- ware-equipped vehicles. By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agree- ment and its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Toyota.com in the United States and Toy- ota.ca in Canada. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.

System components

Services

A

C

D

751-3. Emergency assistance

1

For safety and security

Connects drivers to response-cen- ter support. (P.76) Enhanced Roadside Assis-

tance (i button) Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P.77)

After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving ser- vices. A variety of subscription terms are available for purchase. Con- tact your Toyota dealer, call the following appropriate Customer Experience Center or push the SOS button in your vehicle for further subscription details. The United States 1-800-331-4331 Canada 1-888-869-6828

Safety Connect Services Infor- mation

Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth technology will not be possible when Safety Connect is active and in use.

Safety Connect is available begin- ning Fall 2009 on select Toyota models (in the contiguous United States only). Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condi- tion, cellular connection availabil- ity, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the abil-

ity to reach the response center or receive emergency service sup- port. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement are required. A variety of subscrip- tion terms are available; charges vary by subscription term selected and location.

Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location are available in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assis- tance are available in the United States and Canada.

Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle and Enhanced Road Assistance are not available in the U.S. Virgin Islands. For vehicles first sold in the U.S. Virgin Islands, no Safety Connect services will function in or outside the U.S. Virgin Islands.

Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Tele- communications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.

Languages The Safety Connect response cen- ter will offer support in multiple lan- guages. The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and French. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling. When contacting the response

center You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.

When the engine switch is turned to ON, the red indicator light and green indicator light will

Subscription

Safety Connect LED light Indicators

76 1-3. Emergency assistance

illuminate and then turn off. Then, the green indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the service is active. The following indicator light pat- terns indicate specific system usage conditions: Green indicator light on =

Active service Green indicator light flashing

= Safety Connect call in pro- cess

Red indicator light on (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact your Toy- ota dealer)

No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active

Automatic Collision Notifi- cation

In case of either airbag deploy- ment or severe rear-end colli- sion, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicles location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occu- pants are unable to communi- cate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emer- gency services provider to

describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location. Stolen Vehicle Location If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Customer Experi- ence Center at 1-800-331-4331 in the United States or 1-888-869-6828 in Canada, and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service. In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Con- nect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circum- stances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Toyota.com in the United States and Toyota.ca in Canada. Emergency Assistance But-

ton (SOS button) In the event of an emergency on the road, push the SOS button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answer- ing agent will determine your vehicles location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required. If the SOS button is pressed unin- tentionally, press and hold the SOS button for approximately 2 seconds or more or operate the

Safety Connect services

771-3. Emergency assistance

1

For safety and security

connection screen on the multime- dia system screen to cancel the connection to a response-center agent. Enhanced Roadside Assis-

tance (i button) Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Toyota roadside service. Subscribers can press the i button on the interior lights to contact a Roadside Assistance provider, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Enhanced Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Toyota.com in the United States and Toyota.ca in Canada. If the i button on the interior lights is pressed unintentionally, press and hold the i button for approximately 2 seconds or more or operate the connection screen on the multimedia sys- tem screen to cancel the con- nection to a roadside assistance provider.

Important! Read this informa- tion before using Safety Con-

nect. Exposure to radio fre-

quency signals The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals. In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies. ANSI (American National

Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]

NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]

ICNIRP (International Com- mission on Non-Ionizing Radi- ation Protection) [1996]

Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant sci- entific literature. Over 120 scien- tists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and govern- ment health agencies and industries reviewed the avail- able body of research to develop the ANSI Standard

Safety information for Safety Connect

78 1-3. Emergency assistance

(C95.1). The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guide- lines in addition to those stan- dards.

791-4. Theft deterrent system

1

For safety and security

1-4.Theft deterrent system

The indicator light flashes after the engine switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating. The indicator light stops flashing after the engine switch has been turned to ACC or ON to indicate that the system has been can- celed.

System maintenance The vehicle has a mainte- nance-free type engine immobilizer system. Conditions that may cause the

system to malfunction If the grip portion of the key is in

contact with a metallic object If the key is in close proximity to or

touching a key registered to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehi- cle

Engine immobilizer system

The vehicles keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicles on-board computer. Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

Operating the system

NOTICE To ensure the system oper-

ates correctly Do not modify or remove the sys- tem. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

80 1-4. Theft deterrent system

Items to check before lock- ing the vehicle

To prevent unexpected trigger- ing of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following: Nobody is in the vehicle. The windows are closed

before the alarm is set. No valuables or other per-

sonal items are left in the vehicle.

Setting Close the doors, trunk and

hood, and lock both side doors using the entry function or wire- less remote control. The system will set automatically after 30 seconds. The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the sys- tem is set.

Canceling or stopping Do one of the following to deac- tivate or stop the alarms: Unlock the doors or open the

trunk using the entry function or wireless remote control.

Turn the engine switch to ACC or ON, or start the engine.

1 Check that both side doors and the trunk are closed.

2 Turn the engine switch to ON.

3 Open the drivers door while pressing and holding on the door lock switch and con- tinue to press for approxi-

Alarm

The alarms default setting is set to off. To use the alarm, perform the activat- ing the alarm system proce- dures. The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected. The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set: A locked door or trunk is

unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function or wireless remote control.

The hood is opened.

Setting/canceling/stop- ping the alarm system

Activating/deactivating the alarm system

811-4. Theft deterrent system

1

For safety and security

mately 10 seconds after the drivers door has opened.

The alarm system changes between activated and deactivated as follows.

System maintenance The vehicle has a mainte- nance-free type alarm system. Opening and closing the trunk If the alarm setting operations are

performed with the trunk left open, the alarm will not be set. After closing the trunk, the alarm is set after 30 seconds or more elapse.

When the trunk is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control while the alarm is set, the alarm goes into standby mode. After closing the trunk, the alarm is set again after 30 sec- onds or more elapse.

Triggering of the alarm The alarm may be triggered in the following situations: (Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)

The doors are unlocked using the key or the mechanical key.

A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle using an inside lock button.

The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. (P.373)

Alarm sta- tus Horn

Multi-infor- mation dis- play

Deacti- vated

Sounds twice AL OFF

Activated Sounds once AL ON

NOTICE To ensure the system oper-

ates correctly Do not modify or remove the sys- tem. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

82 1-4. Theft deterrent system

83

2

2

Vehicle status inform ation and indicators

Vehicle status information and indicators

.

2-1. Instrument cluster Warning lights and indica- tors ...............................84

Gauges and meters .......88 Multi-information display

.....................................93

84 2-1. Instrument cluster 2-1.Instrument cluster

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning lights and indicators illuminated.

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle systems.

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and overhead console inform the driver of the status of the vehicles various systems.

Warning lights and indicators displayed on the instru- ment cluster

Warning lights

(U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light*1 (P.348)

(Canada)

Brake system warning light*1 (P.348)

(red)

High coolant temperature warning light*1 (P.348)

Charging system warning light*1 (P.348) Low engine oil pressure warning light*1 (P.349)

(U.S.A.)

Malfunction indicator lamp*1 (P.349)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator lamp*1 (P.349)

SRS warning light*1 (P.53, 349)

(U.S.A.)

ABS warning light*1 (P.349)

852-1. Instrument cluster

2

Vehicle status inform ation and indicators

*1:These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to ON to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

*2:The front passengers seat belt reminder light is located on the overhead console.

*3:This light illuminates on the over- head console.

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicles various systems.

(Canada)

ABS warning light*1 (P.349)

Electric power steering system warning light*1 (P.350)

Slip indicator*1 (P.350)

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light (if equipped) (P.350) Open door warning light (P.351) Low fuel level warning light*1 (P.351) Drivers and front passen- gers seat belt reminder light*1, 2 (P.351) Rear passengers seat belt reminder lights*1, 3 (P.352)

(yellow)

Conventional Cruise Con- trol indicator (if equipped) (P.352) BSD/RCTA warning light (if equipped) (P.352) SRH warning light (if equipped) (P.352) RAB warning light (if equipped) (P.353) LED headlight warning light (P.353) Automatic headlight level- ing system warning light (P.353) Master warning light*1 (P.353)

EyeSight warning light (if equipped) (P.353) Tire pressure warning light*1 (P.354)

WARNING If a safety system warning

light does not come on Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or seri- ous injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

Indicators

Turn signal indicator (P.155) Tail light indicator (P.158)

86 2-1. Instrument cluster

Drive mode indicators Normal mode

Headlight high beam indi- cator (P.160) High beam assist indicator (if equipped) (P.162) EyeSight temporary stop indicator (if equipped) (P.228) Pre-Collision Braking Sys- tem OFF indicator*1, 2 (if equipped) (P.189)

(white/gr een)

Conventional Cruise Con- trol indicator (if equipped) (P.208, 254)

(white/gr een)

Adaptive Cruise Control indicator (if equipped) (P.196)

READY indicator (if equipped) (P.196) Lead vehicle indicator (if equipped) (P.196) Lead vehicle indicator*3 (if equipped) (P.196) Your vehicle indicator (if equipped) (P.196) Following distance setting indicator (if equipped) (P.196) Following distance setting indicator*3 (if equipped) (P.196) Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator*1, 2 (if equipped) (P.220) BSD/RCTA OFF indica- tor*2 (if equipped) (P.235) SRH OFF indicator*2 (if equipped) (P.161)

RAB OFF indicator*1, 2 (if equipped) (P.246)

(flashes) Slip indicator*1 (P.261)

VSC OFF indicator*1, 2 (P.262) TRAC OFF indicator*1, 2 (P.261) Smart key system indica- tor*3 (P.145) Hill-start assist control ON indicator (P.258) Security indicator (P.79, 80)

(blue)

Low coolant temperature indicator*4

Upshift/downshift indica- tor (vehicles with an auto- matic transmission) (P.151) Shift-up indicator (vehicles with a manual transmis- sion) (P.155)

Passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator*1, 5 (P.27)

Low outside temperature indicator*6 (P.88)

Snow mode indicator (if equipped) (P.257) SPORT indicator (if equipped) (P.257)

872-1. Instrument cluster

2

Vehicle status inform ation and indicators

TRACK mode

*1:These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to ON to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

*2:The light comes on when the system is turned off.

*3:This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

*4:This indicator turns on when the engine coolant temperature is low.

*5:This light illuminates on the over- head console.

*6:When the outside temperature is approximately 37F (3C) or lower, this indicator will illumi- nate.

Snow mode indicator (if equipped) (P.257) SPORT indicator (if equipped) (P.257)

TRACK indicator (P.262)

SNOW

SPORT

88 2-1. Instrument cluster

Locations of gauges and meters Normal mode

Multi-information display Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P.93) Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction (P.357)

Tachometer Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute The red zone will be lower than normal, when the engine is cold

Outside temperature Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40F (-40C) to 122F (50C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 37F (3C) or lower.

Clock Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature Fuel gauge Speedometer Shift position and gear position (P.149, 154) Odometer and trip meter display (P.90)

Gauges and meters

Meter display

A

C

D

892-1. Instrument cluster

2

Vehicle status inform ation and indicators

TRACK mode

Multi-information display Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P.93) Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction (P.357)

Tachometer Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute The red zone will be lower than normal, when the engine is cold

Outside temperature Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40F (-40C) to 122F (50C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 37F (3C) or lower.

Clock Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature Fuel gauge Speedometer Shift position and gear position (P.149, 154) Odometer and trip meter display (P.90)

REV indicator When the engine speed reaches a set speed, the shift position and shift range indicator will illu- minate in orange and a buzzer will sound. If the engine speed

enters the red zone, the shift position and shift range indicator will illuminate in red and a buzzer will sound. The default setting for the REV indi- cator is disabled. The setting can

A

C

D

90 2-1. Instrument cluster

be enabled/disabled on of the multi-information display. (P.400)

The engine speed at which the REV indicator is displayed can be changed on of the multi-infor- mation display. (P.400)

Outside temperature display In the following situations, the cor-

rect outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change:

When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])

When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

When -- is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Liquid crystal display P.94 Customization The meter display can be custom- ized on the multi-information dis- play. (P.400)

Changing the display Press the display change button until the desired item is dis-

WARNING The information display at

low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. For example, there is a lag between the drivers shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and exces- sive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury.

NOTICE To prevent damage to the

engine and its components Do not let the indicator needle

of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maxi- mum engine speed.

Pay extra attention to the engine speed when the engine is cold, as the red zone will be lower than normal.

If the engine coolant tempera- ture gauge indicator is flashing, the engine may be overheating. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled com- pletely. (P.374)

Odometer and trip meter display

912-1. Instrument cluster

2

Vehicle status inform ation and indicators

played.

Display items Odometer Displays the total distance the vehi- cle has been driven. Trip meter A/Trip meter B Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently. To reset, display the desired trip meter and press and hold the dis- play change button.

When the headlights or front position lights are on, the bright- ness of the meter and instru- ment panel lights can be adjusted using the instrument panel brightness dial.

1 Brighter 2 Darker

Instrument panel light bright- ness adjustment

When the headlights or front posi- tion lights are turned on, the meter and instrument panel lights will be dimmed. However, if the instrument panel brightness dial is set to the highest position, the lights will not dim even if the headlights or front position are turned on. Auto dimmer cancel When the surrounding area is bright, such as during the day, or if the lights are turned on before nec- essary, the automatic dimming func- tion will be cancelled. In this case, the brightness cannot be adjusted, even if the instrument panel bright- ness dial is turned. Customization Some functions can be customized. (P.400)

The clocks can be adjusted on the multimedia system screen. Setting the clock to be

adjusted automatically (vehicles with safety con- nect)

1 Press .

Changing the instrument panel light brightness

Adjusting the clock

92 2-1. Instrument cluster

2 Select . 3 Select General. 4 Select Clock. 5 Select Time Setting. 6 Select AUTO. The clock will be set automati- cally where a GPS signal is available. Setting the clock to be

adjusted automatically (vehicles without safety connect)

1 Press .

2 Select . 3 Select General. 4 Select Clock. 5 Select Time Setting. 6 Select Sync With Phone. The clock will be set and adjusted automatically when a smartphone is connected via Bluetoothfor transferring phonebook data. For details, refer to the MULTIMEDIA OWNERS MANUAL. Adjusting the clock manu-

ally 1 Press .

2 Select . 3 Select General. 4 Select Clock. 5 Select Time Setting.

6 Select Manual then adjust the clock.

7 Select OK. Changing the clock

between 12H/24H format 1 Press .

2 Select . 3 Select General. 4 Select Clock. 5 Select 12H or 24H.

Clock settings screen The clock setting screen can also be displayed by touching the clock on the status bar.

932-1. Instrument cluster

2

Vehicle status inform ation and indicators

Display Normal display By selecting menu icons on the multi-information display, a vari- ety of driving-related information can be displayed. The multi-information display can also be used to change display settings and other vehicle set- tings. Warning or advice pop-up dis- plays are also displayed in cer- tain situations.

TRACK mode display Vehicles without EyeSight: When in TRACK mode, the TRACK mode display will remain displayed. Vehicles with EyeSight: When in TRACK mode, the Pre-Collision Braking System will be turned off and the

TRACK mode display will remain displayed. (P.189) Warning or advice pop-up dis- plays are also displayed in cer- tain situations.

Engine coolant temperature (P.88) Engine oil temperature

Displays the engine oil tempera- ture.

Fastest lap time Refer to P.97for the operating method.

Current lap time Refer to P.97for the operating method. Menu icons Select a menu icon to display its content.

Multi-information dis- play

The multi-information dis- play presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data.

Displays and menu icons

Driving information (P.94)

Sport information (P.96)

Navigation system-linked display* (P.98) Audio system-linked dis- play (P.98) Driving support system information display (if equipped) (P.98)

A

C

D

94 2-1. Instrument cluster

*: Displayed when the navigation system of Apple CarPlay or Android Auto is operating. For details, refer to the MULTIMEDIA OWNERS MANUAL.

Liquid crystal display Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenom- enon is characteristic of liquid crys- tal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches.

For information pertaining to the content of each menu icon, refer to the explanation of each item under the heading of the rele- vant menu icon.

/ : Select menu icons / : Change displayed

content, scroll up/down the screen and move the cursor Press: Enter Press and hold: Reset/change scale of the G-force display Return to the previous screen

Display items

Press or of the meter control switch and select . Then press or to display the following items: Driving information (page 1) Driving information (page 2) Driving information (page 3) Driving information (page 4)

Driving support system setting display (P.98)

Settings display (P.98)

Warning message display (P.357)

WARNING The multi-information display

at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. For example, there is a lag between the drivers shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and exces- sive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury.

Changing the meter dis- play

Content of driving infor- mation

A

C

952-1. Instrument cluster

2

Vehicle status inform ation and indicators

Driving information (page 1) Use the display as a reference.

Voltmeter Displays the charging voltage. As voltage displayed may be differ- ent from the actual battery voltage, use the voltmeter as a guideline.

Engine oil temperature gauge

Displays the engine oil tempera- ture. Driving information (page 2) Use the display as a reference.

Current fuel consumption Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

Average fuel consumption Displays the average fuel con- sumption since the function was reset.

Driving range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining. This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated. Driving information (page 3) Use the display as a reference.

Average vehicle speed Displays the average vehicle speed since display was reset.

Driving time Displays the cumulative time the vehicle has been driven since dis- play was reset.

Driving distance Displays the cumulative distance the vehicle has been driven since display was reset.

Pressing and holding will reset the average vehicle speed/driving time/driving dis-

A

A

C

A

C

96 2-1. Instrument cluster

tance. Driving information (page 4) Displays each tire pressure. (P.315)

Display items

Press or of the meter control switch and select . Then press or to display the following items: G-force Suitable for confirming current lat- eral G-forces on the vehicle. G-force (peak hold function) Suitable for confirming the size and direction of the maximum lateral G-forces on the vehicle. Power and torque curve Stopwatch G-force Displays lateral G-forces on the vehicle. Also displays, around the periphery of the G-force display, the left and right steering amount, accelerator pedal input, and brake fluid pressure. This display is intended for use as a guideline. Depending on factors such as the road surface condition, temperature and vehi- cle speed, the display may not show the actual condition of the vehicle.

Acceleration G-force on the vehicle Accelerator pedal input Brake fluid pressure Steering amount

Press and hold to change the range of the acceleration G-force display between 1.0 G and 0.5 G. G-force (peak hold func-

tion) Displays lateral G-forces on the vehicle. Also displays, around the periphery of the G-force display, the left and right steering amount, accelerator pedal input, and brake fluid pressure. This display is intended for use as a guideline. Depending on factors such as the road surface condition, temperature and vehi- cle speed, the display may not show the actual condition of the vehicle.

Sport information

A

C

D

972-1. Instrument cluster

2

Vehicle status inform ation and indicators

Record of the maximum G-forces

Press and hold to reset the record of maximum G-forces.

Acceleration G-force on the vehicle Accelerator pedal input Brake fluid pressure Steering amount

Power and torque curve This chart is intended for refer- ence only and does not show the actual engine torque or out- put.

Power output Torque Current engine speed

The vertical bar will slide laterally according to the current engine speed.

Stopwatch Measures and displays current lap time and previous lap times. Top screen

Fastest lap time (top screen) When the timer is reset, - -- -- - will be displayed. Measurement screen

Fastest lap time (measure- ment screen) Current lap time Total lap time Past lap times

Records of the 50 most recent lap times will be displayed.

Meter control switch opera- tion guide

Changing between the stop- watch screens

To change to the measurement

A

C

D

A

C

A

A

C

D

98 2-1. Instrument cluster

screen: Press . To change to the top screen: Press

.

Operating the measurement screen

: Start/stop measurement

: Mark off one lap

: Reset measured lap times

: Scroll through the lap times Resetting measured lap times After stopping the measurement, press .

To display other content while the stopwatch is operating

If the measurement screen is dis- played, press to display the top screen. Then operate the meter control switches to display other content. While other items are displayed, the measurement will continue but the stopwatch cannot be operated.

Select to display the route guid- ance information.

Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the dis- play using the meter control

switches.

Select to display the operational status of the Adaptive Cruise Control system (P.190, 207)

The settings of the following systems can be changed. LDW (Lane Departure Warn-

ing) (if equipped) PCB (Pre-Collision Braking)

(if equipped) BSD/RCTA (if equipped) RAB (Reverse Automatic

Braking system) (if equipped)

(Sonar Audible Alarm) (if equipped)

SRH (Steering Responsive Headlight) (if quipped)

Meter display settings that can be changed

Units Select to change the units of mea- sure displayed. Startup Scrn

Navigation system-linked display

Audio system-linked dis- play

Driving support system information display (if equipped)

Driving support system setting display

Settings display

992-1. Instrument cluster

2

Vehicle status inform ation and indicators

Select to enable/disable the startup screen when the engine switch is turned to ON. GSI (if equipped) Select to enable/disable the shift position indicator and shift-up indi- cator. REV. (REV indicator) Select to enable/disable the rev

indicator. Select to enable/disable the

sounding of a buzzer when the REV indicator is illuminated.

Select to set the engine speed at which the rev indicator (orange) will begin to be displayed.

Vehicle functions and set- tings that can be changed

P.400

Suspension of the settings dis- play

Some settings cannot be changed while driving. When changing set- tings, park the vehicle in a safe place.

If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will be suspended.

WARNING Cautions during setting up

the display As the engine needs to be run- ning during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventila- tion. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a seri- ous health hazard.

NOTICE While setting up the display To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting up the display fea- tures.

100 2-1. Instrument cluster

101

3

3

Before driving

Before driving

.

3-1. Key information Keys ............................ 102

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Doors .......................... 105 Trunk ........................... 107 Smart key system ....... 111

3-3. Adjusting the seats Front seats .................. 119 Rear seats................... 121 Head restraints............ 123

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel ............ 125 Inside rear view mirror

.................................. 126 Outside rear view mirrors

.................................. 127 3-5. Opening, closing the win-

dows and moon roof Power windows ........... 129

102 3-1. Key information 3-1.Key information

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys Operating the smart key system

(P.111) Operating the wireless remote

control function (P.103) Mechanical keys Key number plate

When riding in an aircraft When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the elec- tronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an elec- tronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could inter- fere with the operation of the air- craft. Electronic key battery depletion The standard battery life is 1 to 2

years. If the battery becomes low, an

alarm will sound in the cabin and a message will be shown on the multi-information display when the engine is stopped.

To reduce key battery depletion when the electronic key is to not be used for long periods of time, set the electronic key to the bat- tery-saving mode. (P.112)

As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The fol- lowing symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P.329)

The smart key system or the wire- less remote control does not oper- ate.

The detection area becomes smaller.

The LED indicator on the key sur- face does not turn on.

To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electri- cal appliances that produce a magnetic field:

TVs Personal computers Cellular phones, cordless phones

and battery chargers Recharging cellular phones or

cordless phones Table lamps Induction cookers Replacing the battery P.329 Confirmation of the registered

key number The number of keys already regis- tered to the vehicle can be con- firmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.

Keys

The keys

A

C

NOTICE To prevent key damage Do not drop the keys, subject

them to strong shocks or bend them.

1033-1. Key information

3

Before driving

The electronic keys are equipped with the following wireless remote control:

Locks the doors (P.105) Unlocks the doors (P.105) Opens the trunk (P.110) Sounds the alarm

Panic mode When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle. To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.

Vehicle finder function When the function is set, a buzzer (sounds once) and the emergency flashers (flash 3 times) are used to inform the driver of the vehicles location.

Press 3 times within 5 seconds while within a circumference of approximately 30 ft. (10 m) from of the vehicle. However, if the interval between the 3 presses is short, the system may not be activated.

NOTICE Do not expose the keys to high

temperatures for long periods of time.

Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.

Do not attach metallic or mag- netic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials.

Do not disassemble the keys.

Do not attach a sticker or any- thing else to the surface of the electronic key.

Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio sys- tems and induction cookers.

Carrying the electronic key on your person

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from elec- tric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related problems

P.369

When an electronic key is lost P.368

Wireless remote control

A

C

D

104 3-1. Key information

Customization Some functions can be customized. (P.400)

To take out the mechanical key, push the release button and take the key out. The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cyl- inder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it. After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (P.369)

If you lose your mechanical keys

P.368

Using the mechanical key

1053-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

3

Before driving

3-2.Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart key system Carry the electronic key to enable this function.

1 Grip the drivers door handle to unlock the door. Grip the passengers door handle to unlock all the doors.*

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle. The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked. *: The door unlock settings can be

changed. 2 Touch the lock sensor (inden-

tation on the side of the door handle) to lock the doors.

Check that the door is securely locked.

Wireless remote control

1 Locks both side doors Check that the door is securely locked. 2 Unlocks both side doors Pressing the button unlocks the drivers door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other door.

Side window open/close func- tion linked to door operation

In order to make opening and clos- ing the doors easier, completely closed windows are linked to door operations. Therefore, when a door is opened, its window opens slightly. When a door is closed, its window closes completely. However, if the battery has dis- charged or is disconnected, this function will not operate. (P.374) Operation signals A buzzer sounds and the emer- gency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice) When the door cannot be

locked by the lock sensor on the surface of the door handle

If the doors cannot be locked by touching the lock sensor with a fin- ger, touch the lock sensor with the palm of your hand. If you are wearing gloves, remove

Doors

Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside

106 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

them.

Door lock buzzer If an attempt to lock the doors using the entry function or wireless remote control is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer will sound continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the doors again. Alarm Locking the doors will set the alarm system. (P.80) Conditions affecting the opera-

tion of the smart key system or wireless remote control

P.112 If the smart key system or the

wireless remote control does not operate properly

Use the mechanical key and/or inside lock buttons to lock and unlock the doors. (P.369) Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (P.329) If the battery is discharged The doors cannot be locked and unlocked using the smart key sys- tem or wireless remote control. Lock or unlock the doors using the mechanical key. (P.369) Customization Some functions can be customized. (P.400)

Door lock switches (to lock/unlock)

1 Locks both side doors 2 Unlocks both side doors

WARNING To prevent an accident Ensure that both side doors are properly closed and locked while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant being thrown out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.

When opening or closing a door

Check the surroundings of the vehicle such as whether the vehi- cle is on an incline, whether there is enough space for a door to open and whether a strong wind is blowing. When opening or clos- ing the door, hold the door handle tightly to prepare for any unpre- dictable movement.

Side window open/close func- tion linked to door operation

Do not hold the upper edge of the side window when you close the door. Otherwise, your fingers or hand may be caught in the win- dow.

Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside

1073-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

3

Before driving

Inside lock buttons (to lock/unlock)

1 Locks the door 2 Unlocks the door

Locking the doors from the out- side without a key

1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

2 Close the door. The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACC or ON, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. However, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked. Door lock prevention function This function prevents the doors from being locked if an electronic key is left inside the vehicle. Customization Some functions can be customized. (P.400)

Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener switch, entry function or wireless remote control.

WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Before driving Make sure that the trunk lid is

closed before driving. If not fully closed, while driving, it may open unexpectedly, hit near-by objects, or luggage may fall out, possibly leading to an accident. Also, exhaust gasses may enter the vehicle, possibly leading to death or a serious health haz- ard.

Do not allow children to play in the trunk. If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat exhaustion, suffoca- tion or other injuries.

Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid. Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the childs hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.

Important points while driving Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

108 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

WARNING Using the trunk Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.

Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

Be careful not to come into con- tact with the exhaust gasses when opening or closing the trunk. If the engine is running, there is a risk of being burned by the exhaust gasses.

When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.

If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close.

Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.

The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.

When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to prevent your fin- gers etc. from being caught.

When closing the trunk lid, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface.

Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

Trunk lid damper stays Do not pull on or disassemble the trunk lid damper stays, or dispose of them in a fire. Illustrations on the trunk lid damper stays indicate the following:

: Do not pull

1093-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

3

Before driving

Trunk opener switch Press and hold the trunk opener switch.

Smart key system While carrying the electronic key, press the button on the trunk lid. When all of the doors are unlocked, the trunk lid can be opened while not carrying an electronic key. However, as the doors will be locked when the vehicle is driven (at a vehicle speed of 3 mph [5 km/h] or more), the trunk will not be able

WARNING

: Do not disassemble

: Do not dispose of in fire

Do not pull on the trunk damper stay to close the trunk, and do not hang on the trunk damper stay. Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the trunk damper stay to break, causing an acci- dent.

NOTICE Using the trunk When closing the trunk lid, do not strongly push down on the trunk lid. Doing so may dent the trunk lid.

Trunk damper stays The trunk lid is equipped with damper stays that hold the trunk lid in place. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause dam- age to trunk damper stays, result- ing in a malfunction.

Do not attach any foreign objects such as stickers, plastic sheets and adhesives to damper stay rods.

Do not touch damper stay rods with gloves or other fabric items.

Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk lid.

Do not apply lateral force to damper stays or place your hand on it.

Opening/closing the trunk

110 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

to be opened until a door is opened.

Wireless remote control Press and hold the switch. A buzzer sounds.

Trunk light The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened. Function to prevent the trunk

being locked with the electronic key inside

When both side doors are locked, closing the trunk lid with the elec- tronic key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm. In this case, the trunk lid can be opened by pressing the trunk release button on the trunk lid.

If the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with both side doors locked, the key confinement pre- vention function is activated so the trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the

vehicle. If the electronic key is put in the

trunk with both side doors locked, the key may not be detected depending on the location of the key and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention func- tion cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the trunk.

The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if either door is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.

Internal trunk release lever The trunk lid can be opened by pull- ing the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid upward. The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed.

If the smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (P.329) Customization Some functions can be customized. (P.400)

1113-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

3

Before driving

Antenna location

Antennas outside the cabin Antennas inside the cabin Antenna outside the trunk Antenna inside the trunk

Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 1.3 2.6 ft. (0.4 0.8 m) of an outside door handle. (Only the doors detect- ing the key can be operated.)

When opening the trunk The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 1.3 2.6 ft. (0.4 0.8 m) of the trunk release button.

When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes

The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehi- cle. Alarms and warning messages An alarm sounds and warning mes- sages are displayed on the multi-information display to protect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle resulting from erroneous operation. When a warn- ing message is displayed, take appropriate measures based on the displayed message. (P.357) When only an alarm sounds, cir- cumstances and correction proce- dures are as follows. When an exterior alarm sounds

once for 5 seconds

Smart key system

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. The driver should always carry the electronic key. Locks and unlocks the

doors (P.105) Opens the trunk (P.109) Starts the engine (P.145)

A

C

D

A

C

112 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

When an exterior alarm sounds once for 2 seconds

When an interior alarm sounds continuously

Battery-saving function The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the vehi- cle battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time. In the following situations, the

smart key system may take some time to unlock the doors.

The electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.

The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.

If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at the passenger door. In this case, take hold of the drivers door han- dle, or use the wireless remote control or mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function

When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.

Press twice while pressing and holding . Confirm that the elec- tronic key indicator flashes 4 times. While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart key system cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.

Conditions affecting operation The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situa- tions, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and engine immobilizer sys- tem from operating properly. (Ways of coping: P.369) When the electronic key battery is

Situation Correction procedure

An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.

Close both side doors and lock the doors again.

Situation Correction procedure

The trunk was closed while the electronic key was still inside the trunk and both side doors were locked.

Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid.

Situation Correction procedure

The engine switch was turned to ACC while the drivers door was open (or the drivers door was opened while the engine switch was in ACC).

Turn the engine switch off and close the drivers door.

The engine switch was turned off while the drivers door was open.

Close the drivers door.

1133-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

3

Before driving

depleted Near a TV tower, electric power

plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facil- ity that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

When the electronic key is in con- tact with, or is covered by the fol- lowing metallic objects

Cards to which aluminum foil is attached

Cigarette boxes that have alumi- num foil inside

Metallic wallets or bags Coins Hand warmers made of metal Media such as CDs and DVDs When other wireless keys (that

emit radio waves) are being used nearby

When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves

Another vehicles electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves

Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)

Digital audio players Portable game systems If window tint with a metallic con-

tent or metallic objects are attached to the rear window

When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or elec- tronic devices

Note for the entry function Even when the electronic key is

within the effective range (detec- tion areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:

The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door han- dle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked

or unlocked. The electronic key is near the

ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.

The electronic key is on the instru- ment panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the engine is started or engine switch modes are changed.

Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna out- side the cabin and the doors will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.

As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.

Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possi- ble to start the engine if the elec- tronic key is near the window.

The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash, when the electronic key is within the effec- tive range. (The doors will auto- matically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

Touching the door lock or unlock sensor while wearing gloves may prevent lock or unlock operation.

When the lock operation is per-

114 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

formed using the lock sensor, rec- ognition signals will be shown up to three consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, follow the following correc- tion procedures to wash the vehi- cle:

Place the electronic key in a loca- tion 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

Set the electronic key to bat- tery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (P.112)

If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehi- cle. To turn off the alarm, lock both side doors.

The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.

A sudden handle operation or a handle operation immediately after entering the effective range may prevent the doors from being unlocked. Touch the door unlock sensor and check that the doors are unlocked before pulling the door handle again.

Unlocking the vehicle may take more time if another electronic key is within the effective range.

When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.

The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. (P.115)

Setting the electronic key to bat- tery-saving mode helps to reduce key battery depletion. (P.112)

To operate the system properly Make sure to carry the electronic

key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operat- ing the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and hold- ing condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected cor- rectly and the system may not oper- ate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock pre- vention function may not operate.) Do not leave the electronic key

inside the trunk. The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depend- ing on the location of the key (the inside edge of the Trunk), condi- tions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in the surrounding area. (P.111)

If the smart key system does not operate properly

Locking and unlocking the doors: P.369

Starting the engine: P.370 Customization Some functions can be customized. (P.400) If the smart key system has

been disabled Locking and unlocking the doors:

Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P.105, 369)

Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes: P.370

Stopping the engine: P.147

1153-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

3

Before driving

In the following situations, the smart key system should be dis- abled. When people with implantable

cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter defibrillators ride in the vehicle.

When the vehicle will not be used for a long time, or the smart key system is not used.

When storing an electronic key near or inside the vehicle cannot be avoided.

When the smart key system is disabled, use the wireless remote control to lock and unlock the doors. When starting the engine, it will be necessary to hold the elec- tronic key near the engine switch. (P.370) Disabling the smart key

system The smart key system can be disabled by opening and closing the doors or using the wireless remote control. Door opening/closing method 1 While sitting in the drivers

seat, close the door.

2 Press of the door lock switch.

3 Within 5 seconds of perform- ing step 2, open the drivers door.

4 Within 5 seconds of perform- ing step 3, press of the door lock switch 2 times with the door open.

5 Within 10 seconds of per- forming step 4, close and

WARNING Caution regarding interfer-

ence with electronic devices People with implantable car-

diac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization ther- apy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the smart key system antennas. (P.111) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toy- ota dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doc- tor to see if you should disable the entry function.

Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization ther- apy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unex- pected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

The smart key system can be dis- abled. (P.115)

When to disable the smart key system

116 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

open the drivers door 2 times.

6 Within 10 seconds of per- forming step 5, press of the door lock switch 2 times with the door open.

7 Within 10 seconds of per- forming step 6, close and open the drivers door 1 time.

8 Within 5 seconds of perform- ing step 7, close the drivers door.

A buzzer will sound for approxi- mately 2 seconds and the smart key system will be disabled. Wireless remote control

method 1 Open the drivers door and

push the lock lever forward.

2 Press and hold and of the wireless remote control at the same time for 5 seconds or more.

A buzzer will sound for approxi- mately 2 seconds and the smart key system will be disabled. Enabling the smart key sys-

tem The smart key system can be enabled by performing the pro-

cedure used to disable it again. When enabled a buzzer will sound.

Door opening/closing method Make sure to firmly press the door lock switch in steps 4 and 6. If the switch is pressed for a very short time, the system may not be dis- abled. Wireless remote control

method To use the wireless remote control method to disable the smart key system, it is necessary to register a PIN code for the PIN code smart entry. (P.117) When enabling the smart key

system If the method used to disable the smart key system is unknown, press the engine switch. If the wireless remote control sys-

tem was used, a buzzer inside the vehicle will sound.

If the door opening/closing method was used, the buzzer will not sound.

Customization Some functions can be customized. (P.400)

NOTICE When disabling the smart key

system When disabling or enabling the system to accommodate persons with implantable cardiac pace- makers, cardiac resynchroniza- tion therapy pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrilla- tors, always use the door open- ing/closing method. If the wireless remote control method is used, the system may be enabled acci- dentally.

1173-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

3

Before driving

By registering a 5 digit PIN code, all of the doors and the fuel filler door can be unlocked without an electronic key by pressing the trunk opener switch. PIN code registration

method 1 Turn the engine switch off. 2 Close all of the doors and the

trunk.

3 Press and hold of the wireless remote control.

At this time, all of the doors and the fuel filler door will lock. 4 Within 5 seconds of perform-

ing step 3, press and hold the trunk opener switch.

After 5 seconds or more, a buzzer will sound.

5 Release of the wireless remote control and the trunk opener switch.

6 Within 30 seconds after the buzzer begins sounding, press of the wireless remote control.

The buzzer will stop. 7 A PIN code can now be reg-

istered. Press the trunk opener switch the same num- ber of times as the first digit of the PIN code.

For example: If registering 32468, press the switch 3 times. 8 Wait for the buzzer to sound

1 time and then press the switch the same number of times as for the next digit.

For example: If registering 32468, press the switch 2 times. 9 Repeat step 8 for the remain-

ing digits. 10Within 30 seconds after the

buzzer begins sounding intermittently, perform steps 7 through 9 again to confirm the PIN code.

Registration is complete and all of the doors and the fuel filler door will unlock. Unlocking method Press the trunk opener switch using the same procedure as steps 7 through 9.

PIN code registration To prevent theft, the same digit for

all 5 digits and 12345 cannot be registered as the PIN code. Also, avoid using the same number as on your license plate or other sim- ple codes.

To use 0 as a digit, press the trunk opener switch 10 times.

If a mistake is made during regis- tration, unlock the doors or trunk using the wireless remote control to cancel registration. Then per- form registration again, starting from step 1. However, if the mis- take was made in step 10, a buzzer will sound and step 10 can be performed again.

To clear the PIN code, perform the registration procedure and enter 22222.

Unlocking the doors using PIN code smart entry

118 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

After registering a new PIN code, make sure to check that the doors can be unlocked using the code.

If the smart key system has been disabled using the wireless remote control method, the PIN code for the PIN code smart entry cannot be cleared. (P.115)

In the following cases, perform the PIN code registration procedure again.

If the PIN code has been forgot- ten.

When you wish to change the PIN code.

Make sure to change the PIN code periodically.

If the vehicle has been loaned to another person, make sure that the PIN code has not been changed or cleared. If the PIN code has been changed or cleared, perform PIN code regis- tration again.

Unlocking method If an electronic key is within a

detection area, operation of the smart entry will be given priority.

If a mistake is made while entering the PIN code, wait 5 seconds or more before performing the proce- dure again.

If the incorrect PIN code is entered 5 times consecutively, a buzzer will sound for approxi- mately 2 seconds and operation will not be possible for 5 minutes.

1193-3. Adjusting the seats

3

Before driving

3-3.Adjusting the seats

Seat position adjustment lever Seatback angle adjustment lever Vertical height adjustment lever (drivers side only) Seatback fold lever

To get in and out of the rear seats, use the seatback angle adjustment lever or seatback fold lever. Before getting in or out of

the rear seats Remove the seat belt from the seat belt guide. (P.25)

When getting in or out of the rear seats

Drivers side

Pull the seatback fold lever ( ) or lift the seatback angle adjust- ment lever ( ). The seatback will fold forward.

Front passengers side

Pull the seatback fold lever ( ) or lift the seatback angle adjust- ment lever ( ). The seatback will fold forward. The seat can be slid forward and backward.

After getting in or out of the rear seats

Return the seatback to the upright position until the seat locks. Front passenger seat only: The

Front seats

Adjustment procedure

Getting in and out of the rear seats

A

C

D

A

B

A

B

120 3-3. Adjusting the seats

seat will lock in position at the point where the seatback reaches the upright position.

Seat dust cover Always remove the seat dust cover that may be attached at the time of purchase before using the seat.

WARNING Seat adjustment To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increas- ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.

Take care not to hit passengers with the seat. When sliding the seat rearward, make sure not to squash the legs of the rear pas- sengers.

When returning the seatback upright, perform seatback angle adjustment while holding down the seatback.

Do not pull on or use the seat belt guide to adjust or fold the front seat.

Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

When driving the vehicle Never operate the seat position adjustment lever, seatback angle adjustment lever or seatback fold lever. Doing so could cause an accident resulting in death or seri- ous injury.

Getting in and out of the rear seats

When getting in or out of the rear seats, make sure not to get your hands, legs, etc. squashed in the movable or connecting parts.

When getting in or out of the rear seats, make sure not to trip on the seat rails.

After getting in or out of the rear seats, always make sure the front seat is locked in position.

When operating the front seat from the rear seat

Make sure that no passenger is seated in the front seat.

NOTICE When adjusting a front seat When adjusting a front seat, make sure that the head restraint does not contact the headliner. Other- wise, the head restraint and head- liner may be damaged.

1213-3. Adjusting the seats

3

Before driving

1 Move the front seats forward. (P.119)

2 Fold the seatback down. Lock release buttons Press the seatback lock release buttons and fold the seatback down. Press the button until the lock is released. To return the seatbacks to its origi- nal position, lift it up until it locks.

Lock release straps Pull the seatback lock release straps in the trunk for the seatback you wish to fold down. To return the seatbacks to its origi- nal position, lift it up until it locks.

NOTICE When getting in and out the

vehicle Do not rub your back against the side support pad of backrest. Oth- erwise surface of the side support pad is damaged early. You can move the seat backward to pre- vent the contact.

Rear seats

The rear seatbacks can be folded down.

Folding down the rear seatbacks

122 3-3. Adjusting the seats

Seat dust cover Always remove the seat dust cover that may be attached at the time of purchase before using the seat.

WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

When folding the rear seat- backs down

Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.

Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).

Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driving.

Do not allow children to enter the trunk.

After returning the rear seat- back to the upright position

Push the rear seatback and then check that it is securely locked in position by lightly pushing it back and forth. If the seatback is not securely locked, the red portion of the seatback lock indicator will be visible. Make sure that the red portion is not visible.

Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

Before using the rear seat belts

Always make sure that the seat belt is not caught in the seatback or twisted in one of the hooks that secure the seatback. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to not be fastened correctly or to become ineffective in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury.

1233-3. Adjusting the seats

3

Before driving

1 Up Pull the head restraints up. 2 Down Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button .

Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button

. If the head restraint touches the ceiling, making the removal diffi- cult, change the seat height or angle. (P.119)

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position. Press and hold the lock release

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for front seats.

WARNING Head restraint precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.

Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Adjusting a head restraint vertically

A

Removing the head restraints

Installing the head restraints

A

124 3-3. Adjusting the seats

button when lowering the head restraint.

A

1253-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

3

Before driving

3-4.Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

1 Hold the steering wheel and push the lever down.

2 Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.

To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.

Steering wheel

Adjustment procedure

WARNING Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and resulting in death or serious injury. Also, the horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

Horn

126 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

The height of the rear view mir- ror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture. Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

Reflected light from the head- lights of vehicles behind can be reduced by operating the lever.

Normal position Anti-glare position

Inside rear view mirror

The rear view mirrors posi- tion can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirma- tion of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

WARNING Caution while driving Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an acci- dent, resulting in death or serious injury.

Anti-glare function

A

1273-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

3

Before driving

1 To select a mirror to adjust, turn the switch.

Left Right

2 To adjust the mirror, operate the switch.

Left Down Right Up

Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The engine switch is in ACC or ON. When the mirrors are fogged up The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defog- gers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (P.272)

Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicles rear.

Outside rear view mir- rors

The rear view mirrors posi- tion can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirma- tion of the rear view.

WARNING Important points while driving Observe the following precautions while driving. Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

Adjustment procedure

A

WARNING When the mirror defoggers

are operating Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

Folding the mirrors

A

C

D

128 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

1293-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

3

Before driving

3-5.Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches. Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

1 Closing 2 One-touch closing*

3 Opening 4 One-touch opening*

*: To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction.

The power windows can be operated when

The engine switch is in ON. Operating the power windows

after turning the engine off The power windows can be oper- ated for approximately 40 seconds after the engine switch is turned to ACC or OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. Jam protection function If an object becomes jammed between the window and the body

while the window is closing, window movement is stopped and the win- dow is opened slightly. Catch protection function If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window is opening, window movement is stopped. When the window cannot be

opened or closed When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually and the door window can- not be opened or closed, perform the following operations with the power window switch of that door. 1 Check that all of the doors are

closed. 2 Turn the engine switch to ON. 3 Press and hold the power win-

dow switch in the one-touch opening position. After the win- dow is fully opened, continue pressing the switch for approxi- mately 1 second.

4 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. After the window is fully closed, continue pulling the switch for approximately 1 sec- ond.

If you push the power window switch to the opening position while the window is moving, start again from the beginning. If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Power windows

Opening and closing the power windows

WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

130 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Press the switch down to lock the passenger window glasses. Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or clos- ing a passenger window.

WARNING Closing the windows The driver is responsible for all

the power window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the win- dow lock switch. (P.130)

Check to make sure that all pas- sengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

Jam protection function Never use any part of your body

to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your body jammed in the window.

Catch protection function Never use any part of your body

or clothing to intentionally acti- vate the catch protection func- tion.

The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or clothing caught in the window.

Preventing accidental operation (window lock switch)

131

4

4

D riving

Driving

.

4-1. Before driving Driving the vehicle....... 132 Cargo and luggage ..... 140 Vehicle load limits ....... 143 Trailer towing............... 143 Dinghy towing ............. 144

4-2. Driving procedures Engine (ignition) switch

.................................. 145 Automatic transmission

.................................. 149 Manual transmission ... 153 Turn signal lever.......... 155 Parking brake.............. 156 ASC (Active Sound Control)

.................................. 157 4-3. Operating the lights and

wipers Headlight switch.......... 158 High Beam Assist ........ 162 Windshield wipers and washer....................... 165

4-4. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap

.................................. 167 4-5. EyeSight

EyeSight...................... 170 Pre-Collision Braking Sys- tem ............................ 179

Adaptive Cruise Control .................................. 190

Conventional Cruise Control .................................. 207

Pre-Collision Throttle Man- agement .................... 215

Lane Departure Warning .................................. 219

Lane Sway Warning .... 221 Lead Vehicle Start Alert

.................................. 223 List of alert/notification sounds....................... 225

EyeSight malfunction and temporary stop .......... 227

4-6. Using other driving sys- tems

BSD/RCTA................... 231 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system ............ 239

Rear view camera ....... 249 Conventional Cruise Control

.................................. 254 Driving mode select switch

.................................. 257 Hill-start assist control . 258 Driving assist systems

.................................. 261 4-7. Driving tips

Winter driving tips........ 265

132 4-1. Before driving 4-1.Before driving

Starting the engine P.145 Driving Automatic transmission 1 With the brake pedal

depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P.149)

2 Release the parking brake. (P.156)

3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to acceler- ate the vehicle.

Manual transmission 1 While depressing the clutch

pedal, shift the shift lever to 1. (P.153)

2 Release the parking brake. (P.156)

3 Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gen- tly depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- cle.

Stopping Automatic transmission 1 With the shift lever in D,

depress the brake pedal.

2 If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P. (P.149) Manual transmission 1 While depressing the clutch

pedal, depress the brake pedal.

2 If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to N. (P.153) Parking the vehicle Automatic transmission 1 With the shift lever in D,

depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle completely.

2 Set the parking brake (P.156), shift the shift lever to P. (P.149)

Check the parking brake indicator is illuminated. 3 Press the engine switch to

stop the engine. 4 Slowly release the brake

pedal. 5 Lock the door, making sure

that you have the key on your person.

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed. Manual transmission 1 While depressing the clutch

pedal, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle completely.

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Driving procedure

1334-1. Before driving

4

D riving

2 Set the parking brake. (P.156)

Check that the parking brake indi- cator is illuminated. 3 Shift the shift lever to N.

(P.153) If parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R and block the wheels as needed. 4 Press the engine switch to

stop the engine. 5 Slowly release the brake

pedal. 6 Lock the door, making sure

that you have the key on your person.

Starting off on a steep uphill

Automatic transmission 1 Make sure that the parking

brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.

2 Gently depress the accelera- tor pedal.

3 Release the parking brake. Manual transmission 1 Make sure that the parking

brake is set and shift the shift lever to 1.

2 Lightly depress the accelera- tor pedal at the same time as gradually releasing the clutch pedal.

3 Release the parking brake.

When starting off on an uphill The hill-start assist control will acti-

vate. (P.258) Driving in the rain Drive carefully when it is raining,

because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.

Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

Engine speed while driving (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due to auto- matic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration. The vehicle is judged to be driving

uphill or downhill When the accelerator pedal is

released When driving on curves When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed Restraining the engine output

(Brake Override System) When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the engine output may be restrained. New vehicle break-in driving

(the first 1000 miles [1600 km]) The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instruc- tions during the first 1000 miles (1600 km):

134 4-1. Before driving

Do not race the engine. And do not allow the engine speed to exceed 4000 rpm except in an emergency.

Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or slow.

Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emer- gency.

Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency. The same break-in procedures should be applied to an over- hauled engine, newly mounted engine or when brake pads or brake linings are replaced with new ones.

Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed- ding down operation. After the engine starts For a short time after the engine is started, in order to ensure emissions performance, intake and exhaust noise and vibration may increase, but this does not indicate a malfunc- tion. Operating your vehicle in a for-

eign country Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (P.381)

WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

When starting the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This pre- vents the vehicle from creeping.

Firmly depress the brake pedal because engine speed may increase immediately after start- ing the engine, when the air conditioning system is operat- ing, when turning the steering wheel, etc., thereby causing creeping to become stronger. Apply the parking brake as nec- essary.

When driving the vehicle Do not drive if you are unfamil-

iar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.

When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when mov- ing the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.

Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emer- gency, resulting in an accident.

1354-1. Before driving

4

D riving

WARNING Do not drive the vehicle over or

stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

Vehicles with a manual trans- mission: Do not release the clutch pedal too quickly. Doing so may propel the vehicle for- ward, possibly causing an acci- dent.

During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or brak- ing control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P.338

Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to over- heat and lose effectiveness. (P.149, 153)

Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.

Always check that all passen- gers arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle.

Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driv- ing over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

When driving on slippery road surfaces

Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle.

Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid.

After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning prop- erly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.

When shifting the shift lever Vehicles with an automatic

transmission: Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving posi- tion, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

136 4-1. Before driving

WARNING Vehicles with an automatic

transmission: Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can damage the trans- mission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the trans- mission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving for- ward. Doing so can damage the trans- mission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disen- gage the engine from the trans- mission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

Do not place items in the shift lever's surrounding area. It may cause incorrect operation.

If the shift boot is pulled out during cleaning, return it to its previous position. If the shift boot is left pulled out, the shift lever may become difficult to operate.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

When the vehicle is stopped Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (automatic transmis- sion) or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unex- pectedly, causing an accident.

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: In order to pre- vent accidents due to the vehi- cle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as nec- essary.

If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent acci- dents caused by the vehicle roll- ing forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

1374-1. Before driving

4

D riving

WARNING When the vehicle is parked Do not leave glasses, cigarette

lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the fol- lowing:

Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.

Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short cir- cuit in the vehicles electrical components.

Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, caus- ing a fire.

Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission), stop the engine and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unat- tended while the engine is run- ning. If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.

Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns.

When taking a nap in the vehi- cle

Always turn the engine off. Other- wise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the acceler- ator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly venti- lated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, lead- ing to death or a serious health hazard.

When braking When the brakes are wet, drive

more cautiously. Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

138 4-1. Before driving

WARNING If the brake booster device does

not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require brak- ing. In this case, braking is still pos- sible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the brak- ing distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.

The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

If the vehicle becomes stuck Do not spin the wheels exces- sively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or pro- pel the vehicle forward or back- ward, causing an accident.

NOTICE Pre-driving check Trapping small animals in the cooling fan and belts of the engine may result in a malfunction. Check that no small animal enters the engine compartment and under the vehicle before starting the engine.

When driving the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time while driving, as this may restrain the engine output.

Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelera- tor and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

When driving the vehicle (vehicles with a manual trans- mission)

Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain the engine output.

Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting, do not release the clutch pedal abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, trans- mission and gears.

Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause excessive premature wear or damage to the clutch, eventu- ally making it difficult to acceler- ate and start off from a stop. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal or depress it any time other than when shifting. Doing so may cause clutch trou- ble.

Do not use any gear other than the 1st gear when starting off and moving forward. Doing so may damage the clutch.

1394-1. Before driving

4

D riving

NOTICE Do not use the clutch pedal to

adjust vehicle speed. Doing so may damage the clutch.

Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill grade. Doing so may damage the clutch.

When stopping the vehicle with the shift lever in a position other than N, make sure to fully depress the clutch pedal and stop the vehicle using the brakes.

Do not shift the shift lever to R without the vehicle completely stopped. Doing so may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.

Do not release the clutch pedal too quickly. Doing so may dam- age the transmission.

When parking the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Always set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may acceler- ate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not race the engine for more than 5 seconds in any position except the N or P position when the brake is applied or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.

If you get a flat tire while driv- ing

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradu- ally depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.

The vehicle will lean abnor- mally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P.358)

When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

Engine stalling

Short in electrical components

Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toy- ota dealer check the following:

Brake function

Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, differen- tial, etc.

140 4-1. Before driving

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants. (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) (Total weight of occupants) Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passen- gers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passen- gers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passen- gers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 -

NOTICE Lubricant condition for the pro-

peller shaft, bearings and sus- pension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:

Capacity and distribution

1414-1. Before driving

4

D riving

750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calcu- lated in Step 4. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehi- cle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (P.143) Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) (P.380)

When 2 people with the com- bined weight of A lb. (kg) are rid- ing in your vehicle, which has a

total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg) *1:A =Weight of people *2:B =Total load capacity *3:C =Available cargo and luggage

load In this condition, if 2 more passen- gers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg) *4:D =Additional weight of people *5:E =Available cargo and luggage

load As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and lug- gage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the num- ber of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

Calculation formula for your vehicle

A

142 4-1. Before driving

WARNING Things that must not be car-

ried in the trunk The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:

Receptacles containing gaso- line

Aerosol cans

Storage precautions Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.

To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low, as close to the floor as possible.

When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind the front seats.

Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fas- tened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sud- den swerving or an accident.

Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may get under the clutch (manual transmission), brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, block the drivers vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an acci- dent:

At the feet of the driver

On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

On the package tray

On the instrument panel

On the dashboard

Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sud- den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Capacity and distribution

Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

Even if the total load of occu- pants weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

1434-1. Before driving

4

D riving

Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P.324)

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Total load capacity (vehicle

capacity weight): P.380 Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. Seating capacity: P.380 Seating capacity means the max- imum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person. Towing capacity Toyota does not recommend tow- ing a trailer with your vehicle. Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occu- pants.

WARNING Overloading the vehicle Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steer- ing and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

Trailer towing

Toyota does not recom- mend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer tow- ing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

144 4-1. Before driving

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE To avoid serious damage to

your vehicle Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.

1454-2. Driving procedures

4

D riving

4-2.Driving procedures

1 Check that the parking brake is set.

2 Check that the shift lever is in P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).

3 Firmly depress the brake pedal (automatic transmis- sion) or clutch pedal (manual transmission). , and a message will be dis-

played on the multi-information dis- play. If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be started. 4 Press the engine switch

shortly and firmly. When operating the engine switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch. The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 10 seconds, whichever is less. Continue depressing the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or clutch pedal (manual transmission) until the engine is completely started. The engine can be started from any

engine switch mode.

If the engine does not start The engine immobilizer system

may not have been deactivated. (P.79) Contact your Toyota dealer.

If a message related to start-up is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and fol- low the instructions.

If the battery is discharged The engine cannot be started using the smart key system. Refer to P.371to restart the engine. Electronic key battery depletion P.102 Conditions affecting operation P.112 Notes for the entry function P.113 Steering lock function After turning the engine switch off

and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the engine switch again automatically can- cels the steering lock.

When the steering lock cannot be released, Locked. Push Ignition Switch While Turning Steering Wheel will be displayed on the multi-information display. Check that the shift lever is in P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission). Press the

Engine (ignition) switch

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the engine or changes engine switch modes.

Starting the engine

146 4-2. Driving procedures

engine switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, operation of the motor may be suspended if the engine is turned on and off repeat- edly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the engine switch. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.

When Keyless Access System Disabled Check Owner's Man- ual is displayed on the multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. Electronic key battery P.329 Operation of the engine switch If the switch is not pressed shortly

and firmly, the engine switch mode may not change or the engine may not start.

If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the engine switch off, the engine may not start in some cases. After turn- ing the engine switch off, please wait more than 10 seconds before restarting the engine.

If the smart key system has been disabled

If the smart key system has been disabled, refer to P.369.

Immediately after reconnecting the battery terminals due to replacing the battery and so forth

The engine may not start. If this occurs, turn the engine switch to ON, and start the engine after wait- ing at least 10 seconds. Idling may be unstable immediately after the engine starts, however, this is not a malfunction.

WARNING When starting the engine Always start the engine while sit- ting in the drivers seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Caution while driving If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE When starting the engine Do not race a cold engine.

If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not shift the shift lever while the starter is operating.

1474-2. Driving procedures

4

D riving

Automatic transmission 1 Stop the vehicle completely. 2 Set the parking brake

(P.156), and shift the shift lever to P.

Check the parking brake indicator is illuminated. 3 Press the engine switch. The engine will stop, and the meter display will be extinguished. 4 Release the brake pedal and

check that ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON is not shown on the meters.

Manual transmission 1 Stop the vehicle completely. 2 Set the parking brake.

(P.156) Check the parking brake indicator is illuminated. 3 Shift the shift lever to N.

(P.153) 4 Press the engine switch. The engine will stop, and the meter display will be extinguished.

5 Release the brake pedal and check that ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON is not shown on the meters.

Modes can be changed by

NOTICE Symptoms indicating a mal-

function with the engine switch

If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

Stopping the engine

WARNING Stopping the engine in an

emergency If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P.338) However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more dif- ficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

If the engine switch is operated while the vehicle is running, a warning message will be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer sounds.

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: To restart the engine after performing an emergency shutdown, shift the shift lever to N and then press the engine switch.

Vehicles with a manual trans- mission: To restart the engine after performing an emergency shutdown, depress the clutch pedal and then press the engine switch.

Changing engine switch modes

148 4-2. Driving procedures

pressing the engine switch with brake pedal (automatic trans- mission) or clutch pedal (manual transmission) released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

1 Off*

The emergency flashers can be used. 2 ACC Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. ACCESSORY will be displayed on the meters. 3 ON All electrical components can be used. IGNITION ON will be displayed on the meters. *: Vehicles with an automatic trans-

mission: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turn- ing off the engine, the engine

switch will be turned to ACC, not to off.

Auto power off function Automatic transmission: If the vehi- cle is left in ACC for more than 20 minutes or ON (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the engine switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine switch in ACC or ON for long periods of time when the engine is not running. Manual transmission: If the vehicle is left in ACC for more than 20 min- utes or ON (the engine is not run- ning) for more than an hour, the engine switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine switch in ACC or ON for long periods of time when the engine is not running.

If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other

NOTICE To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the engine switch

in ACC or ON for long periods of time without the engine running.

If ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON is displayed on the meters while the engine is not running, the engine switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the engine switch off.

When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P (vehicles with an auto- matic transmission)

1494-2. Driving procedures

4

D riving

than P, the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACC. Perform the fol- lowing procedure to turn the switch off: 1 Check that the parking brake

is set. 2 Shift the shift lever to P. 3 Check that ACCESSORY is

displayed on the meters and press the engine switch shortly and firmly.

4 Check that ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON on the meters are off.

*: If equipped

*1:To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noise, shift the shift lever to D for normal driving.

*2:Any gear range can be fixed when driving in Manual mode.

To protect the automatic trans- mission

If the automatic transmission fluid temperature is high, Transmission Oil Temperature Check Owner's Manual will be displayed on the multi-information display and the

NOTICE To prevent battery discharge Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACC mode. If the vehicle is left in ACC, battery discharge may occur.

Automatic transmis- sion*

Select the shift position depending on your purpose and situation.

Shift position purpose and functions

Shift posi- tion Objective or function

P Parking the vehi- cle/starting the engine

R Reversing

N

Neutral (Condition in which the power is not transmit-

ted)

D Normal driving*1

Temporary manual mode driving (P.151)

M Manual mode driving*2 (P.152)

150 4-2. Driving procedures

vehicle will go into transmission pro- tection mode automatically. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. When driving with Adaptive

Cruise Control or Conventional Cruise Control activated

Downshifting can be performed even when using Adaptive Cruise Control or Conventional Cruise Con- trol. After downshifting, the set speed continues. (P.151, 152) Automatic gear selection when

the vehicle is stopped When the vehicle is idling at high rpm in order to warm up, and the vehicle is on a slippery road, the transmission may automatically shift to 2nd gear for stopping and starting off. AI-SHIFT The AI-SHIFT automatically

selects the suitable gear accord- ing to driver performance and driv- ing conditions. The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in D. (Shifting the shift lever to the M position cancels the function.)

G AI-SHIFT automatically selects a suitable gear for sporty driving according to drivers input and driving conditions. G AI-SHIFT operates automatically when the shift lever is in D and sport mode is selected for the driving mode. (Selecting normal mode with the driving mode select switch or shift- ing the shift lever to the M position cancels this function.)

After recharging/reconnecting the battery

P.373

While the engine switch is in ON, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed. When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

Shift lock system The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever in starting. The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in ON and the brake pedal is being depressed. If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed. If the shift lever cannot be shifted

WARNING When driving on slippery

road surfaces Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.

Shifting the shift lever

1514-2. Driving procedures

4

D riving

with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted. Releasing the shift lock: 1 Set the parking brake. 2 Turn the engine switch off. 3 Depress the brake pedal. 4 Pry the cover up with a flathead

screwdriver or equivalent tool. To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

5 Press the shift lock override but- ton.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

P.257

Temporary manual mode driving can be changed to by operating the paddle shift switches while the shift lever is in the D posi- tion. When this occurs, the selected gear and M are displayed on the shift position and shift range indicator. (When engine speed rises close to the red zone, upshifting will be automatically performed.)

WARNING To prevent an accident when

releasing the shift lock Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking brake and depress the brake pedal. If the accelerator pedal is acci- dentally depressed instead of the brake pedal when the shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted out of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, possi- bly leading to an accident result- ing in death or serious injury.

Selecting the driving mode

Temporary manual mode driving

152 4-2. Driving procedures

1 Upshifting 2 Downshifting The selected shift range, from M1 to M6, will be displayed on the meter.

Automatic deactivation of tem- porary manual mode driving in the D position

Temporary manual mode driving in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations: When the vehicle speed is too

low. When the accelerator pedal is

depressed for more than a certain period of time.

When the accelerator pedal is fully, or near-fully, depressed.

When the shift lever is shifted to a position other than D.

When the + paddle shift switch is operated for a certain amount of time continuously

Downshifting restriction warn- ing buzzer

If downshifting operations are per- formed at a vehicle speed by which downshifting is not possible (when downshifting will cause the engine speed to enter the red zone), a buzzer will sound to warn the driver that downshifting cannot be per- formed.

To enter manual mode, shift the shift lever to the M position. While the upshift/downshift indi- cator light is illuminated, gears can be selected by operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in the gear of your choosing. Even if upshifting operations are performed, if vehicle speed is too low for the requested gear, the gear will not change.

Upshift indicator Downshift indicator

1 Upshifting (+) 2 Downshifting (-)

WARNING To prevent incorrect opera-

tion Do not attach items such as accessories to the paddle shift switches. Doing so may uninten- tionally move the paddle shift switches.

Manual mode driving

A

1534-2. Driving procedures

4

D riving

Each time the shift lever or paddle shift switches are operated, the gear changes up or down one gear and the selected gear, 1 through 6, will be set. The selected gear, from M1 to M6, will be fixed and displayed on the meter. When in manual mode, the gear will not change unless the shift lever or paddle shift switches are operated. However, even when in the manual mode, the gears will be automatically changed in the fol- lowing situation: When vehicle speed drops

(downshift only). When engine oil temperature

is high and engine speed rises close to the red zone.

Downshifting restriction warn- ing buzzer

If downshifting operations are per- formed at a vehicle speed by which downshifting is not possible (when downshifting will cause the engine speed to enter the red zone), a buzzer will sound to warn the driver that downshifting cannot be per- formed.

*: If equipped

Shifting the shift lever

1 Depress the clutch pedal firmly.

2 Shift the shift lever to the desired gear.

Make sure to only shift gears sequentially. 3 Gradually release the clutch

pedal. If it is difficult to shift in R, shift the lever to N, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again. Shifting the shift lever to R Shift the shift lever to R while lift- ing up the ring section.

WARNING To prevent incorrect opera-

tion Do not attach items such as accessories to the paddle shift switches. Doing so may uninten- tionally move the paddle shift switches.

Manual transmission*

Operating instructions

154 4-2. Driving procedures

Maximum allowable speeds Observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each gear when maximum acceleration is necessary.

The selected shift position will be displayed on the multi-infor- mation display. The indicator can be turned on/off. (P.400)

Shift posi- tion

Maximum speed mph (km/h)

1 29 (46)

2 48 (76)

3 68 (108)

4 86 (138)

5 104 (167)

6 136 (218)

NOTICE To prevent damage to the

vehicle When shifting gears, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the engine, manual transmission, and/or clutch.

Do not shift the shift lever with- out depressing the clutch pedal.

Do not lift up the ring section except when shifting the lever to R.

Shift the shift lever to R only when the vehicle is stationary.

Do not rest your hand on or hold the shift lever any time other than when shifting.

In order to not cause the engine to overrev, make sure to only shift gears sequentially.

Do not release the clutch pedal suddenly.

Shift position indicator

1554-2. Driving procedures

4

D riving

Shift position indicator display The selected shift position will not appear in the following situations: When the shift lever is in N. When the vehicle speed is 6 mph

(10 km/h) or less (except when the shift lever is in R).

When the clutch pedal is depressed.

To help enable fuel-efficient driv- ing, shift-up indicator illuminate to indicate upshift timing. The indicator can be turned on/off. (P.400)

The lever will return to its origi- nal position immediately after operation.

1 Right turn 2 Lane change to the right

(move the lever partway and hold it*)

The right turn signal lights will blink until the lever is released. 3 Lane change to the left

(move the lever partway and hold it*)

The left turn signal lights will blink until the lever is released. 4 Left turn *: When the turn signal lever is

operated to position 2 or 3, if the lever is released immediately, the

Shift-up indicator

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions

156 4-2. Driving procedures

turn signal lights will blink 3 times. If the turn signals do not

stop flashing after turning left or right, or if you want to stop them flashing

Operate the lever in the oppo- site direction to either position 2 or 3. If you move the lever to either position 1 or 4, the selected turn signals will flash.

Turn signals can be operated when

The engine switch is in ON. If the indicator flashes faster

than usual Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out. If the turn signals stop flashing

before a lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again. Customization Some functions can be customized. (P.400)

U.S.A. Canada

1 To set the parking brake, fully pull the parking brake lever while depressing the brake pedal.

2 To release the parking brake, slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the button.

Parking the vehicle P.132 If the brake system warning

light comes on P.348 Usage in winter time P.265

Parking brake

Operating instructions

A

1574-2. Driving procedures

4

D riving

When changing the driving mode (vehicles with an auto- matic transmission)

When the driving mode is changed, the sound of the active sound con- trol will be stopped for approxi- mately 1 second, this is not a malfunction. Customization Some functions can be customized. (P.400)

NOTICE When parking the vehicle Before you leave the vehicle, set the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmis- sion) or N (manual transmission) and make sure that the vehicle does not move.

Before driving Fully release the parking brake. Driving the vehicle with the park- ing brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

ASC (Active Sound Control)

The active sound control provides dynamic engine sounds. When driving with sport mode* (P.257) selected, the engine sounds will be particularly loud. *: If equipped

158 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers 4-3.Operating the lights and wipers

Operating the switch turns on the lights as follows: For the U.S.A.

1 The headlights, park- ing/daytime running lights (P.158) and all the lights listed above turn on and off automatically. (When the engine switch is in ON.)

2 The side marker, park- ing, tail, license plate, instru- ment panel lights and daytime running lights (P.158) turn on.

3 The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn

on.

4 The daytime running lights turn on. (P.158)

For Canada

1 The headlights, park- ing/daytime running lights (P.158) and all the lights listed above turn on and off automatically. (When the engine switch is in ON.)

2 The side marker, park- ing, tail, license plate, instru- ment panel lights and daytime running lights (P.158) turn on.

3 The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.

AUTO mode can be used when The engine switch is in ON. Daytime running light system The daytime running lights illumi-

nate using the same lights as the

Headlight switch

The headlights can be oper- ated manually or automati- cally.

Operating instructions

1594-3. Operating the lights and wipers

4

D riving

parking lights and illuminate brighter than the parking lights.

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.)

The engine is running The shift lever is shifted out of P

(vehicles with an automatic trans- mission)

The parking brake is released The headlight switch is in the

(U.S.A. only), or * position *: When the surroundings are bright The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the parking brake is set again. When the turn signal indicators

are flashing, the daytime running light on the side that the turn sig- nals are flashing will turn off.

When the emergency flashers are flashing, both daytime running lights will turn off.

Compared to turning on the head- lights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

Headlight control sensor In the following situations, the auto- matic light control system may not operate correctly. When an object is placed on the

sensor or something which blocks the sensor is affixed to the wind- shield

When the surrounding area is lit by light other than natural light

Automatic light off system When the light switch is in : The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after a door is opened and closed if the engine switch is turned off. (The lights turn off immediately if

on the key is pressed twice after both side doors are closed.) To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to ON, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or (except for Canada). Light reminder buzzer A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned off and the drivers door is opened while the lights are turned on. Automatic headlight leveling

system The level of the headlights is auto- matically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the load- ing condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users. Windshield wiper linked head-

light illumination When driving during daytime with the headlight switch turned to , if the windshield wipers are used, the headlights will turn on automatically after several seconds to help enhance the visibility of your vehi- cle. Battery-saving function In order to prevent the battery of the vehicle from discharging, if the headlights and/or tail lights are on

160 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

when the engine switch is turned off the battery saving function will oper- ate and automatically turn off all the lights after approximately 20 min- utes. When any of the following are per- formed, the battery-saving function will be disabled. When the engine switch is turned

to ACC or ON When the headlight switch is in

the position (U.S.A. only) When a door is opened or closed Welcome light illumination con-

trol The headlights and tail lights auto- matically turn on at night when the doors are unlocked using the wire- less remote control if the light switch is in the position. The headlights and tail lights will turn off automati- cally after approximately 30 sec- onds. Customization Some functions can be customized. (P.400)

1 With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.

Vehicles without high beam assist: If the lever is pushed and released, the high beam headlights will turn on. Pull and release the lever to turn off the high beam headlights and turn on the low beam head- lights. Vehicles with high beam assist: If the lever is pushed and released with the headlight switch in position, the high beam assist will turn on. When the high beam assist is operating, the headlights will automatically change between the high beams and low beams accord- ing to the conditions. If the lever is pushed forward and released again, the high beam assist will turn off and the high beam headlights will turn on. To manually turn the high beam headlights on, push and release the lever with the headlight switch in

position. If the lever is pulled and released, the high beam head- lights will turn off and the low beam headlights will turn on. 2 Illuminate the high beam

headlights while the lever is pulled

Even if the lights are off, the high beam headlights will illuminate. When the lever is released, the headlights will return to the low beam headlights or will turn off.

NOTICE To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

Turning on the high beam headlights

1614-3. Operating the lights and wipers

4

D riving

*: If equipped The SRH (Steering Responsive Headlights) is a function which, according to the steering wheel operation and vehicle speed when the vehicle is being driven forward, automatically adjusts the angle of the headlights to illuminate intersections and cor- ners, improving visibility. This function operates when the vehicle speed is 8 km/h or higher. Turning SRH off The SRH can be turned off through a setting on the meter. (P.400) When the SRH is off, the SRH OFF indicator will illuminate.

SRH warning light If the SRH malfunctions, the SRH warning light will illuminate and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. (P.357)

Customization Some functions can be customized. (P.400)

SRH (Steering Respon- sive Headlights)*

162 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

*: If equipped

Turn the headlight switch to position and push the lever for- ward. After the lever is operated, it will immediately return to its original position. The high beam assist will turn on and the high beam assist indicator will illuminate.

Conditions to turn the high beams on/off automatically

When all of the following condi- tions are met, the high beams will be turned on automatically (after approximately 1 second):

The vehicle speed is approxi- mately 20 mph (32 km/h) or more.

The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.

There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.

There are few streetlights on the road ahead.

If any of the following conditions is met, the high beams will turn off automatically:

The vehicle speed is below approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.

Vehicles ahead have their head- lights or tail lights turned on.

There are many streetlights on the road ahead.

Stereo camera detection infor- mation

If EyeSight is malfunctioning or temporarily disabled, the high beam assist will not operate, and the low beam headlights will turn on.

The high beams may not be auto- matically turned off in the following situations:

When a vehicle suddenly appears from around a curve

When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle

When vehicles ahead cannot be

High Beam Assist*

The high beam assist uses the stereo camera located behind the upper portion of the windshield to assess the brightness of the lights of vehicles ahead, street- lights, etc., and automati- cally turns the high beams on or off as necessary.

WARNING Limitations of the high beam

assist Do not overly rely on the high beam assist. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your sur- roundings and turning the high beams on or off manually if nec- essary.

To prevent incorrect opera- tion of the high beam assist system

Do not overload the vehicle.

Activating the high beam assist

1634-3. Operating the lights and wipers

4

D riving

detected due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees

When vehicles ahead appear in a faraway lane on a wide road

When the lights of vehicles ahead are not on

The high beams may be turned off if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without its headlights turned on is detected.

House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs and other reflective objects may cause the high beams to change to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on.

The following factors may affect the amount of time taken for the high beams to turn on or off:

The brightness of the headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehi- cles ahead

The movement and direction of vehicles ahead

When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side

When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle

The condition of the road (gradi- ent, curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)

The number of passengers and amount of luggage in the vehicle

When there is a lag in response due to the limitations of the detec- tion range of the stereo camera

The high beams may turn on or off unexpectedly.

Bicycles or similar vehicles may not be detected.

In the following situations the sys- tem may not be able to correctly detect the surrounding brightness level. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high beams to flash or dazzle pedestri- ans or vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is necessary to manually switch between the high and low beams.

When driving in inclement weather

(heavy rain, snow, fog, sand- storms, etc.)

When the windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.

When the windshield is cracked or damaged

When the stereo camera is deformed or dirty

When the temperature of the ste- reo camera is extremely high

When the surrounding brightness level is equal to that of headlights, tail lights or fog lights

When headlights or tail lights of vehicles ahead are turned off, dirty, changing color, or not aimed properly

When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle

When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness

When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads, etc.)

When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a wind- ing road

When there is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or mirror

When the back of a preceding vehicle is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck

When the vehicles headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly

When the vehicle is listing or titling due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.

Immediately after the engine is started

When the headlights are changed between the high beams and low beams repeatedly in an abnormal manner

When the driver believes that the high beams may be flashing or dazzling pedestrians or other driv- ers

164 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

The sensitivity of the high beam assist function can be lowered by using the following opera- tions. 1 After turning the engine

switch to ON, turn the head- light switch to position and push the lever forward.

2 After the high beam assist indicator on the meter will illuminate, turn the engine switch off.

3 Turn the engine switch to ON and within approximately 15 seconds, press the switch more than 10 times consecu- tively.

When the sensitivity of the high beam assist function is lowered, the high beam assist indicator on the meter will flash.

The sensitivity of the high beam assist function

The sensitivity of the high beam assist function cannot be lowered in the following conditions:

Adaptive Cruise Control or Con- ventional Cruise Control indicator is illuminated.

The EyeSight warning light is illu- minated.

The sensitivity of the high beam assist function returns to normal level the next time the engine switch is turned off and the engine is restarted.

Switching to the low beams

Turn the headlight switch to position. The high beam assist indicator will turn off. To turn the high beam assist on again, turn the headlight switch to

position.

Switching to the high beams

Push the lever forward. The high beam assist indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will illuminate. To turn the high beam assist on again, push the lever forward again.

How to temporarily lower the sensitivity of the high beam assist function

Turning the high beams on/off manually

1654-3. Operating the lights and wipers

4

D riving

Operating the lever oper- ates the wipers or washer as fol- lows. When is selected, the wipers will operate automatically in accordance with the vehicle speed.

1 Intermittent windshield wiper operation

2 Low speed windshield wiper operation

3 High speed windshield wiper operation

4 Temporary operation Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.

5 Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

6 Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

7 Washer/wiper dual operation

Pulling the lever operates the wip- ers and washer. Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

Windshield wipers and washer

Operating the lever can use the windshield wipers or the washer.

NOTICE When the windshield is dry Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

Operating the wiper lever

166 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The engine switch is in ON. If no windshield washer fluid

sprays Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reser- voir.

WARNING Caution regarding the use of

washer fluid When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE When the washer fluid tank is

empty Do not operate the switch continu- ally as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

1674-4. Refueling

4

D riving

4-4.Refueling

Close both side doors and windows, and turn the engine switch off.

Confirm the type of fuel.

Fuel types P.388 Fuel tank opening for unleaded

gasoline To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the spe- cial nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps. If the malfunction indicator

lamp illuminates The malfunction indicator lamp may illuminate erroneously if refueling is performed repeatedly when the fuel tank is nearly full.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehi- cle

WARNING When refueling the vehicle Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Do not handle fuel indoors.

After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal sur- face to discharge any static electricity. It is important to dis- charge static electricity before refueling because sparks result- ing from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.

Do not allow anyone to approach the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler pipe while refueling is in progress.

Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possi- ble ignition hazard.

When refueling Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:

168 4-4. Refueling

1 With the doors unlocked, press the center of the rear edge of the fuel filler door.

Push until you hear a click and take your hand away to slightly open the fuel filler door. Then open the door

fully by hand.

2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly and remove it, then put it into the holder on the fuel filler door.

When opening the fuel filler door

The fuel filler door cannot be opened if the doors have been unlocked using a inside lock button. Unlock the doors using the entry function, wireless remote control, or door lock switch. (P.105, 106) If the fuel filler door cannot be

opened P.369

1 After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is

WARNING Securely insert the fuel nozzle

into the fuel filler neck.

Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.

Do not top off the fuel tank.

Turn the cap to the right until it clicks to ensure that it is fully tightened. If the cap is not securely tightened, fuel spillage could occur in the event of an accident, creating a fire hazard.

NOTICE Refueling Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehi- cle, such as causing the emis- sion control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehi- cles painted surface.

Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.

Immediately put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Closing the fuel tank cap

1694-4. Refueling

4

D riving

released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

2 Close the fuel filler door, and press the center of the rear edge of the fuel filler door until you hear a click.

When you lock the doors, the fuel filler door will also lock.

When closing the fuel filler door Do not lock the doors before closing the fuel filler door, as the fuel filler door cannot be closed if the doors are locked. If the doors are locked and the fuel filler door cannot be closed, unlock the doors and then close the fuel filler door.

WARNING When replacing the fuel tank

cap Do not use anything but a genu- ine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or seri- ous injury.

170 4-5. EyeSight 4-5.EyeSight

*1: If equipped *2:EyeSight is a registered trade-

mark of SUBARU CORPORA- TION.

EyeSight records and stores the fol- lowing data when Pre-Collision Braking System is operated. It does not record conversations or other audio data. Stereo camera image data Distance from the vehicle in front Vehicle speed Steering wheel turning angle Lateral movement with regards to

the direction of travel Accelerator pedal operation status Brake pedal operation status Shift lever position Odometer reading Data related to ABS, VSC and

TRAC Toyota and third parties contracted by Toyota may acquire and use the recorded data for the purpose of vehicle research and development. Toyota and third parties contracted

by Toyota will not disclose or pro- vide the acquired data to any other third party except under the follow- ing conditions. The vehicle owner has given

his/her consent. The disclosure/provision is based

on a court order or other legally enforceable request.

Data that has been modified so that the user and vehicle cannot be identified is provided to a research institution for statistical processing or similar purposes.

EyeSight*1, 2

EyeSight is a driving sup- port system that uses a range of functions to assist the driver in making deci- sions in order to provide for more safe and comfortable driving and to reduce driver fatigue. Making use of images created by the ste- reo camera, EyeSight detects vehicles, obstacles, traffic lanes and other items ahead.

WARNING Drivers are responsible for driving safely. Always comply with all traf- fic rules and regulations regard- less of the fact that your vehicle is equipped with EyeSight. Always maintain a safe following dis- tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you, pay attention to your surroundings and driving conditions, and take necessary actions in order to maintain a safe following dis- tance.

Never attempt to drive relying on EyeSight alone.

EyeSight is intended to assist the driver in making decisions in order to reduce the risk of accidents or damage and lessen the burden on the driver.

When an EyeSight warning is activated, pay attention to what is in front of you and to your sur- roundings, and take necessary actions. This system is not designed to support driving in poor visibility or in extreme weather conditions, or to protect against careless driving when the driver is not paying complete attention to the road ahead. It also cannot prevent collisions from occurring in all driving conditions.

1714-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

WARNING There are limits to the EyeSight recognition performance and con- trol performance. Be sure to read the instructions for each function before using the system, and always use it properly. Improper use may lead to failure of control performance, which could cause an accident.

Refer to the following pages for each function:

For Pre-Collision Braking Sys- tem, refer to P.179.

For Adaptive Cruise Control, refer to P.190.

For Conventional Cruise Con- trol, refer to P.207.

For Pre-Collision Throttle Man- agement, refer to P.215.

For Lane Departure Warning, refer to P.219.

For Lane Sway Warning, refer to P.221.

For Lead Vehicle Start Alert, refer to P.223.

In left-hand drive vehicles, Eye- Sight is configured for driving on the right-hand side of the road. However, it can be reconfigured by changing the driving lane set- ting for driving on the left-hand side.* (P.400)

If the setting for the traffic lane (driving side of the road) does not match the traffic lane, full Eye- Sight performance may not be available.

*: Characteristics and settings that are affected by specific differ- ences between right-hand drive and left-hand drive vehicles cannot be changed.

The system may not operate correctly under the conditions listed below. When these condi- tions occur, turn off Pre-Colli- sion Braking System. Also, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control or Conventional Cruise Control.

The tire pressure is not cor- rect.*1

The temporary spare tire is installed.*1

Tires that are unevenly worn or tires with uneven wear patterns are installed.*1

Tires that are the wrong size are installed.*1

A flat tire has been fixed tempo- rarily with a tire repair kit.

The suspension has been modi- fied (including a genuine Toyota suspension that has been modi- fied).

An object that obstructs the ste- reo cameras view is installed on the vehicle.

Tire chains are installed.

The headlights are dirty or they have snow and ice or dirt on them. (Objects are not correctly illuminated and are difficult to detect.)

The optical axes are not aligned correctly. (Objects are not cor- rectly illuminated and are diffi- cult to detect.)

172 4-5. EyeSight

WARNING The lights including headlights

and fog lights have been modi- fied.

Vehicle operation has become unstable due to an accident or malfunction.

The brake system warning light is illuminated in red.*2

A heavy cargo is inside the vehicle.

The maximum number of occu- pants is exceeded.

The meter is not operating prop- erly; such as when the lights do not illuminate, the beeps do not sound, the display is different from when it is normal, etc.*3

The system will not operate cor- rectly in the following condi- tions. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control or Conventional Cruise Control.

The wheels are out of balance (e.g., the balance weight is removed or misaligned).*1

The wheels are out of align- ment.*1

A trailer or another vehicle, etc. is being towed.

*1:The wheels and tires have functions that are critically important. Be sure to use the correct ones. (P.386)

*2: If the brake system warning light (red) does not turn off, immediately pull the vehicle over in a safe place and con- tact a Toyota dealer to have the system inspected.

*3:For details about the meter, refer to P.88.

NOTICE The characteristics of the stereo

camera are similar to those of human eyes. For this reason, conditions that make it difficult for the driver to see in the for- ward direction have the same effect on the stereo camera. They also make it difficult for the system to detect vehicles, obstacles, and traffic lanes.

Detection by the EyeSight sys- tem is limited to objects that are within the range of the stereo cameras field of view. Also, after an object enters the range of the cameras field of view, it may take some time for the sys- tem to detect it as a controllable target and to warn the driver.

Low objects surrounding the vehicle cannot be detected.

A

1734-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

NOTICE Under the conditions listed

below, it will become more diffi- cult for the system to detect the vehicle in front, motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians and obsta- cles on the road, and lane mark- ers. Also, EyeSight may temporarily stop operating. However, the temporary stop will be canceled once these conditions have improved and the vehicle is driven for a short period of time.

Bad weather (for example heavy rain, a blizzard or thick fog). In particular, the system is more likely to temporarily stop operating when there is an oil film adhering to the windshield, a glass coating has been applied, or poorly performing wipers are used.

Strong light is coming from the front (sunlight or headlight beams of oncoming traffic, etc.).

The windshield washer is in use.

Raindrops, water drops, or dirt on the windshield are not wiped off sufficiently.

The windshield has become fogged, scratched or smeared, or snow, dirt ,dust or frost has adhered to it, or it is otherwise affected. These will reduce the stereo cameras field of view. Also, light is reflecting off the dirt, etc.

The vehicle is tilted at an extreme angle due to loaded cargo or other factors.

Visibility is poor due to sand, smoke or water vapor blowing in the wind, or the front vision is obscured due to water splashes, snow, dirt or dust stir up generated by the vehicle in front or oncoming traffic.

The stereo cameras field of view is obstructed.

Through the entrance or exit of a tunnel

The rear aspect of the vehicle in front is low, small or irregular (for example a low bed trailer, etc.).

The obstacle is a fence, a wall or a shutter, etc. with a uniform pattern (a striped pattern, brick, etc.) or with no pattern in front.

The obstacle is a wall or door made of glass or a mirror in front.

Driving at night or in a tunnel when there is a vehicle in front that does not have its taillights on

Driving through a banner or flag, low branches on a tree or thick/tall vegetation

On steep uphill or downhill grades

The stereo camera is obstructed by a hand, etc. (If even one of the lenses is obstructed, the system does not operate properly.)

It is completely dark and no objects are detected.

The area around the vehicle has a uniform color (such as when completely covered in snow, etc.).

174 4-5. EyeSight

The stereo camera is located on the interior lights unit.

1 Stereo camera

NOTICE Accurate detection is not possi-

ble due to reflections in the windshield.

Under the conditions listed below, EyeSight may temporar- ily stop operating. If this occurs, EyeSight will resume operating when the conditions improve.

The temperature inside the vehicle is high, such as after the vehicle was left in bright sun- shine, or the temperature inside the vehicle is low, such as after the vehicle was left in an extremely cold environment.

Immediately after the engine starts

Under the conditions listed below, it is difficult to recognize vehicles in front, motorcycles, pedestrians, obstacles on the road, traffic lanes, etc. Also, the EyeSight system may temporar- ily stop operating. If the Eye- Sight system repeatedly stops operating several times, con- tact a Toyota dealer and have the system inspected.

The stereo camera lenses are smeared such as from finger- prints.

The stereo camera has become misaligned due to a strong impact.

When there is a malfunction in the EyeSight system, turn off Pre-Collision Braking System (P.189) and Lane Departure Warning (P.220), and stop using Adaptive Cruise Control and Conventional Cruise Con- trol. Contact a Toyota dealer and have the system inspected.

When the slip indicator is illumi- nated, Pre-Collision Braking System may not operate prop- erly. If the slip indicator is illumi- nated, turn off Pre-Collision Braking System. Also, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control or Conventional Cruise Control.

Handling of the stereo camera

1754-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

NOTICE The stereo camera monitors

and detects smears or blurs on the front of the camera. How- ever, detection is not 100% accurate. Under certain conditions, the function may fail to detect smears or blurs on the front of the stereo camera accurately. In addition, this function may not detect that there is snow or ice on the windshield close to the stereo camera. In such condi- tions, be sure to keep the wind- shield clean at all times (indicated by ). Otherwise the system may not operate cor- rectly. When this function detects that the front of the ste- reo camera is smeared or blurred, no EyeSight functions can be activated except for Conventional Cruise Control.

The stereo camera lenses are precision components. Always observe the following precau- tions especially when handling them.

Never touch the stereo camera lenses, and do not attempt to wipe or clean the lenses. Doing so could damage or soil the lens, and lead to improper sys- tem performance. If you ever touch a lens for any reason, be sure to contact your Toyota dealer.

When cleaning the windshield, cover the front of the camera casing with paper that does not collect dust, such as copy paper. Affix the paper to prevent glass cleaner from getting on the camera lenses. At this point, make sure that the tapes adhe- sive surface does not come in contact with the windshield or the lens. Be sure to remove the paper after cleaning.

When having the inside of wind- shield cleaned at a service sta- tion, etc., be sure to request that the attendant covers the cam- era covers before washing the vehicle.

Do not subject the stereo cam- era to a strong impact.

Do not remove or disassemble the stereo camera.

Do not change the positions where the stereo camera is installed or modify any of the surrounding structures.

Do not install an interior rear- view mirror other than a genuine Toyota rearview mirror (such as a wide-type mirror) and the sun visor. Also, use the rearview mirror so that it does not obstruct the stereo camera. Failure to do so may affect the stereo cameras field of view and could prevent the EyeSight system from functioning prop- erly.

Stereo cameraA

176 4-5. EyeSight

NOTICE Do not install any accessories

other than the ones designated by Toyota on the prohibited areas shown in the illustrations (grey zones). Even if some accessories are installed on the outside of the prohibited areas, abnormal operation of EyeSight may occur due to the reflection of the light or any objects. In this situa- tion, move the accessories. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Side view

Monitors or other accessories

Front view

Do not place any objects on top of the instrument panel. The stereo camera may not be able to detect objects accurately and the EyeSight system may not function properly due to reflec- tions in the windshield. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

A

If the top of the instrument panel is polished with chemicals or other substances, the stereo camera may not be able to detect objects accurately and the EyeSight system may not operate properly due to reflec- tions in the windshield.

Do not install any wiper blades other than genuine Toyota wiper blades. Doing so may affect the stereo cameras field of view and could prevent the EyeSight system from functioning prop- erly.

Replace damaged wiper blades or worn wiper blade rubbers as soon as possible. Using dam- aged wiper blades or worn wiper blade rubbers may cause streaking on the windshield. The stereo camera may not be able to detect objects accurately and the EyeSight system may not function properly due to streaks or droplets remaining on the windshield.

Do not install any accessories on the front side such as on the hood or the grille. It may affect the camera view and the system may not operate correctly.

Make sure that the stereo cam- era's field of view is not inter- fered. Obstructing the stereo cameras view may impair the system operation. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

1774-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

EyeSight includes the following functions. Pre-Collision Braking Sys-

tem This function uses a following distance warning feature to warn the driver to take evasive action when there is the possi- bility of a collision with a vehicle, pedestrian or obstacle in front of you. If the driver does not take evasive action, the brakes are applied automatically to help reduce vehicle collision dam- age or, if possible, help prevent a collision. (P.179) Adaptive Cruise Control This function maintains the set vehicle speed and when there is a vehicle in front in the same traffic lane, it follows the speed of the vehicle in front up to the maximum of the set vehicle speed. (P.190) Conventional Cruise Con-

trol In this mode, the system main- tains a constant vehicle speed. It does not follow the vehicle in front. This function can be used even when the stereo camera has temporarily stopped operat- ing (P.228). This function is used by switching from Adaptive Cruise Control to Conventional Cruise Control. (P.207)

NOTICE Keep the windshield (outside

and inside) clean at all times. When the windshield has become fogged, or it has a dirt or an oil film on it, the stereo camera may not detect objects accurately and the EyeSight system may not operate cor- rectly. Never mount any device to the center air vent, as any air- flow change may impact Eye- Sight performance.

Do not place any stickers or accessories on the windshield (outside or inside). If you have to do so (for example, legally required or electronic toll tag), avoid the area directly in front of the camera. Otherwise, it may adversely affect the field of view of the stereo camera and can cause improper operation of the system. For details, contact a Toyota dealer.

Do not use any glass coating agents or similar substances on the windshield. Doing so may interfere with the proper opera- tion of the system.

Do not install any film or an additional layer of glass on the windshield. The system may not operate correctly.

If there are scratches or cracks on the windshield, contact a Toyota dealer.

To have the windshield replaced or repaired, contact a Toyota dealer. Do not install a wind- shield other than a genuine Toy- ota windshield. The stereo camera may not be able to detect objects accurately and the EyeSight system may not operate properly.

EyeSight functions

178 4-5. EyeSight

Pre-Collision Throttle Man- agement

This function reduces accidental forward movement caused by the shift lever being placed in the wrong position or the accel- erator pedal being accidentally depressed, or depressed too strongly. (P.215) Lane Departure Warning This function warns the driver when the vehicle is about to drift off the road. (P.219) Lane Sway Warning This function warns the driver when it detects vehicle drifting caused by driver fatigue, failure to concentrate on the road, inat- tention, strong crosswinds or other factors. (P.221) Lead Vehicle Start Alert This function notifies the driver when the vehicle stopped in front starts moving but the drivers vehicle remains station- ary. (P.223)

EyeSight does not operate when the engine is not running.

(Following distance set- ting) switch Cruise control switch ON-OFF switch

Cruise control switch ON-OFF switch Press this switch to turn cruise

control* on/off. When the ON-OFF switch is

pressed, appears on the meter display, and then appears by pressing and holding the (Following distance set- ting) switch for approximately 2 seconds. When or is shown on the meter display, this indicates that the main cruise control is on. (P.196, 208) - SET (push the cruise con-

trol switch down) Push this switch down to set

cruise control*. (P.196, 208) Push this switch down to reduce

the set vehicle speed (when cruise control* is currently set). (P.200, 211)

Switch layout

A

C

1794-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

+ RES (push the cruise con- trol switch up)

Push this switch up to set cruise control*. (P.196, 208)

After cruise control* is canceled, push this switch up to resume the cruise control function at the vehi- cle speed that was previously set. (P.204, 214)

Push this switch up to increase the set vehicle speed (when cruise control* is currently set). (P.199, 210) CANCEL (pull the cruise

control switch toward you) Pull this switch to cancel cruise control*. (P.202, 212) *: Adaptive Cruise Control and Con-

ventional Cruise Control

(Following distance set- ting) switch

Press this switch to select the set following distance in 4 stages (only when Adaptive Cruise Control is on). (P.202)

When the main cruise control is on, switching between Adaptive Cruise Control and Conventional Cruise Control is possible by pressing the (Following distance set- ting)switch*.

*: To switch to Conventional Cruise Control, press and hold the switch for approximately 2 sec- onds or longer.

*: If equipped

Some unusual noises may be audi- ble during automatic braking. This is caused by the braking control and is normal.

Pre-Collision Braking System*

When there is the risk of a rear-end collision with an obstacle or pedestrian in front, the EyeSight system helps to prevent or minimize a collision by warning the driver. If the driver still does not take evasive action to avoid a collision, the brakes can be automatically applied just before the colli- sion in order to reduce impact damage, or if possi- ble, prevent the collision. If the driver takes evasive action to avoid a collision, Pre-Collision Braking Assist will operate in order to help the driver to prevent or min- imize the collision. This function can be acti- vated when the shift lever is in the D, M or N position.

180 4-5. EyeSight

WARNING Never use Pre-Collision Braking

System and Pre-Collision Brak- ing Assist to stop your car or avoid a collision under ordinary conditions. These functions cannot prevent collisions under all conditions. If the driver relies only on Pre-Collision Braking System for Brake operation, col- lisions may occur.

When a warning is activated, pay attention to the front of the vehicle and its surroundings, and operate the brake pedal and/or take other actions if nec- essary.

The EyeSight Pre-Collision Braking System is primarily designed to prevent rear-end collisions with other vehicles when possible or to minimize damage and injuries in the event of a collision. In addition to other vehicles, things such as motorbikes, bicycles and pedes- trians can also be treated as obstacles. However, there may be cases when detection is not possible depending on a variety of conditions*2. For example, when a vehicle is viewed from the side, oncoming vehicle, vehicles approaching in reverse, small animals or chil- dren, or walls or doors are not likely to be detected.

Pre-Collision Braking System will operate at the point when it determines that a collision can- not be avoided and is designed to apply strong braking force just before a collision. The result of this varies depending on a variety of conditions*2. Because of this, performance of this func- tion will not always be the same.

When Pre-Collision Braking System is activated, it will con- tinue to operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially depressed. However, it will be canceled if the accelerator pedal is suddenly or fully depressed.

If the driver depresses the brake pedal or turns the steering wheel, the system may deter- mine that this constitutes eva- sive action by the driver, and the automatic braking control may not activate in order to allow the driver full control.

When the difference in speed with the obstacle in front is the following figure*1or more, it may not be possible to avoid a colli- sion. Even if the speed differ- ence is the following figure*1 or less, in cases such as when another vehicle cuts in front of you, or in other cases depend- ing on visibility, the condition of road surface and other fac- tors*2, the function may be unable to stop the vehicle or may not activate. Pre-Collision Braking Assist also may not activate depending on the con- ditions*2 listed below.

*1:For vehicles: approximately 30 mph (50 km/h), For pedestrians: approxi- mately 20 mph (35 km/h)

*2:Conditions in which Pre-Colli- sion Braking System cannot detect obstacles:

Distance to obstacle in front of you, speed difference, proxim- ity conditions, lateral displace- ment (the amount of offset)

Vehicle conditions (amount of load, number of occupants, etc.)

1814-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

WARNING Road conditions (grade, slip-

periness, shape, bumps, etc.)

Visibility ahead is poor (rain, snow, fog or smoke, etc.)

The detected object is some- thing other than a vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle or pedes- trian.

A domestic animal or other ani- mal (a dog or deer, etc.) A guardrail, telephone pole, tree, fence or wall, etc.

Even if the obstacle is a motor- cycle, bicycle or pedestrian, depending on the brightness of the surroundings as well as the relative movement, and aspect or angle of the object, there may be cases when the system can- not detect it.

The system determines that operation by the driver (based on accelerator pedal operation, braking, steering wheel angle, etc.) is intended as evasive action.

Vehicle maintenance status (brake systems, tire wear, tire pressure, whether a temporary spare tire is being used, etc.)

A trailer or another vehicle, etc. is being towed.

The brakes are cold due to the outside temperature being low or just after starting the engine.

The brakes are overheated on downhill grades (braking perfor- mance is reduced).

In rain or after washing the vehi- cle (the brakes are wet and braking performance is reduced.)

Recognition conditions of the stereo camera

In particular, the function may be unable to stop the vehicle or may not activate in the following cases. Bad weather (for example heavy rain, a blizzard or thick fog)

Visibility is poor due to sand, smoke or water vapor blowing in the wind, or the front vision is obscured due to water splashes, snow, dirt or dust stir up gener- ated by the vehicle in front or oncoming traffic.

At night or in a tunnel without the headlights on

At night or in a tunnel when there is a vehicle in front that does not have its taillights on

Approaching a motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian at night

Ambient light is poor in the evening or early morning.

A vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian is outside the area illuminated by the headlights.

Strong light is coming from the front (for example, sunlight at dawn, sunset or headlight beams, etc.).

The windshield has become fogged, scratched or smeared, or snow, dirt, dust or frost has adhered to it, or it is otherwise affected. These will reduce the stereo cameras field of view. Also, light is reflecting off the dirt, etc.

182 4-5. EyeSight

WARNING Fluid has not been fully wiped off the windshield during or after washer use.

The target cannot be correctly recognized because the stereo cameras view is obstructed by water droplets from rain or the window washer, or by the wiper blades.

The stereo cameras field of view is obstructed.

The rear aspect of the vehicle in front is low, small or irregular (the system may recognize another part of the vehicle as its rear and will determine operation from that).

There is an empty truck or trailer with no rear and/or side panels on the cargo bed.

Vehicles that have cargo pro- truding from their back ends

Non-standard shaped vehicles (vehicle transporters or vehi- cles with a sidecar fitted, etc.)

The height of the vehicle is low, etc.

There is a wall, etc. in front of a stopped vehicle.

There is another object near the vehicle.

A vehicle, etc. has its side fac- ing you.

With vehicles that are backing up or with oncoming vehicles, etc.

The size and height of an obstacle is smaller than the limita- tions of the stereo cameras rec- ognition capability. With small animals or children,

etc.

With pedestrians who are sitting or lying down

The detected object is a fence or wall, etc. with a uniform pattern (a striped pattern or brick pattern, etc.).

There is a wall or door made of glass or a mirror in front.

The vehicle in front suddenly swerves, accelerates, or deceler- ates.

A vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian suddenly cuts in from the side or suddenly runs in front of you.

Your vehicle is immediately behind an obstacle after changing lanes.

There is a vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian in a location close to your vehicles bumper.

1834-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

WARNING The speed difference between your vehicle and an obstacle is 4 mph (5 km/h) or less (As braking is performed once the obstacle is in close proximity to your vehicle, depending on the shape and size of the obstacle, there may be some cases when the obstacle is outside the range of the cameras field of view.).

On sharp curves, steep uphill grades or steep downhill grades

On a bumpy or unpaved road

There are changes in bright- ness, such as at a tunnel entrance or exit.

Do not test Pre-Collision Brak- ing System on its own. It may operate improperly and cause an accident.

The system may not operate correctly under the conditions listed below. When these condi- tions occur, turn off Pre-Colli- sion Braking System. (P.189)

The tire pressure is not cor- rect.*1

The temporary spare tire is installed.*1

Tires that are unevenly worn or tires with uneven wear patterns are installed.*1

Tires that are the wrong size are installed.*1

A flat tire has been fixed tempo- rarily with a tire repair kit.

The suspension has been modi- fied (including a genuine Toyota suspension that has been modi- fied).

An object that obstructs the ste- reo cameras view is installed on the vehicle.

Tire chains are installed.

The headlights are dirty or they have snow and ice or dirt on them. (Objects are not correctly illuminated and are difficult to detect.)

The optical axes are not aligned correctly. (Objects are not cor- rectly illuminated and are diffi- cult to detect.)

The lights including headlights and fog lights have been modi- fied.

Vehicle operation has become unstable due to an accident or malfunction.

The brake system warning light is illuminated in red.*2

A heavy cargo is inside the vehicle.

The maximum number of occu- pants is exceeded.

The meter is not operating prop- erly; such as when the lights do not illuminate, the beeps do not sound, the display is different from when it is normal, etc.*3

*1:The wheels and tires have functions that are critically important. Be sure to use the correct ones. (P.386)

184 4-5. EyeSight

WARNING *2: If the brake system warning

light (red) does not turn off, immediately pull the vehicle over in a safe place and con- tact a Toyota dealer to have the system inspected.

*3:For details about the meter, refer to P.88.

NOTICE In the following situations, turn off Pre-Collision Braking System. Otherwise Pre-Collision Braking System may activate unexpect- edly.

The vehicle is being towed.

The vehicle is being loaded onto a carrier.

A chassis dynamometer, free-rollers or similar equip- ment is being used.

A mechanic lifts up the vehicle, starts the engine and spins the wheels freely.

Passing hanging banners, flags or branches

Thick/tall vegetation is touching the vehicle.

Driving on a race track

In a drive-through car wash

Pre-Collision Braking System may activate in the following situations. Therefore concentrate on safe driving.

Passing through an automatic gate (opening and shutting)

Driving close to the vehicle in front

Driving in a location where the grade of the road changes rap- idly

Visibility is poor due to sand, smoke or water vapor blowing in the wind, or the front vision is obscured due to water splashes, snow, dirt or dust stir up generated by the vehicle in front or oncoming traffic.

Passing through clouds of steam or smoke, etc.

In adverse weather, such as heavy snow or snowstorms

1854-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

The EyeSight system can also detect pedestrians. The Eye- Sight system detects pedestri- ans from their size, shape and movement. The system detects a pedestrian when the contour of the head and shoulders are clear.

Approx. 3 1/3 ft - 6 2/3 ft (1-2 m)

NOTICE The exhaust gas emitted by the

vehicle in front is clearly visible in cold weather, etc.

There is an obstacle on a curve or intersection.

A vehicle or an object is being narrowly passed.

Stopping very close to a wall or a vehicle in front

Passing through water spray from road sprinklers or snow clearing sprinklers on the road

If there are installed accessories, etc. that are protruding beyond the edge of the front bumper, the vehicles length will increase and the system may not be able to prevent a collision.

If the driver operates the brake pedal during automatic braking, the pedal may feel stiff; however, this is normal. By depressing the brake pedal further you can apply more braking force.

Detection of pedestrians

A

186 4-5. EyeSight

When there is an obstacle in front of you during driving, the system activates in the following sequence in order to warn the driver and to activate braking control and the stop lights. Following distance warning: When the system determines that there is a risk of collision, an alert sounds repeated short beeps and the indicators on the meter display illuminate to warn the driver. The Following Distance Warning operates when Adaptive Cruise Control is not activated. When the driver depresses the brake pedal to decelerate and achieves a suitable following distance, the warning is canceled. First braking and warning: When the system determines that there is a high risk of collision with an obstacle in front, an alert sounds repeated short beeps and the indicators on the meter display illuminate to warn the driver. Braking control may be activated and in some situations, engine output may also be controlled. If the system determines that the amount of evasive action (braking, steering, etc.) taken by the driver has reduced the risk of collision, braking activation is canceled. Secondary braking and warning:

WARNING The EyeSight systems Pre-Colli- sion Braking function also identi- fies pedestrians as obstacles. However, depending on the con- ditions, there may be cases when the system cannot detect a pedestrian. In the following condi- tions, the possibility that the sys- tem may not be able to detect a pedestrian as an object is particu- larly high.

Pedestrians are walking in a group.

A pedestrian is next to a wall or other obstacle.

A pedestrian is using an umbrella.

A pedestrian is wearing clothes that are a similar color to the surrounding environment.

A pedestrian is carrying bulky luggage.

A pedestrian is bent over, crouching down or lying down.

A pedestrian is in a dark loca- tion.

A pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you from the side or suddenly runs in front of you.

Pre-Collision Braking System operation

1874-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

If the system then determines that the risk of collision is extremely high, the alert changes to a continuous beeping sound and stronger braking control is activated. Despite any evasive action taken by the driver, if the system subsequently determines that a collision is unavoidable, braking and engine output are controlled by the system. When the vehicle is completely stopped by the automatic braking system, a short tone 3 intermittent beeps, 1 short beep and 1 long beep will sound and braking will be gradually released and the vehicle will start creeping. To stop the vehicle completely, depress the brake pedal after the vehicle has stopped.

Neither first braking nor secondary braking will operate in the following cases.

The vehicle speed is approximately 1 mph (1 km/h) or less (When the shift lever is in the N position and your vehicle speed is approximately 2 mph (4 km/h) or less) or 100 mph (160 km/h) or more.

VSC is active. If the system detects the stop lights of the vehicle in front, your vehicle will

start decelerating earlier than if it does not. There are some cases where the first braking is applied for a longer period

of time. One of the reasons for this is due to a large speed difference with an obstacle in front. In those cases, stronger or weaker braking control may be activated.

After the Pre-Collision Braking System operation, a message appears and stays on the meter display for a certain period of time.

Pre-Collision Braking System ActivatedA

188 4-5. EyeSight

Following distance warning Possible collision area

First braking and warning Highly possible collision area

Secondary braking and warning Extremely highly possible collision area

Obstacle

When Pre-Collision Braking System is activated (when the system determines that there is a high risk of collision with an obstacle in front), if the driver depresses the brake pedal, the system determines that this is emergency braking and acti- vates braking assist automati-

cally.

Pre-Collision Braking Assist function does not operate when the vehicle speed is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or less or 100 mph (160 km/h) or more.

Operating system Strength of Auto- matic Braking

Indication on the multi-information

display Alert type

Following distance warning Weak Repeated short

beeps

First braking Moderate Repeated short beeps

Secondary brak- ing Strong Continuous

beep

A

C

D

Pre-Collision Braking Assist operation

1894-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

Multimedia system screen Operate the multimedia system screen to turn on/off Pre-Colli- sion Braking System(including Pre-Collision Braking Assist). (P.400) Multi-information display Also you can turn on/off Pre-Collision Braking System (including Pre-Collision Braking Assist) using the meter opera- tion switch. (P.400) If Pre-Collision Braking System is turned off, the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator illuminates.

The on/off setting for Pre-Collision Braking System operates in coop- eration with Pre-Collision Throttle Management.

Even when Pre-Collision Braking System is turned off, if the engine is turned off and then restarted, Pre-Collision Braking System will be turned on. The system default setting when the vehicle is restarted is on.

Pre-Collision Braking Sys- tem OFF indicator

This indicator illuminates when the engine switch is turned to ON, and remains illuminated for approximately 7 seconds after the engine starts. It turns on when Pre-Collision Braking Sys- tem and Pre-Collision Throttle Management are turned off. It also illuminates under the fol- lowing conditions. TRAC and VSC system are

set to OFF. (P.262) The EyeSight system has a

malfunction. (P.227) The EyeSight system has

stopped temporarily. (P.228)

When the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator is turned on, Pre-Collision Braking System (including the Pre-Collision Braking Assist function) and Pre-Collision Throttle Management do not oper- ate.

NOTICE If the driver depresses the brake pedal while following distance warning is activated, the Pre-Col- lision Braking Assist will not work. The vehicle decelerates with the normal braking force operated by the driver.

Turning on/off Pre-Colli- sion Braking System

190 4-5. EyeSight

*: If equipped

Adaptive Cruise Con- trol*

Adaptive Cruise Control is a driving support system intended to allow more com- fortable driving on express- ways, freeways and interstate highways. The stereo camera detects vehi- cles in front that are driving in the same traffic lane, and your vehicle follows the vehicle in front (up to the maximum speed of the set vehicle speed). While fol- lowing, your vehicle will automatically maintain a fol- lowing distance that corre- sponds to the speed of the vehicle in front. The vehicle is capable of being con- trolled at a speed between 0 mph (0 km/h) and approxi- mately 90 mph (145 km/h). Please remember that you should not exceed posted speed limits.

WARNING This system does not provide

the driver with an automatic driving function that handles all traffic conditions.

Do not rely excessively on Adaptive Cruise Control. This system is not intended to assist in driving when the driver is not paying full attention to what is ahead of him/her due to distrac- tions or a lack of concentration while driving, or under condi- tions of poor visibility. It is not intended to prevent rear-end collisions. Strive for safe driving at all times. Always maintain a safe following distance behind the vehicle in front of you, pay attention to your surroundings and the driving conditions, and operate the brake pedal and take other actions as necessary.

When using Adaptive Cruise Control, always set the speed according to the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, and other conditions.

Before using the system, per- form a daily inspection and ver- ify that there are no malfunctions of the tires or brakes.

Refer to the separate Owners Warranty Information Booklet or Owners Manual Supple- ment/Scheduled Maintenance Guide.

When you do not want to use Adaptive Cruise Control, be sure to turn it off by pressing the ON-OFF switch. If the switch is left on, cruise control may be accidentally engaged, possibly resulting in an accident.

Before using Adaptive Cruise Control, be sure to fully verify the safety of the vehicle occu- pants and the area around the vehicle. Never operate the cruise control from outside the vehicle.

1914-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

WARNING The system may not operate cor- rectly under the conditions listed below. When these conditions occur, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control.

The tire pressure is not cor- rect.*1

The temporary spare tire is installed.*1

Tires that are unevenly worn or tires with uneven wear patterns are installed.*1

Tires that are the wrong size are installed.*1

A flat tire has been fixed tempo- rarily with a tire repair kit.

The suspension has been modi- fied (including a genuine Toyota suspension that has been modi- fied).

An object that obstructs the ste- reo cameras view is installed on the vehicle.

Tire chains are installed.

The headlights are dirty or they have snow and ice or dirt on them. (Objects are not correctly illuminated and are difficult to detect.)

The optical axes are not aligned correctly. (Objects are not cor- rectly illuminated and are diffi- cult to detect.)

The lights including headlights and fog lights have been modi- fied.

Vehicle operation has become unstable due to an accident or malfunction.

The brake system warning light is illuminated in red.*2

A heavy cargo is inside the vehicle.

The maximum number of occu- pants is exceeded.

The meter is not operating prop- erly; such as when the lights do not illuminate, the beeps do not sound, the display is different from when it is normal, etc.*3

*1:The wheels and tires have functions that are critically important. Be sure to use the correct ones. (P.386)

*2: If the brake system warning light (red) does not turn off, immediately pull the vehicle over in a safe place and con- tact a Toyota dealer to have the system inspected.

*3:For details about the meter, refer to P.88.

Adaptive Cruise Control is designed for use on expressways, freeways, toll roads, interstate highways and similar limited access roads. It is not intended to be used in city traffic. In the fol- lowing conditions, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control. Doing so may result in an accident.

Ordinary roads (roads other than those mentioned above)

Depending on the driving envi- ronment (complexity of roads and other factors), the system may not be able to perform as the traffic conditions require, and that may result in an acci- dent.

Sharp curves or winding roads

192 4-5. EyeSight

WARNING Frozen roads, snow-covered

roads or other slippery road sur- faces

The tires may spin, causing loss of control of the vehicle.

Traffic conditions when fre- quent acceleration and deceler- ation make it difficult to maintain the following distance

It may not be possible for the system to perform as the traffic conditions require.

Steep downhill grades The set vehicle speed may be

exceeded.

On a steep continuous downhill grade

The brakes may overheat.

Roads and overpasses with repeated steep uphill and down- hill grades

Detection of the vehicle in front may be lost, or the road surface may be detected instead of the vehicle in front, making correct control impossible.

Entering a sharp curve/turn into an interchange or junction, or a service area, parking area, toll booth or other facilities

Detection of the vehicle in front may not be possible.

There are changes in bright- ness, such as at a tunnel entrance or exit.

Visibility is poor due to sand, smoke or water vapor blowing in the wind, or the front vision is obscured due to water splashes, snow, dirt, water spray from road sprinklers or snow clearing sprinklers on the road, or dust stir up generated by the vehicle in front or oncom- ing traffic.

Detection of the vehicle in front may be lost, or water or other substances may be incorrectly detected instead, making cor- rect control impossible.

In adverse weather, such as heavy snow or snowstorms

1934-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

WARNING The windshield has become

fogged, scratched or smeared, or snow, dirt, dust or frost has adhered to it, or it is otherwise affected. These will reduce the stereo cameras field of view. Also, light is reflecting off the dirt, etc.

Water droplets from rain or the window washer, or dirt has not been fully wiped off the wind- shield.

It may not be possible to detect the vehicle in front, making cor- rect control impossible.

The stereo cameras field of view is obstructed.

The stereo camera may have diffi- culty detecting the following objects or conditions. Operate the brake pedal and take other actions as necessary.

Vehicles at significantly different speeds (vehicles driving slowly, stopped or oncoming vehicles, etc.)

Vehicles cutting into your lane

Motorcycles, bicycles, pedestri- ans and animals, etc.

Light is poor in the evening or early morning.

At night or in a tunnel without the headlights on

At night or in a tunnel when there is a vehicle in front that does not have its tail lights on

Strong light is coming from the front (sunlight or headlight high beams, etc.).

Vehicles in front that have a rear aspect that is low, small or irreg- ular (the system may recognize another part of the vehicle and will determine operation from that)

An empty truck or trailer that has no tailgate or longbed

Vehicles that have cargo pro- truding from their back ends

Non-standard shaped vehicles (vehicle transporters or vehi- cles with a sidecar fitted, etc.)

Vehicles that are low

Objects that are located close to the bumper of your vehicle

Detection of the vehicle in front by the EyeSight stereo camera*

Under the following road condi- tions or conditions of your vehi- cle, detection of the vehicle in front may not be possible. Vehi- cles in neighboring traffic lanes or roadside objects may also be incorrectly detected. Under con- ditions such as these, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control. If cruise control is currently in use, operate the brake pedal and take other actions as necessary.

194 4-5. EyeSight

WARNING Following begins from a short

following distance, such as when the vehicle in front is a vehicle that cut into your lane.

On curved roads, at the start and end of a curve and on roads with continuous curves (These conditions make it diffi- cult for the system to detect vehicles because they are out- side the detectable area.)

On an on-ramp or off-ramp to a freeway, highway, or other restricted access road (Eye- Sight Adaptive Cruise Control is not designed for use in this kind of driving environment.)

In an urban or suburban envi- ronment (Adaptive Cruise Con- trol is not appropriate for use in these driving areas. Use Adap- tive Cruise Control only on lim- ited-access highways.)

The vehicle in front is not directly ahead of your vehicle and is shifted to one side.

There is an obstacle on the side of the road.

The relative speed difference compared to the vehicle in front is large.

A vehicle cuts into your lane in front of you.

The distance between vehicles is extremely short.

Your vehicle is drifting within the lane.

On a bumpy or unpaved road surface.

On a road with extremely nar- row lanes, such as when traffic restrictions are in effect or in areas where construction work is taking place.

Normal driving has become unstable due to an accident or malfunction.

Extremely heavy cargo is loaded in the rear seat or trunk of your vehicle.

1954-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

WARNING There are limits to the situation

judgment capabilities of the Adaptive Cruise Control system. Deceleration may not take place in time in the following situa- tions. Apply the brake pedal to decelerate the vehicle if neces- sary.

The speed difference with the vehicle in front is too large or the vehicle in front decelerates unexpectedly.

The decelerating vehicle in front unexpectedly slows down or suddenly brakes.

If the alert/notification sounds frequently, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control.

Even when the following dis- tance is short, the Obstacle Detected warning may not acti- vate in the following situations.

The difference in speed with the vehicle in front is small. The two vehicles are traveling at almost the same speed.

The vehicle in front is traveling faster than your vehicle. The fol- lowing distance is gradually increasing.

Another vehicle cuts into your lane very close to your vehicle.

The vehicle in front decelerates suddenly.

There are repeated uphill and downhill grades.

*: The recognition status of the lead vehicle using the stereo camera can be confirmed by the illumination status of the lead vehicle indicator. (P.196)

NOTICE After Adaptive Cruise Control

has started, it maintains control continuously according to the behavior of the vehicle in front. When your vehicle comes to a stop because the vehicle in front has stopped, the automatic braking function will be can- celed immediately after stop- ping and the vehicle will start creeping forward gradually (at the same time 3 intermittent beeps, 1 short beep and 1 long beep will sound). Be sure to depress the brake pedal and stop the vehicle completely. Note that the vehicle is not maintained at a standstill posi- tion and will not automatically start moving from a standstill position.

Braking may not be sufficient depending on the following con- ditions. Depress the brake pedal and decelerate as neces- sary.

Vehicle conditions (amount of load, number of occupants, etc.)

Road conditions (grade, slip- periness, shape, bumps, etc.)

Vehicle maintenance condition (brake systems, tire wear, air pressure, temporary spare tire is being used, etc.)

The brakes are cold. (For exam- ple, just after the engine is started or the outside tempera- ture is low.)

For a short period of time when driving after the engine is started until the engine has warmed-up

The brakes are overheated on downhill grades (braking perfor- mance may be reduced).

196 4-5. EyeSight

Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

1 Setting Adaptive Cruise Con- trol to standby status

Press the ON-OFF switch. At this time, (white) and the following distance setting indicator are dis- played on the meter display. The set vehicle speed display will read - - - MPH (- - - km/h).

Adaptive Cruise Control indi- cator Set vehicle speed Your vehicle indicator

Following distance setting indicator Following distance setting indicator (icon)

When the multi-information display is set to display content other than the driving support system informa- tion display, the following distance setting indicator is shown as an icon.

To set the ready status: Adap- tive Cruise Control can be acti- vated when all of the following conditions are met and READY indicator is displayed on the meter display. Both the driver's door and the

front passenger's door are closed.

The drivers seatbelt is fas- tened.

The shift lever is in the D or M position.

The brake pedal is not depressed.

EyeSight operation is not tem- porarily stopped. (white) is turned off. (P.228)

The road is not a steep slope. The steering wheel has not

been turned significantly in either direction.

The vehicle speed is between 0 mph (0 km/h) and approxi- mately 90 mph (145 km/h).

Parking brake is released. The driving mode is set to

normal mode or sport mode. (P.257)

NOTICE In rain or after washing the vehi-

cle (the brakes may become wet and braking performance may be reduced.)

How to use Adaptive Cruise Control

A

C

D

1974-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

Pre-Collision Braking System is not turned off during TRACK mode. (P.189, 262)

TRAC and VSC system are not set to off. (P.262)

READY indicator 2 Setting Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol Push the cruise control switch to the - SET side or the + RES side. Adaptive Cruise Control is activated and control starts, using the vehicle speed at the time when the switch was pushed as the set vehicle speed. If no vehicle in front has been detected, the vehicle drives at the constant set vehicle speed.

When Adaptive Cruise Control is activated, READY indicator turns off, the set vehicle speed is displayed, and changes

from white to green.

Green

The set vehicle speed can be set between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 90 mph (145 km/h).

If the vehicle speed is approxi- mately 20 mph (30 km/h) or less when the vehicle speed is set, the set vehicle speed is set to 20 mph (30 km/h).

When driving on a curve, the vehi- cle may not accelerate, or may decelerate, even if the set vehicle speed is higher than the current vehicle speed.

If does not illuminate, even when the ON-OFF switch is pressed, Adaptive Cruise Control will not operate.

If does not illuminate, even when the ON-OFF switch is pressed and this occurs fre- quently, there may be a malfunc- tion in the system. Contact a Toyota dealer and have the sys- tem inspected.

When a vehicle in front is

A

WARNING When using Adaptive Cruise Con- trol, always set the speed accord- ing to the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, and other condi- tions.

A

198 4-5. EyeSight

detected, a notification sounds 1 short beep and the lead vehicle indicator will illuminate. The vehicle follows the lead vehicle in front and maintains the selected following distance. At this time, the cruise speed is adjusted to and will not exceed the set vehicle speed. If the vehicle in front is no longer detected, a notification sounds 1 short beep and the lead vehicle indicator turns off. While the driver accelerates the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal, will turn from green to white. When acceleration has stopped, will turn from white to green.

Lead vehicle indicator (icon) Lead vehicle indicator

When the multi-information dis- play is set to display content other than the driving support system information display, the lead vehi- cle indicator is shown as an icon. (P.93)

The notification sound (lead vehi- cle acquisition sound) that occurs when a vehicle in front is detected or no longer detected while Adap-

tive Cruise Control is activated can be turned off by customiza- tion. (P.400)

Operation of Adaptive Cruise Control

When no vehicle in front is detected

The vehicle drives constantly and correspondingly to the set vehicle speed between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 90 mph (145 km/h).

When a vehicle in front is detected

The vehicle follows the lead vehicle in front, and will maintain the cho- sen following distance (there are four settings), up to the set vehicle speed between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 90 mph (145 km/h).

If your vehicle no longer detects the vehicle in front

The vehicle gradually accelerates back to the set vehicle speed and

A

1994-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

will drive at that constant speed. If a vehicle in front is detected while accelerating to the set vehicle speed, vehicle following will be started again.

When the brakes are applied by Adaptive Cruise Control, the vehi- cles stop lights will illuminate.

Even if there is no lead vehicle present, on a downhill grade, the Adaptive Cruise Controls auto- matic brake may operate in order to maintain the set vehicle speed.

Some noises may be audible during automatic braking. This is caused by the braking control and does not indicate a malfunction.

To temporarily accelerate quickly, use the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the vehicle will grad- ually return to the set vehicle speed shown in the set vehicle speed display.

If the vehicle in front is no longer detected while your vehicle is still controlled by the automatic brak- ing operation, the brake will be automatically released gradually. Depress the accelerator pedal if necessary.

The lead-vehicle following func- tion has the following characteris- tics:

If the lead vehicles stop lights are detected, deceleration will start earlier than without detection.

If the vehicle moves to the fast lane while traveling more than

approximately 37 mph (60 km/h), the system starts acceleration to the set vehicle speed more quickly because it is linked with the turn signal.

If the setting of driving lane is dif- ferent from the actual driving direction, the vehicle may start to accelerate faster than usual when the driver signals a lane change to move from the passing lane to the driving lane. (P.400)

Cruise control acceleration char- acteristics can be set to one of four levels. (P.400)

Increasing the set vehicle speed

Using the cruise control switch

Push to the + RES side briefly.

Every time the switch is pushed, the set vehicle speed will increase in increments of 1 mph (1 km/h) increment. Push to the + RES side con-

tinuously. While the switch is being pushed, the set vehicle speed will increase in increments of 5 mph (5 km/h). When operating the switch, the set vehicle speed changes on the meter display.

NOTICE If the driver operates the brake pedal during automatic braking, the pedal may feel stiff; however, this is not a malfunction. By depressing the brake pedal fur- ther you can apply more braking force. When the brake pedal is released it will return to its original condition.

200 4-5. EyeSight

Using the accelerator pedal 1 Depress the accelerator

pedal to increase vehicle speed.

2 When the desired speed is reached, push the cruise control switch to the - SET side.

The speed at the time of pushing the switch will be set as the new set vehicle speed, and it appears on the meter display.

Decreasing the set vehicle speed

Using the cruise control switch

Push to the - SET side briefly.

Every time the switch is pushed, the set vehicle speed will decrease in decrements of 1 mph (1 km/h) decrement. Push to the - SET side con-

NOTICE When the vehicle is following

the lead vehicle, the actual vehi- cle speed is controlled accord- ing to the lead vehicle. Therefore, if the cruise control switch is pushed to the + RES side and set to a speed higher than the speed of the lead vehi- cle, the vehicle will not acceler- ate; it will maintain a safe following distance as the first priority. However, because doing so changed the set vehi- cle speed, when the lead vehi- cle is no longer detected (for example, if you change to a freeway lane with no vehicles in front), the vehicle will accelerate to that new set vehicle speed. Change the set vehicle speed while briefly checking the value shown in the set vehicle speed display on the meter display.

When the accelerator pedal is depressed with Adaptive Cruise Control on, automatic braking control and warnings by Adap- tive Cruise Control will not occur. However, if there is a high risk of collision with an obstacle in front of the vehicle at this time, the warning and brak- ing control of Pre-Collision Braking System may activate.

2014-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

tinuously. While the switch is being pushed, the set vehicle speed will decrease in decrements of 5 mph (5 km/h). When operating the switch, the set vehicle speed changes on the meter display.

Using the brake pedal 1 Depress the brake pedal to

decrease the vehicle speed. Adaptive Cruise Control will be can- celed and (Adaptive Cruise Control indicator) changes from green to white. 2 When the desired speed is

reached, push the cruise control switch to the - SET side.

The speed at the time of pushing the switch will be set as the new set vehicle speed, and it appears on the meter display. Accelerating temporarily Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate temporarily. When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle returns to the set vehicle speed. When the driver accelerates the vehicle by depressing the accel-

erator pedal while Adaptive Cruise Control is operating, turns white. When the accelera- tion is completed, returns to green. Decelerating temporarily Depress the brake pedal to decelerate temporarily. When the brake pedal is depressed, Adaptive Cruise Control will be canceled. changes from green to white while the set vehicle speed remains dis- played on the meter display. Release the brake pedal and push the cruise control switch to the + RES side to reset the set vehicle speed.

WhiteA

202 4-5. EyeSight

Changing the following dis- tance from the vehicle in front

The following distance from the vehicle in front setting can be changed in 4 stages.

Each time the (Following distance setting) switch is pressed, the distance from the vehicle in front changes.

The following distance changes corresponding with the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle trav- els, the greater the following dis- tance.

Approximate guide to following distances

The following distance previously set is restored when you turn back on Adaptive Cruise Control by pressing the ON-OFF switch.

Canceling by driver opera- tion

Any of the following operations will cancel Adaptive Cruise Con- trol. Depress the brake pedal.

changes from green to white while the set vehicle speed remains displayed on the meter display.

NOTICE Ordinarily, while the vehicle is fol- lowing the lead vehicle, accelera- tion and deceleration are performed automatically in accor- dance with the speed of the lead vehicle. However, when your vehicle approaches a lead vehi- cle, for example if it is necessary to accelerate for a lane change or other reason, and if the vehicle in front suddenly decelerates, or if another vehicle cuts into your path, operate the accelerator pedal or brake pedal to accelerate or decelerate as appropriate for the existing conditions.

Following distance indicator

When your vehicle

speed is 25 mph

(40 km/h)

When your vehicle

speed is 60 mph

(100 km/h)

Approx. 100 ft (30 m)

Approx. 200 ft (60 m)

Approx. 80 ft (25 m)

Approx. 160 ft (50 m)

Approx. 65 ft (20 m)

Approx. 130 ft (40 m)

Approx. 50 ft (15 m)

Approx. 100 ft (30 m)

Canceling Adaptive Cruise Control

2034-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

White Pull the cruise control switch

to the CANCEL side.

changes from green to white while the set vehicle speed remains displayed on the meter display.

Automatic cancellation by the system

When the Adaptive Cruise Con- trol system brings your vehicle to a complete stop, 3 intermit- tent beeps, 1 short beep and 1 long beep will sound, and the Adaptive Cruise Control system will release control of your vehi- cle.

In the following cases, a notifica- tion will sound 1 short beep and 1 long beep and Adaptive Cruise Control is automatically canceled. changes from green to white. Also, the Adap- tive Cruise Control cancellation message is displayed on the multi-information display. The grade of the road is very

steep. TRAC or VSC is activated. The vehicle speed has

exceeded approximately 100 mph (160 km/h) while cruise control is activated.

The steering wheel is turned significantly in either direction.

The shift lever is moved to a position other than D or M.

Adaptive Cruise Control can be resumed after the shift lever is returned to the D or M position. Either the driver's door or the

front passenger's door is opened.

The drivers seatbelt is unfas- tened.

The EyeSight system has a

A

NOTICE When the vehicle has stopped, the automatic braking function will be gradually released and the vehicle will start creeping. Make sure to stop the vehicle com- pletely by depressing the brake pedal after the vehicle has stopped.

204 4-5. EyeSight

malfunction. ( :yellow) (P.227)

The EyeSight system has stopped temporarily. ( :white) (P.228)

The Pre-Collision secondary braking is activated.

Parking brake is applied. The engine revolutions

approached the red zone. The driving mode is set to

snow mode. (P.257) Pre-Collision Braking System

is turned off during TRACK mode. (P.189, 262)

TRAC and VSC system are off. (P.262)

The driving wheels spin on a slippery road.

If EyeSight is malfunctioning, (yellow) is displayed on the meter display, and the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator and Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator illuminate. If this occurs, stop the vehicle in a safe location and then turn off the engine and restart it. If the indicators remain illuminated after restarting the engine, Adaptive Cruise Control

cannot be used. This will not inter- fere with ordinary driving. How- ever, contact a Toyota dealer and have the system inspected. (P.227)

If the EyeSight operation has tem- porarily stopped, the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator and Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator illuminate, and (white) is displayed on the meter display. (P.228)

When the operation of Adaptive Cruise Control has been automati- cally canceled, perform the Adap- tive Cruise Control setting operation again after the condition that caused the cancellation has been corrected. If the Adaptive Cruise Control function cannot be activated even after the condition has been corrected, EyeSight may be malfunctioning. This will not interfere with ordinary driving. However, contact a Toyota dealer and have the system inspected.

The previously set vehicle speed is stored in memory. To

WARNING Do not use Adaptive Cruise Con- trol on slippery roads. Doing so may result in an accident.

NOTICE When shifting the shift lever to the N position, Adaptive Cruise Con- trol will be automatically canceled. Do not shift the lever to the N position unless in an emergency. Otherwise the engine brake may not operate, which could cause an accident.

Restoring the previously set vehicle speed

2054-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

restore that vehicle speed, push the cruise control switch to the + RES side. changes from white to green.

Green

The vehicle speed stored in mem- ory is erased in the following cir- cumstances:

The cruise control is turned off by pressing the ON-OFF switch.

The VSC or the TRAC is acti- vated.

The cruise control mode was switched from Adaptive Cruise Control to Conventional Cruise Control.

If there is no vehicle speed stored in memory (previous vehicle speed), the current vehicle speed is set when the cruise control switch is pushed to the +RES side. (P.196)

Press the ON-OFF switch.

turns off on the meter dis- play and Adaptive Cruise Con- trol turns off.

Obstacle Detected warn- ing

The Obstacle Detected warn- ing is activated while Adaptive Cruise Control is following a lead vehicle. This function warns the driver when it deter- mines that the current level of deceleration by automatic brak- ing control is insufficient. When the system determines

that the vehicle speed needs to be reduced manually by the driver, an alert will sound repeated short beeps and a pop-up display will be dis- played.

When this function activates, depress the brake pedal to decelerate and maintain an

A

Turning off Adaptive Cruise Control

Other functions

206 4-5. EyeSight

optimal following distance.

Vehicles in front in the same traffic lane are detected by the stereo camera within a distance of approxi- mately 360 ft (110 m) in the forward direction. However the detection distance may be reduced depending on the traffic environment, driving conditions, and conditions of the vehicle in front.

WARNING If the alert/notification sounds

frequently, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control.

The Obstacle Detected warn- ing will not activate in the follow- ing situations.

The accelerator pedal is depressed.

The brake pedal is depressed.

Even when the following dis- tance is short, the Obstacle Detected warning may not acti- vate in the following situations.

The difference in speed with the vehicle in front is small. The two vehicles are traveling at almost the same speed.

The vehicle in front is traveling faster than your vehicle. The fol- lowing distance is gradually increasing.

Another vehicle cuts into your lane very close to your vehicle.

The vehicle in front decelerates suddenly.

There are repeated uphill and downhill grades.

The Obstacle Detected warn- ing may not activate in time in the case of a vehicle that is stopped at the end of a line at a toll gate, at a stop light or inter- section or in traffic congestion, or a vehicle that is moving much slower than your vehicle. Eye- Sight requires a speed differen- tial in order to recognize a potential obstacle and react to it.

2074-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

*: If equipped

When the main cruise control is off and the ON-OFF switch is pressed, Adaptive Cruise Control is activated.

When the main cruise control is on, switching between Adaptive Cruise Control and Conventional Cruise Control is possible by pressing the (Following dis- tance setting) switch*.

*: To switch to Conventional Cruise Control, press and hold the switch for approximately 2 seconds or longer.

Conventional Cruise Control can be used even when EyeSight is temporarily stopped.

Conventional Cruise Control*

Conventional Cruise Con- trol is a driving support sys- tem intended to allow more comfortable driving on expressways, freeways and interstate highways. It can be used to travel at a con- stant speed by maintaining the vehicle speed set by the driver. Please remember that you should not exceed posted speed limits.

WARNING When Conventional Cruise

Control is functioning, the sys- tem does not perform the follow- ing control to maintain a following distance, as when using Adaptive Cruise Control. Strive for safe driving and depress the brake pedal to decelerate the vehicle as nec- essary in order to ensure a safe following distance from the vehi- cle in front.

Under the following conditions, do not use Conventional Cruise Control. Doing so may result in an accident.

Roads with heavy traffic or roads with sharp curves

Maintaining an appropriate speed for such road conditions may be difficult.

Frozen roads, snow-covered roads or slippery road surfaces

The tires may spin, causing your vehicle to lose control.

Steep downhill grades The set vehicle speed may be exceeded.

On a steep continuous downhill grade

The brakes may overheat.

When using Conventional Cruise Control, always set the speed according to the speed limit, traffic flow, road condi- tions, and other conditions.

208 4-5. EyeSight

Setting Conventional Cruise Control

1 Setting Adaptive Cruise Con- trol to standby status.

Press the ON-OFF switch. At this time, (white) and the following distance setting indicator are dis- played on the meter display. The set vehicle speed display will read - - - MPH (- - - km/h). When the ON-OFF switch is pressed, the initial cruise control mode is always Adaptive Cruise

Control.

Adaptive Cruise Control indi- cator Set vehicle speed Your vehicle indicator Following distance setting indicator Following distance setting indicator (icon)

2 Switch to Conventional Cruise Control.

Press and hold the (Following distance setting) switch for approxi- mately 2 seconds or longer to switch from Adaptive Cruise Con- trol to Conventional Cruise Control. A notification sounds 1 short beep. At this time, the following distance setting indicator on the meter dis- play turns off and (white) is dis-

NOTICE When using Cruise Control, be sure to check the meter display to confirm which Cruise Control mode is selected: Adaptive Cruise Control or Conventional Cruise Control.

If Adaptive Cruise Control is selected, illuminates.

If Conventional Cruise Control is selected, illuminates.

How to use Conventional Cruise Control

A

C

D

2094-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

played.

Conventional Cruise Control indicator (White)

To set the ready status: Conven- tional Cruise Control can be activated when all of the follow- ing conditions are met and READY indicator is displayed on the meter display. Both the driver's door and the

front passenger's door are closed.

The drivers seatbelt is fas- tened.

The shift lever is in the D or M position.

The brake pedal is not depressed.

The road is not on a steep slope.

The steering wheel has not been turned significantly in either direction.

The vehicle speed is between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 90 mph (145 km/h).

Parking brake is released. The driving mode is set to

normal mode or sport mode. (P.257)

Pre-Collision Braking System is not turned off during TRACK mode. (P.189, 262)

TRAC and VSC system are not set to off. (P.262)

READY indicator 3 Control the accelerator pedal

to reach the desired speed. 4 When the vehicle reaches

the desired speed, push the cruise control switch to the + RES side or the - SET side. The vehicle speed at the time when the switch is pushed will become the set vehicle speed, and constant speed driving will initiate.

When Conventional Cruise Control is activated, READY indicator turns off, the set vehicle speed is displayed and changes from

A

A

210 4-5. EyeSight

white to green.

Green

On a downhill grade, automatic braking may operate in order to maintain the set vehicle speed.

When driving on a curve, the vehi- cle may not accelerate, or may decelerate, even if the set vehicle speed is higher than the current vehicle speed.

To return to Adaptive Cruise Con- trol use, cancel Conventional Cruise Control and then briefly press the (Following distance setting) switch. A notification will sound (1 short beep) when switch- ing to Adaptive Cruise Control.

Cruise control acceleration char- acteristics can be set to one of four levels. (P.400)

Increasing the set vehicle speed

Using the cruise control switch

Push to the + RES side briefly.

Every time the switch is pushed, the set vehicle speed will increase in increments of 1 mph (1 km/h). Push to the + RES side con-

tinuously. While the switch is being pushed, the set vehicle speed will increase in increments of 5 mph (5 km/h). When operating the switch, the set vehicle speed changes on the meter display.

A

WARNING The Obstacle Detected warn-

ing will not activate while Con- ventional Cruise Control is functioning.

When using Conventional Cruise Control, always set the speed according to the speed limit, traffic flow, road condi- tions, and other conditions.

NOTICE During Conventional Cruise Con- trol use, accelerator and brake control to follow the vehicle in front is not performed. Operate the accelerator and brake pedals as necessary.

2114-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

Using the accelerator pedal 1 Depress the accelerator

pedal to increase vehicle speed.

2 When the desired speed is reached, push the cruise control switch to the - SET side.

The speed at the time of pushing the switch will be set as the new set vehicle speed, and it appears on the meter display.

Decreasing the set vehicle speed

Using the cruise control switch

Push to the - SET side briefly.

Every time the switch is pushed, the set vehicle speed will decrease in decrements of 1 mph (1 km/h). Push to the - SET side con-

tinuously. While the switch is being pushed, the set vehicle speed will decrease in decrements of 5 mph (5 km/h). When operating the switch, the set vehicle speed changes on the meter display.

Using the brake pedal 1 Depress the brake pedal to

decrease the vehicle speed. Conventional Cruise Control will be canceled and changes from green to white. 2 When the desired speed is

reached, push the cruise control switch to the - SET side.

The speed at the time of pushing the switch will be set as the new set vehicle speed, and it appears on the meter display. Accelerating temporarily Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate temporarily. When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle returns to the set vehicle speed. Decelerating temporarily Depress the brake pedal to decelerate temporarily. When

212 4-5. EyeSight

the brake pedal is depressed, Conventional Cruise Control will be canceled. While the set vehi- cle speed remains displayed on the meter display, changes from green to white. Release the brake pedal and push the cruise control switch to the + RES side to reset the set vehicle speed.

White

Canceling by driver opera- tion

Any of the following operations will cancel Conventional Cruise Control. Depress the brake pedal. Pull the cruise control switch

to the CANCEL side.

changes from green to white while the set vehicle speed remains displayed on the meter display.

White Automatic cancellation by

the system In the following cases, a notifica- tion sounds 1 short beep and 1 long beep and the cruise control function is automatically can- celed. changes from green to white. Also, the Conventional Cruise Control cancellation message is displayed on the multi-information display. After the conditions listed below have been resolved, perform the cruise control set operation again to reactivate cruise con- trol. The shift lever is moved to a

position other than D or M. Conventional Cruise Control can

be resumed after the shift lever is

Canceling Conventional Cruise Control

A

A

2134-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

returned to the D or M position. Vehicle speed drops to

approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or less (due to a steep uphill grade or some other reason).

Vehicle speed increases to approximately 100 mph (160 km/h) or more.

TRAC or VSC is activated. Either the driver's door or the

front passenger's door is opened.

The drivers seatbelt is unfas- tened.

The EyeSight system has a malfunction. ( :Yellow) (P.227)

The steering wheel is turned significantly in either direction.

The grade of the road is steep.

The Pre-Collision secondary braking is activated.

Parking brake is applied. The engine revolutions

approached the red zone. The driving mode is set to

snow mode. (P.257) Pre-Collision Braking System

is turned off during TRACK mode. (P.189, 262)

TRAC and VSC system are off. (P.262)

The driving wheels spin on a

slippery road.

If EyeSight is malfunctioning, (yellow) is displayed on the meter display, and the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator and Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator will also illuminate. If this occurs, stop the vehicle in a safe location and then turn off the engine and restart it. If the indica- tors remain illuminated after restarting the engine, Conven- tional Cruise Control cannot be used. This will not interfere with ordinary driving. However, con- tact a Toyota dealer and have the system inspected. (P.227)

When operation of Conventional Cruise Control has been automati- cally canceled, perform the set operation again after the condition that caused the cancellation has been resolved. If cruise control cannot be activated even after the condition has been corrected, EyeSight may be malfunctioning. This will not interfere with ordinary driving. However, contact a Toyota dealer and have the system inspected.

WARNING Do not use Conventional Cruise Control on slippery roads. Doing so may result in an accident.

214 4-5. EyeSight

Restoring the previously set vehicle speed

The previously set vehicle speed is stored in memory. To restore that vehicle speed, push the cruise control switch to the + RES side. changes from white to green. You can restore the set vehicle speed when the previously set vehicle speed has been stored and the current vehicle speed is approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.

Green

The vehicle speed stored in mem- ory is erased in the following cir- cumstances:

The cruise control is turned off by pressing the ON-OFF switch.

TRAC or VSC is activated. The cruise control mode was

switched from Conventional Cruise Control to Adaptive Cruise Control.

The vehicle drives constantly and correspondingly to the set vehicle speed between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 90 mph (145 km/h).

If there is no vehicle speed stored in memory (previous vehicle speed), the current vehicle speed is set when the cruise control switch is pushed to the + RES side. (P.208)

Press the ON-OFF switch.

turns off on the meter dis- play and Conventional Cruise Control turns off.

NOTICE When shifting the shift lever to the N position, Conventional Cruise Control will be automatically can- celed. Do not shift the lever to the N position unless in an emer- gency. Otherwise the engine brake may not operate, which could cause an accident.

Turning off Conventional Cruise Control

A

2154-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

*: If equipped

When the accelerator pedal is depressed for approximately 3

seconds, Pre-Collision Throttle Management will be released gradually.

When Pre-Collision Braking Sys- tem is turned off, Pre-Collision Throttle Management is also turned off. (P.218)

Pre-Collision Throttle Management*

When an obstacle is detected in front of the vehi- cle, and the vehicle is stopped or traveling very slowly, if the system deter- mines that the accelerator pedal has been depressed by more than the necessary amount (due to driver error), it greatly restricts engine output and ensures that vehicle forward movement is slower than normal in order to give the driver addi- tional time to brake or react. During system operation, an alert will sound repeated short beeps and a pop-up display will be displayed. This function only activates when the shift lever is in the D or M position.

Obstacle DetectedA

WARNING Do not rely excessively on Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment. Pre-Collision Throttle Man- agement is not designed to help you avoid collisions in all situa- tions. Always check the shift lever and pedal positions as well as the surrounding environment before starting and operating the vehicle. Relying only on Pre-Collision Throttle Management could result in an accident.

Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment is not designed to main- tain the vehicle in a stopped condition.

Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment will not reduce accelera- tion under all conditions. It is also not designed to prevent collisions.

Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment will operate when an obstacle is detected in front. However, this function will not reduce acceleration in cases where no obstacle is detected (for example when approaching a cliff, etc.).

Do not intentionally depress the accelerator pedal excessively when there are obstacles nearby. If the driver relies only on Pre-Collision Throttle Man- agement to control acceleration, collisions may occur.

216 4-5. EyeSight

WARNING If your vehicle is trapped on a

railroad crossing and you are trying to escape by driving through the crossing gate, the stereo camera may recognize the crossing gate as an obstacle and Pre-Collision Throttle Man- agement system may activate. In this case, remain calm and either continue to depress the accelerator pedal or turn off the Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment system. (P.218)

Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment may not activate depending on the following conditions:

The distance between your vehicle and the obstacle, speed difference, and horizontal offset

Recognition status of the stereo camera

In particular, the function may not activate in the following cases: Bad weather (for example

heavy rain, a blizzard or thick fog)

Visibility is poor due to sand or smoke in the air.

Light is poor in the evening, early morning, or at night.

In a dark area (indoor parking area, etc.)

There is an obstacle outside the area illuminated by the head- lights.

Strong light is coming from the front (for example sunlight at sunrise or sunset headlight beams, etc.).

The windshield has become fogged, scratched or smeared, or snow, dirt, dust or frost has adhered to it, or it is otherwise affected. These will reduce the stereo cameras field of view. Also, light is reflecting off the dirt, etc.

Fluid has not been fully wiped off the windshield during or after use of the window washer.

Obstacles cannot be correctly recognized due to water drop- lets from rain or the washer, or the wiper blades obstructing the stereo cameras field of view.

The stereo cameras field of view is obstructed.

With low obstacles (low wall, crash barrier, low vehicle, etc.)

The size and height of an obsta- cle is smaller than the limita- tions of the stereo cameras recognition capability. (Small animals, children, pedestrians who are sitting or lying down, etc.)

The rear portion nearest your vehicle is too small or too close (such as a trailer or oncoming vehicle). The system may not recognize the part of that vehi- cle which is closest to you.

There is a fence or wall, etc., with a uniform pattern (striped pattern, brick, etc.) or with no pattern in front.

2174-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

WARNING

There is a wall or door made of glass or a mirror in front.

An obstacle (another vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle, pedestrian, animal or child, etc.) cuts in from the side or jumps out sud- denly.

Your vehicle is immediately behind an obstacle after chang- ing lanes.

On sharp curves, steep uphill grades or steep downhill grades

The system determines that steering operation by the driver is intended as evasive action.

For your safety, do not test Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment on its own. It may operate improperly and cause an acci- dent.

NOTICE In the following situations, turn off Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment. Otherwise Pre-Collision Throttle Management may acti- vate unexpectedly.

The vehicle is being towed.

The vehicle is being loaded onto a carrier.

A chassis dynamometer, free-rollers or similar equip- ment is being used.

A mechanic lifts up the vehicle, starts the engine and allows the wheels to spin freely.

Driving on a race track

Passing hanging banners, flags or branches

Thick/tall vegetation is touching the vehicle.

Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment may activate in the following situations. Therefore concentrate on safe driving.

Your vehicle is close to the vehi- cle in front.

Passing through an automatic gate

Your vehicle is in a location where the grade of the road changes rapidly.

Passing through clouds of steam or smoke

218 4-5. EyeSight

Multimedia system screen Operate the multimedia system screen to turn on/off Pre-Colli- sion Throttle Management.

(P.400) Multi-information display Also you can turn on/off Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment using the meter operation switch. (P.400) If Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment is turned off, the Pre-Colli- sion Braking System OFF indicator illuminates.

The on/off setting for Pre-Collision Throttle Management operates in cooperation with Pre-Collision Braking System.

Even when Pre-Collision Throttle Management is turned off, if the engine switch is turned off and then restarted, Pre-Collision Throttle Management will be turned on. The system default set- ting when the vehicle is restarted is on.

Pre-Collision Braking Sys- tem OFF indicator

This indicator illuminates when the engine switch is turned to ON, and remains illuminated for approximately 7 seconds after the engine starts. It turns on when Pre-Collision Braking Sys- tem and Pre-Collision Throttle Management are turned off. It also illuminates under the fol- lowing conditions. TRAC and VSC system are

set to off. (P.262) The EyeSight system has a

malfunction. (P.227) The EyeSight system has

NOTICE Passing through water spray

from road sprinklers or snow clearing sprinklers on the road

In adverse weather, such as heavy snow or snowstorms

There is an obstacle on a curve or intersection.

A vehicle or an object is being narrowly passed.

Stopping very close to a wall or a vehicle in front

Turning on/off Pre-Colli- sion Throttle Management

2194-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

stopped temporarily. (P.228)

When the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator is turned on, Pre-Collision Braking System (including the Pre-Collision Braking Assist function) and Pre-Collision Throttle Management do not oper- ate.

*: If equipped

The following situations may cause incorrect lane detection and a faulty Lane Departure Warning to occur.

There are tire tracks on a wet road or snow-covered road.

There are boundaries between snow and asphalt, or marks from road repair, etc.

There are the shadows of guard- rails.

Lane markings are drawn in dou- ble.

There are some lane markings left from roadwork or markings from the previous road.

Lane Departure Warn- ing*

When vehicle speed is approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) or more, this function warns the driver if the sys- tem detects that the vehicle is likely to depart the traffic lane. When Lane Departure Warn- ing activates, an alert sounds 3 short beeps and a pop-up display will be dis- played.

Lane DepartureA

220 4-5. EyeSight

When the Lane Departure Warn- ing OFF indicator is illuminated, Lane Departure Warning is inac- tive. (P.221)

Multimedia system screen Operate the multimedia system screen to turn on/off Lane Departure Warning. (P.400) Multi-information display Also you can turn on/off Lane Departure Warning using the meter operation switch. (P.400) If Lane Departure Warning is turned off, the Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator illumi- nates.

The on/off setting for Lane Depar- ture Warning operates in coopera- tion with Lane Sway Warning.

The on/off status of Lane Depar- ture Warning is restored when you restart the engine.

WARNING Lane Departure Warning will not operate in all conditions. It also will not automatically return the vehicle to the original lane. If the driver relies only on Lane Depar- ture Warning to keep the vehicle in the lane, lane departure may occur, resulting in an accident.

Lane Departure Warning activates when it detects lane markings. However, it is not a function which can detect the edge of a road (shoulders or side ditches, etc.) and warn the driver.

NOTICE In the following situations, Lane Departure Warning may not acti- vate:

Vehicle speed is approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) or less.

The steering wheel is turned significantly to either side.

The vehicle is driving around a curve whose radius is 0.18 miles (300 m) or smaller.

The brake pedal is depressed or immediately after it is depressed.

The following distance behind a vehicle in front is short.

The turn signal is operating.

For approximately 4 seconds after the turn signal lever has returned to its original position.

The vehicle has not returned to the inside of the lane after Lane Departure Warning has acti- vated.

The lane is narrow.

It is difficult for the camera to detect lane markings.

There are no lane markings or they are very worn.

The lane markings are yellow.

The lane markings are similar in color to the road surface.

The lane markings are narrow.

Turning on/off Lane Departure Warning

2214-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator

This indicator illuminates when the engine switch is turned to ON, and then approximately 7 seconds after the engine starts, it turns off or remains illuminated depending on the current status (on or off). It turns on when Lane Departure Warning and Lane Sway Warning are turned off. It also illuminates under the fol- lowing conditions. Pre-Collision Braking System

is turned off during TRACK mode. (P.189, 262)

TRAC and VSC system are off. (P.262)

The EyeSight system has a malfunction. (P.227)

The EyeSight system has stopped temporarily. (P.228)

*: If equipped

Swaying detection is based on several minutes of prior driving data. Swaying will not be detected immediately after the vehicle starts to sway. In addition, the warning may continue for some time even after swaying stops.

Lane Sway Warning is just a func- tion that warns the driver. When

Lane Sway Warning*

This function detects sway- ing or drifting within a lane, and warns the driver. When Lane Sway Warning acti- vates, an alert sounds 3 short beeps and an pop-up display will be displayed. This function activates when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and deacti- vates when the vehicle speed falls below approxi- mately 25 mph (40 km/h). The function will reactivate when the vehicle speed is increased to exceed approx- imately 37 mph (60 km/h).

Stay AlertA

222 4-5. EyeSight

the driver is tired, not concentrat- ing on the road or not paying ade- quate attention to driving, be sure to take rest breaks as often as needed.

When the Lane Departure Warn- ing OFF indicator is illuminated, Lane Sway Warning will not oper- ate. (P.222)

Multimedia system screen Operate the multimedia system

screen to turn on/off Lane Sway Warning. (P.400) Multi-information display Also you can turn on/off Lane Sway Warning using the meter operation switch. (P.400) If Lane Sway Warning is turned off, the Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator illuminates.

The on/off setting for Lane Sway Warning operates in cooperation with Lane Departure Warning.

The on/off status of Lane Sway Warning is restored when you restart the engine.

Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator

This indicator illuminates when the engine switch is turned to ON, and then approximately 7 seconds after the engine starts, it turns off or remains illuminated depending on the current status (on or off). It turns on when Lane Departure Warning and Lane Sway Warning are turned off. It also illuminates under the fol- lowing conditions. Pre-Collision Braking System

is turned off during TRACK mode. (P.189, 262)

TRAC and VSC system are off. (P.262)

The EyeSight system has a malfunction. (P.227)

The EyeSight system has stopped temporarily.

WARNING Lane Sway Warning will not oper- ate in all conditions. It also will not automatically correct swaying. If the driver relies only on Lane Sway Warning to prevent the vehicle from swaying, an accident may occur.

NOTICE Under the following conditions, Lane Sway Warning may not operate.

On a winding road

The vehicle speed changes greatly.

Immediately after a lane change

It is difficult for the EyeSight ste- reo camera to detect lane mark- ings.

There are no lane markings or they are the very worn.

The lane markings are yellow.

The lane markings are similar in color to the road surface.

The lane markings are narrow.

Turning on/off Lane Sway Warning

2234-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

(P.228)

*: If equipped

Lead Vehicle Start Alert*

When the vehicle stopped in front starts to move, Lead Vehicle Start Alert notifies the driver by indicator on the meter display and notifi- cation. When the vehicle in front remains stopped con- tinuously (within a following distance of approximately 32 ft (10 m) and the drivers vehicle remains stopped for several seconds or longer), the system continues to detect the vehicle in front and this alarm activates if the vehicle in front advances approximately 10 ft (3 m) or more while the drivers vehicle remains sta- tionary. This function only activates when the shift lever is in the D, M or N position. When Lead Vehicle Start Alert acti- vates, a notification sounds a two-tone beep and an pop-up display will be dis- played.

224 4-5. EyeSight

The Lead Vehicle Start Alert set- ting can be turned on or off. (P.400)

Under the following conditions, Lead Vehicle Start Alert may acti- vate even when the vehicle in front has not started to move, or may not activate even after the vehicle in front has started to move:

A motorcycle or similar object cuts in between your vehicle and the stopped vehicle in front.

Weather or road conditions may interfere with the detection of the vehicle in front.

The EyeSight stereo camera loses detection of the vehicle in front.

Under the following conditions, Lead Vehicle Start Alert will not activate.

Pre-Collision Braking System is turned off during TRACK mode. (P.189, 262)

TRAC and VSC system are off. (P.262)

The EyeSight system has a mal- function. (P.227)

The EyeSight system has stopped temporarily. (P.228)

Lead vehicle 10 ft (3 m) or more Vehicle Ahead Has Moved

A

C

WARNING Even after alerts are given audibly and through the display of an indi- cator, be sure to carefully check the area surrounding the vehicle before pulling away. Relying solely on Lead Vehicle Start Alert may result in an accident.

2254-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

List of alert/notification sounds

List of alert/notification sounds

Alert/notification sound Status Reference page

Single continuous beep

Pre-Collision Braking System: Secondary Braking is active. P.186

1 short beep and 1 long beep

Adaptive Cruise Control or Con- ventional Cruise Control is can- celed automatically.

P.203, 212

Repeated short beeps

Pre-Collision Braking System: First Braking is active.

P.186Pre-Collision Braking System: The following distance warning is active.

The Obstacle Detected warning from Adaptive Cruise Control is active.

P.205

Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment is active. P.215

3 short beeps Lane Departure Warning is active. P.219

Lane Sway Warning is active. P.221

3 intermittent beeps, 1 short beep and 1 long beep

Pre-Collision Braking System: Just before the automatic brake is slowly released by the system after the vehicle is stopped by the pre-collision braking.

P.186

Adaptive Cruise Control system: Just before the automatic brake is released by the system after the vehicle is stopped by the Adaptive Cruise Control system. Adaptive Cruise Control system will stop the vehicle according to the lead vehi- cle stops.

P.203

226 4-5. EyeSight

*: The notification that indicates when a lead vehicle is detected or when it is no longer detected (Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound), as well as Lead Vehicle Start Alert can be turned on or off. (P.400)

1 short beep

Either of the following occurs while Adaptive Cruise Control is activated. A vehicle in front is detected*. A vehicle in front is no longer

detected*.

P.189

The cruise control mode (Adaptive Cruise Control/Conventional Cruise Control) is changed.

P.208

EyeSight is malfunctioning. P.227

EyeSight operation is temporarily stopped. P.228

Two-tone beep Lead Vehicle Start Alert is active*. P.223

Alert/notification sound Status Reference page

2274-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

The alert sounds 1 short beep and (yellow) blinks or illuminates. At the same time, the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator and the Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator will illuminate. A message will also be displayed on the meter display.

If (yellow) is illuminating or blinking, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn off the engine and then restart it.

If the indicator continues illuminat- ing or flashing even after the engine has been restarted, the EyeSight system has a malfunc- tion. In this case, all EyeSight functions will be stopped. Normal driving will still be possible. How-

ever, contact a Toyota dealer for an inspection.

If (yellow) illuminates or flashes, the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will not operate.

EyeSight malfunction and temporary stop

If a malfunction is detected in the EyeSight system, the indica- tors in the instrument panel and the meter display inform the driver of the malfunction. Check the displayed contents and take the appropriate action.

Malfunction (including position/angle misalignment of stereo camera)

Warning message Cause Action

EyeSight OFF Check Manual

An EyeSight malfunc- tion or position/angle misalignment of the ste- reo camera has occurred.

Inspection and adjust- ment is necessary. Con- tact your Toyota dealer.

228 4-5. EyeSight

The alert will sound 1 short beep, and the EyeSight temporary stop indicator (white), the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator and the Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator will illuminate at the same time. A message will also be displayed on the meter display. When the cause has been resolved, temporary stop will be canceled and the EyeSight system will automatically restart.

NOTICE

If both (yellow) and the mal- function indicator lamp illuminate at the same time while driving, have your vehicle checked/repaired by a Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Eye- Sight cannot be used if there is an abnormality with the engine, etc.

Temporary stop

2294-5. EyeSight

4

D riving

Warning message Cause Action

EyeSight Disabled No Camera View

It is difficult for the ste- reo camera to detect objects in front. The windshield is dirty

or fogged up. Poor weather condi-

tions Strong light from the

front

Clean the windshield. In poor weather con-

ditions or if there is strong light from the front, the EyeSight system will restart once you have driven your vehicle for a period of time and the conditions affecting the system have improved. If the sys- tem does not restart, even after the condi- tions have improved and a period of time has elapsed, contact your Toyota dealer for an inspection.

230 4-5. EyeSight

When (white) is illuminated, no EyeSight functions can be used except for Conventional Cruise Control.

When (white) is illuminated, the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system may not operate.

EyeSight Disabled Temp Range

In low or high tempera- tures

The system will restart once the temperature is within the operational range of the EyeSight system. If the system does not restart, even when the temperature inside the vehicle is within the operational range, contact your Toy- ota dealer for an inspec- tion.

EyeSight Disabled Check Manual

The EyeSight system is starting up.

The system has determined that the vehicle is extremely inclined.

The Pre-Collision sec- ondary braking has operated 3 times after the engine was started.

The engine has stopped.

The system will restart once the cause has been resolved. At this time, it may take some time for the system to restart. If the system does not restart, even after the conditions have improved and a period of time has elapsed, contact your Toyota dealer for an inspection.

Warning message Cause Action

2314-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

4-6.Using other driving systems

*: If equipped BSD/RCTA consists of the fol- lowing functions. To detect a vehicle in a blind

spot on an adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at high speed while driving the vehi- cle (Blind Spot Detection)

To detect a vehicle approach- ing from the right or left while reversing the vehicle (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

The system uses radar sensors for the following features.

The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been certified by the radio wave related laws of the U.S. and other FCC compliant countries and Can- ada. When driving in other coun- tries, certification of the country where the vehicle is driven must be obtained. For certification in the U.S. and other FCC compliant countries and Canada, refer to P.440.

Blind Spot Detection (BSD) The system notifies the driver of the presence of vehicles in its blind spot. If the system detects a vehicle

in its blind spot, it warns the driver by illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach indica- tor(s) on the outside mirror(s).

If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA approach indicator is illumi- nating, the system warns the

BSD/RCTA*

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear corner radars with Blind Spot Detection, Lane Change Assist and Rear Cross Traffic Alert. These functions of BSD/RCTA are the systems that detect objects and vehi- cles to the rear and draw attention to the driver when changing a lane or when driving in reverse.

WARNING The driver is responsible for driv- ing safely. Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when changing lanes or reversing the vehicle.

The system is designed to assist the driver in changing lanes or reversing safely by monitoring the rear and side areas of the vehicle. However, you cannot rely on this system alone in assuring the safety during a lane change or reversing. Overconfidence in this system could result in an accident and lead to serious injury or death. Since the system operation has various limitations, the flash- ing or illumination of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator may be delayed or it may not operate at all even when a vehicle is present in a neighboring lane or approaching from either side.

The driver is responsible for pay- ing attention to the rear and side areas of the vehicle.

System features

232 4-6. Using other driving systems

driver of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indi- cator.

Operating range Lane Change Assist (LCA) The system notifies the driver of vehicles approaching at a high speed in the neighboring lanes. If the system detects a vehicle

approaching at a high speed in the neighboring lanes, it warns the driver of dangers by illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach indicator(s) on the outside mirror(s).

If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA approach indicator is illumi- nating, the system warns the driver of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indi- cator.

Operating range Rear Cross Traffic Alert

(RCTA) The system notifies the driver of another vehicle approaching from either side when driving in reverse. This feature helps the driver check the rear and side areas of the vehicle when mov- ing backward. If the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side while moving backward, it warns the driver of dangers in the fol- lowing way. The BSD/RCTA approach

indicator(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.

A warning buzzer sounds. An icon appears on the multi-

media system screen.

A

A

2334-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

Operating range Limitations of the detectability

of RCTA Since the detectability of RCTA is limited, the RCTA may not operate properly in angled park- ing. Example 1

1 The detection range of the radar sensors

2 Area out of detection range of the radar sensors Parked vehicle Vehicle that may not be detected

Example 2

1 The detection range of the radar sensors Vehicle that may be detected

The system may detect that a vehi- cle is passing in front of your vehicle. Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when reversing the vehicle.

Operating conditions The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the following condi- tions are met. The engine switch is in ON. The BSD/RCTA warning light

and BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.

The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7 mph (12 km/h) (except when revers- ing).

The shift lever is in R. (RCTA only)

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the following situations. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

appears.

WARNING

An approaching vehicle may not be detected because the detection range is limited by the parked vehicle . Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when reversing the vehicle.

A

A

System operation

C

234 4-6. Using other driving systems

The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator does not appear (except when reversing).

In the following cases, the BSD/RCTA will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA warning light will appear.

When a malfunction occurs in the system, including the BSD/RCTA approach indicator

If the BSD/RCTA warning light appears, exercise proper caution. (P.237)

In the following cases, the BSD/RCTA will temporarily stop operating (or may stop operating) and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will appear.

When the radar sensor becomes significantly misaligned (If the ori- entation of the radar sensor is shifted for any reason, readjust- ment is required. Have the sensor adjusted at a Toyota dealer.)

When a large amount of snow or ice sticks to the rear bumper sur- face around the radar sensors

When the vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road or in an envi- ronment in which there are no objects around (such as in a des- ert) for a prolonged period of time

When the temperature around the radar sensors increases exces- sively due to long driving on uphill grades in the summer, etc.

When the temperature around the radar sensors becomes extremely low

When the vehicle battery voltage lowers

When the vehicle voltage exceeds the battery voltage rating

The BSD/RCTA will resume oper- ation once these conditions are corrected, and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will disappear. How- ever, if the BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

cator appears for a prolonged period of time, have the system inspected at a Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The detectability of the radar sen- sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA detection may be impaired and the system may not operate prop- erly under the following condi- tions.

When the rear bumper around the radar sensors is distorted

When ice, snow or mud adheres to the rear bumper surface around the radar sensors

When stickers, etc. are affixed on the areas of the radar sensors on the rear bumper

During adverse weather condi- tions such as rain, snow or fog

When driving on wet roads such as snow-covered roads and through puddles

The radar sensors may not detect or may have difficulty detecting the following vehicles and objects.

Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, stationary objects on the road or road side, etc.

Vehicles with body shapes that the radar may not reflect (vehicles with lower body height such as a trailer with no cargo and sports cars)

Vehicles that are not approaching your vehicle even though they are in the detection area (either on a neighboring lane to the rear or beside your vehicle when revers- ing) (The system determines the presence of approaching vehicles based on data detected by the radar sensors.)

Vehicles traveling at significantly different speeds

Vehicles driving in parallel at almost the same speed as your vehicle for a prolonged time

Oncoming vehicles Vehicles in a lane beyond the

neighboring lane Vehicles travelling at a signifi-

cantly lower speed that you are

2354-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

trying to overtake On a road with extremely narrow

lanes, the system may detect vehicles driving in a lane next to the neighboring lane.

While the BSD/RCTA is active, the following item(s) will operate to alert the driver: The BSD/RCTA approach

indicator (when there are vehicles in the neighboring lanes).

The BSD/RCTA approach indicator and warning buzzer (when a vehicle is approach- ing from the left or right side while your vehicle is revers- ing)

BSD/RCTA approach indi- cator

It is mounted on each side of the outside mirrors. The indicator will illuminate when a vehicle approaching from behind is detected. The indicator will flash to warn the driver of dangers under the following conditions. While the indicator is illumi-

nating, if the turn signal lever is operated toward the side in which this indicator turned on

When reversing the vehicle while the system detects a vehicle approaching from

either side

BSD/RCTA approach indica- tor

BSD/RCTA approach indica- tor dimming function

When the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator will be reduced.

You may have difficulty seeing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator under the following conditions.

When sunlight shines directly on it When the headlight beams from a

vehicle traveling behind shines directly on it

While the illumination brightness control dial is in the fully upward position, even if the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator will not be reduced. For details about the illumination brightness control dial, refer to P.91.

BSD/RCTA approach warn- ing buzzer (only when reversing)

A warning buzzer sounds along with flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator to warn the driver of dangers. The setting of the warning buzzer volume can

BSD/RCTA approach indi- cator/warning buzzer

A

236 4-6. Using other driving systems

be changed by operating the multimedia system screen. (P.400) Safety tips regarding the

BSD/RCTA approach indi- cator/warning buzzer

In the following cases, opera- tion of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings.

When a vehicle moves to the neighboring lane from a lane next to the neighboring lane

When driving on a steep incline or on repeated sharp uphill and downhill grades

When going beyond a pass When both your vehicle and a

vehicle driving on a neighboring lane are driving on the far side of each lane.

When several narrowly-spaced vehicles are approaching in a row

In low radius bends (tight bends or when making turns at an inter- section)

When there is a difference in height between your lane and the neighboring lane

Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is activated by touching BSD/RCTA

Immediately after the shift lever is shifted to R

When extremely heavy cargo is loaded in the trunk During reversing, operation of

the BSD/RCTA approach indi- cator and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warn- ings under the following con- ditions.

When backing out of an angled parking space

When a large-sized vehicle is parked next to your vehicle (That vehicle prevents the propagation of radar waves.)

When reversing on sloped roads When reversing at a high speed The BSD/RCTA approach

indicator may illuminate when driving close to solid objects on the road or road side (such as guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls).

When turning at an intersec- tion in urban areas, or a multi- lane intersection, the BSD/RCTA approach indica- tor may flash.

If a building or a wall exists in the reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA approach indica- tor may flash and the warning buzzer may sound.

2374-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

In the following cases, the system may detect a vehicle driving two lanes away from your vehicle.

When your vehicle drives on the near side of its lane from the cor- responding vehicle

When the vehicle driving two lanes away drives on the near side of its lane from your vehicle

System temporary stops This display appears when the system is used at extremely high or low temperatures or when abnormal voltage exists. Once these conditions are cor- rected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condi- tion and the indicator will disap- pear. If the indicator remains dis- played for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a Toyota dealer.

BSD/RCTA Disabled BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

System temporary stops due to reduced radar sensi- tivity

This display appears when the detectability of the radar sen- sors is reduced. Once the condi- tion is corrected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will disappear. If the indicator remains dis- played for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a Toyota dealer.

BSD/RCTA Disabled Sen- sor Blocked BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

System malfunction This display appears when a malfunction occurs in the sys- tem. Contact a Toyota dealer and have the system inspected.

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

A

BSD/RCTA warning light

A

238 4-6. Using other driving systems

BSD/RCTA Disabled Check Owner's Manual BSD/RCTA warning light

To turn the BSD/RCTA system on and off, operate the multi-information display (P.400) or multimedia system screen (Refer to MULTIMEDIA OWNER'S MANUAL). When the BSD/RCTA system is turned OFF, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator on the multi-infor- mation display will illuminate.

In the following cases, turn off the BSD/RCTA system. The system may not operate properly due to blocked radar waves.

When towing the vehicle When a bicycle carrier or other

item is fitted to the rear of the vehi- cle

When using a chassis dynamome- ter or free roller device, etc.

When running the engine and making the wheels rotate while lift- ing up the vehicle

If the engine switch is turned to OFF, the last known status of the system is maintained. For exam- ple, if the engine switch is turned to OFF with the BSD/RCTA deac- tivated, the BSD/RCTA remains deactivated the next time the engine switch is turned to ON.

The radar sensors, one on each side of the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear bumper.

Radar sensors

If the radar sensors require repair or replacement, or the bumper area around the radar sensors requires repair, paintwork or replacement, contact your Toyota dealer for assis- tance.

To turn on/off the BSD/RCTA

A

Handling of radar sensors

NOTICE To ensure correct operation of the BSD/RCTA, observe the follow- ing precautions.

A

2394-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

*: If equipped

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system records and stores the following data when automatic braking operates. It does not record conversations, personal information or other audio data. Distance from the object Vehicle speed Accelerator pedal operation status Brake pedal operation status Shift lever position Outside temperature The sensitivity setting of the sonar

sensors Toyota and third parties contracted by Toyota may acquire and use the recorded data for the purpose of vehicle research and development. Toyota and third parties contracted by Toyota will not disclose or pro- vide the acquired data to any other third party except under the follow- ing conditions. The vehicle owner has given

his/her consent. The disclosure/provision is based

NOTICE Always keep the bumper sur-

face near the radar sensors clean.

Do not affix any stickers or other items on the bumper surface near the radar sensors. For details, consult your Toyota dealer.

Do not modify the bumper near the radar sensors.

Do not paint the bumper near the radar sensors.

Do not expose the bumper near the radar sensors to strong impacts. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunc- tion may occur, including the inability to detect vehicles enter- ing the detection areas. If any strong shock is applied to the bumper, be sure to contact your Toyota dealer for inspection.

Do not disassemble the radar sensors.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system*

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a system designed to help avoid collisions or reduce collision damage when reversing the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected in the reversing direction, the system will notify the driver with a warning sound and may activate the vehicles brakes automatically.

240 4-6. Using other driving systems

on a court order or other legally enforceable request.

Data that has been modified so that the user and vehicle cannot be identified is provided to a research institution for statistical processing or similar purposes.

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will operate the following 2 functions using 4 sonar sensors. Sonar Audible Alarm The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system detects objects rear- ward and warns the driver by warn- ing message on the multimedia system screen and warning beeps. Automatic Braking The automatic braking detects objects rearward and if there is a high risk of a collision, the system decelerates the vehicle and con- trols the braking to reduce damage. When reversing

When either strong automatic braking or torque control is applied to prevent collision (in

WARNING Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) is not a system intended to replace the drivers responsi- bility to check their surroundings for vehicles or obstacles to avoid a collision.

The driver is responsible for driving safely. Before reversing, be sure to first depress the brake pedal and visually check the surroundings.

There are some cases in which the vehicle cannot avoid colli- sion, because the system oper- ation has limitations. The warning sound or automatic braking may be delayed or may not operate at all even when an obstacle is present.

Make sure to set the Automatic Braking to OFF when the vehi- cle is on the free roller or on the chassis dynamometer. Other- wise, the vehicle may move and it may cause an accident.

Make sure to set the Automatic Braking to OFF when towing the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle may move and it may cause an accident.

The system is not designed to detect people (including chil- dren), animals or other moving objects.

Depending on the vehicle condi- tion or the surrounding environ- ment, the sonar sensors ability to detect objects may become unstable.

Reverse Automatic Brak- ing (RAB) system over- view

2414-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

this case, short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound)

Object Close Behind When the vehicle is stopped

by the system (in this case, the continuous beep will remain sounding)

Apply Brake To Hold Posi- tion

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will operate when all of the following conditions are

met. The engine switch is in ON. The EyeSight warning light is

off. The RAB warning light is off. The RAB OFF indicator is off. The shift lever is in the R.

EyeSight warning light RAB warning light RAB OFF indicator

Sonar Audible Alarm The Sonar Audible Alarm is

set to ON. The vehicle speed is from 0 to

9 mph (0 to 15 km/h). Automatic Braking The Automatic Braking is set

to ON. The vehicle speed is from 1 to

9 mph (1.5 to 15 km/h).

In the following cases, the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will not operate. Promptly contact a Toyota dealer to have the system inspected.

The EyeSight warning light is illu- minated.

The RAB warning light is illumi-

WARNING If your vehicle is trapped on a rail- road crossing and you are trying to escape by reversing through the crossing gate, the system may recognize the crossing gate as an obstacle and brake may activate. In this case, remain calm and either continue to depress the accelerator pedal or cancel the system. (P.247)

Operating conditions

A

A

A

C

242 4-6. Using other driving systems

nated. In the following cases, the

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system cannot be operated.

The RAB OFF indicator is illumi- nated.

In the following cases, the func- tions may not be able to properly work. Promptly contact a Toyota dealer to have the system inspected.

A sticker, paint, or a chemical is applied to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor.

The rear bumper is modified. The rear bumper has been

removed and attached. The ground clearance is changed

due to the vehicles loading condi- tion or modification.

There is damage to the sonar sen- sors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor.

The rear bumper is exposed to strong impact, or the rear bumper is deformed.

On a steep hill, the systems auto- matic braking ability will be reduced.

The system is designed to avoid collisions by automatic hard brak- ing when the vehicles reversing speed is less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). However, the sys- tem does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid colli- sions in any situation.

If the vehicle is reversed at an extremely slow speed, the drivers operation may be prioritized. In this case, automatic braking will not operate.

The system may not be able to detect and apply the brake with the following objects.

Sharp or thin objects such as poles, fences and ropes which may not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor.

Objects that are too close to the rear bumper when the shift lever is

set to R. Objects with a surface which may

not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor such as a chain link fence.

Objects the system is not designed to detect and apply brake.

Pedestrians. Moving objects including moving

vehicles. Objects which absorbs sound

waves such as cloth or snow. Objects whose surface has a

diagonal angle. Objects that are low to the ground

such as parking blocks. Objects that are high above the

ground such as objects hanging from above.

Objects that are out of range of the center of the vehicle in the horizontal direction.

Objects that are not in a vertical direction.

Objects which are not perpendicu- lar to the ground.

Objects which are not directly in the traveling direction of the vehi- cle.

Objects which are uneven or wavy.

When reversing the vehicle, the functions may not be able to work properly or may cause a system malfunction if the following condi- tions exist.

High frequency sound from other sources are nearby: Horn sound from another vehicle. Engine sound from other vehicles. Sound of an air brake. Vehicle detection equipment or a

sonar from another vehicle. A sound wave with a frequency

similar to the vehicles system is transmitted near by.

A vehicle equipped with the same system is reversing toward your reversing direction.

Weather conditions: Extremely high or extremely low

2434-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

temperatures in which the area near the sonar sensor becomes too hot or too cold to operate.

The sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensors are exposed to heavy rain or a significant amount of water.

Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc. Air is moving rapidly such as when

a strong wind is blowing. Parts attached to the rear bumper

near the sonar sensor: Commercial electronic parts (fog

light, fender pole, radio antenna) or commercial attachment parts (trailer hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper guard) are attached.

Parts that emit high frequency sound, such as a horn or speaker, are attached.

Vehicle conditions: Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the

sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor.

The vehicle is significantly inclined.

The ground clearance is signifi- cantly reduced due to the vehi- cles loading condition, etc.

When the sonar sensor is mis- aligned due to a collision or an accident.

Surrounding environment: A cloth banner, flag, hanging

branch or railroad crossing bars are present in the reversing direc- tion.

When reversing on a gravel or grassy area.

When reversing in an area where objects or walls are adjacent to the vehicle such as narrow tun- nels, narrow bridges, narrow roads or narrow garages.

Wheel track or hole is present in the ground of the reversing direc- tion.

When reversing over a drainage cover (grating cover).

The path of the reversing direction is inclined such as on a steep

uphill.

When reversing downhill.

Reversing in a garage with a low ceiling or a tunnel.

A curb or step is present in the reversing direction.

There is a patch of snow rear- ward.

There is a puddle of water. There is an obstacle that is next to

an object. Going back along a wall. The area where the road starts

touching dirt and snow.

244 4-6. Using other driving systems

When reversing on an uneven road.

In circumstances such as the fol- lowing, it may not be possible to avoid a collision even when the system operates normally.

Roads are slippery. The tire air pressure is not correct. The tires have become worn. Tire chains are installed.

Tires which are not the designated size are installed.

Emergency repairs were per- formed using a puncture repair kit.

The suspension was modified. Vehicle driving is unstable due to

accident or malfunction. The brake system warning light is

illuminated.

When Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is in operation, an audible warning beeps will sound in 3 levels to warn the driver of a potential collision.

It may take time to display the wall and sound warning beeps after the object was recognized by the Sonar Audible Alarm.

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition. Obstacle detected and alert

level When an object is detected in the reversing direction, the range of detected object will be shown on the multimedia sys-

tem screen. A warning alarm will sound and, depending on the speed, either torque control to generate engine braking or automatic braking will be applied.

Sonar Audible Alarm

Alert level Range of

detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern

Long proximity (object detected)

35 in (90cm) or more Green No warning

sound

Medium proxim- ity alert(approach- ing the object)

28 to 35 in (70 to 90cm) Yellow Short beeps

Short proximity alert (approach- ing closer to the object)

20 to 28 in (50 to 70cm) Orange Rapid short

beeps

Closest proximity alert (too close to the object)

20 in (50cm) or less Red Continuous beep

2454-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

Long proximity alert (object detected)

Green: 35 in (90 cm) or more Medium proximity alert

(approaching the object)

Yellow: 28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm)

Short proximity alert (approaching closer to the object)

Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)

Closest proximity alert (too close to the object)

Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less

Object close behind warn- ing

If the system determine the risk of collision with the object. Short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound and either strong automatic braking or torque control will be applied to prevent collision. At this time, a warning message is also displayed on the multi-information display. Automatic braking warning

Object Close Behind

A

A

A

Automatic Braking opera- tion

A

A

246 4-6. Using other driving systems

Make sure to depress the brake pedal once the vehicle has been stopped by automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is depressed, a message will be displayed on the multimedia system screen and the continu- ous beep will remain sounding. At this time, a warning message is also displayed on the multi-information display. Depress brake pedal warning

Apply Brake To Hold Posi- tion

The Sonar Audible Alarm and Auto- matic Braking are different in opera- tion conditions. Therefore there are cases in which only one of these functions will activate.

After the vehicle is stopped by the system

After the brake pedal is

depressed, the RAB OFF indi- cator will illuminate and the sys- tem will temporarily stop operating. The RAB OFF indica- tor will turn off when the shift lever is shifted to a position other than R. The system will operate again the next time the shift lever is shifted to R.

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will be disabled in the following situations.

When 3 seconds pass after the vehicle is stopped

When any door is opened When the RAB warning light is illu-

minated When the RAB OFF indicator is

illuminated The Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system may stop operating temporarily in the following cases and the RAB OFF indicator will illuminate.

Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor

Objects are too close to the rear bumper when the shift lever is set to R

The system detects sounds of a similar frequency to the RAB sonar

When the TRAC and VSC mode are turned off

When in TRACK mode and the

WARNING Depress the brake pedal immedi- ately after the system stops the vehicle by automatic braking. Depending on the conditions of the road surface and tires, the vehicle may not remain stopped, possibly leading to an accident.

A

2474-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

Pre-Collision Braking System has been turned off

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system can be temporar- ily canceled by any of the follow- ing operation. While the vehicle is stopped

by the operation of automatic braking, the brake pedal is depressed.

While the vehicle is stopped by the operation of automatic braking, the accelerator pedal is depressed.

The accelerator pedal is depressed continuously (In this case, limited acceleration will be canceled and the vehi- cle will continue reversing.)

The shift lever is shifted to a position other than R.

The system will be canceled if the object is no longer detected.

While the shift lever is shifted to R, the below functions of the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system can be set by operating the multimedia system screen.

When the ON setting key is shown, the corresponding setting is ON. Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn the setting OFF. When the OFF setting is shown, the corresponding setting is OFF. Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn the setting ON.

ON setting key of Automatic Braking OFF setting key of Auto- matic Braking ON setting key of the Sonar Audible Alarm OFF setting key of the Sonar Audible Alarm

When the Automatic Braking are turned OFF, the following indica- tor(s) will illuminate. The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the corresponding function is turned ON.

Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system operation

Reverse Automatic Brak- ing (RAB) system ON/OFF setting

A

C

D

248 4-6. Using other driving systems

When the settings cannot be changed, the ON/OFF setting key will be grayed out. Also, the following settings can be changed by operating the multime- dia system screen. (P.400) Warning Volume Sonar Audible Alarm Automatic Braking

If the Reverse Automatic Brak- ing (RAB) system malfunctions, the above indicator illuminates on the meter. Contact the near- est Toyota dealer for details.

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear bumper. To ensure the proper operation of the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system, observe the fol- lowing precautions. Do not affix any stickers or

other items on the sonar sen- sor or the bumper surface near the sonar sensors.

Always keep the sonar sensor

and the rear bumper surface near the sonar sensors clean.

Do not modify rear bumper. Do not paint the bumper near

the sonar sensors. Do not apply high pressure

water to the sonar sensors with a high pressure car-washing machine.

Do not apply strong impacts to the rear bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a sys- tem malfunction may occur, including inability to detect objects in the reversing direc- tion. If any strong impact is applied to the rear bumper, contact a Toyota dealer to have the system inspected.

Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.

If the sonar sensors require repair or replacement, or if the area of the rear bumper near the sonar sensors requires repair, paintwork or replacement, contact your Toyota dealer for assistance.

RAB warning light

Handling of the Sonar Sensors

2494-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

Do not wipe the camera with alco- hol, benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To remove contamination, wipe the camera with a cloth moistened with a diluted neutral detergent. Then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.

When waxing the vehicle, be care- ful not to apply the wax to the camera. If it comes in contact with the camera, moisten a clean cloth with a diluted neutral detergent to remove the wax.

The camera lens has a hard coat- ing to help prevent scratches. However, when washing the vehi- cle or cleaning the camera lens, be careful not to scratch the cam- era lens. Do not use a washing brush directly on the camera lens. The image quality of the rear view camera may deteriorate.

Strong light shined on the camera lens may develop vertical lines around the light source. This is not a malfunction.

Under the fluorescent light, the display may flicker. However, this is not a malfunction.

The image of the rear view cam- era may be slightly different from the actual color of the objects.

If there is a malfunction on the multimedia system screen, refer to MULTIMEDIA OWNER'S MAN- UAL.

Rear view camera

A rear view camera is attached to the trunk lid. When the ignition switch is in the ON position and the shift lever is set to R, the rear view camera automati- cally displays the rear view image behind the vehicle on the multimedia system screen.

WARNING Since the rear view camera

uses a wide-angle lens, the image on the monitor is different from the actual view in terms of distance.

Since the range of the image on the monitor is limited, always check the rear view and the sur- rounding area with your eyes and mirrors, and move back- ward at a slow speed. Moving backward only by checking the rear view image from the cam- era could cause an accident.

Do not disassemble or modify the camera, switch or wiring. If smoke comes out or you smell a strange odor, stop using the rear view camera immediately. Contact your Toyota dealer for an inspection. Continued use may result in accident, fire or electric shock.

NOTICE When washing your vehicle with

a high-pressure washer, do not allow water to touch the camera directly. Entry of water in the camera lens may result in con- densation, malfunction, fire or electric shock.

250 4-6. Using other driving systems

When the shift lever is set to R, the rear view camera automati- cally displays the rear view image from the vehicle. When the lever is set to other posi- tions, the image before setting to R is displayed. 1 Set the ignition switch to ON. 2 Set the shift lever to R.

The image of the rear view cam- era is horizontally reversed as is the case with the vehicle inside

mirror or the outside mirror. When Rear Camera Delay Con-

trol is on, the rear view image from the rear view camera will be displayed on the multimedia sys- tem screen for a certain amount of time after the shift lever is shifted from R to another position. When any of the following conditions are met, the rear view image will be canceled:

The shift lever is shifted to P (vehi- cles with an automatic transmis- sion)

The vehicle speed becomes approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more

The parking brake is engaged 9 seconds have elapsed since the

shift lever was shifted from R to another position

To turn the function on and off, refer to MULTIMEDIA OWNER'S MAN- UAL. It may be difficult to see the image

of the rear view camera in the fol- lowing cases. This is not a mal- function of the camera.

The vehicle is in a dark place (at night, in a tunnel, etc.).

The vehicle is in an extremely hot or cold place.

An object (such as raindrops, snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the view of the rear view camera sticks to the lens of the camera.

Strong light is shining directly on the camera lens (occasionally, there are vertical lines on the screen).

The area from the rear end of the bumper can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the bumper and areas just under the bumper cannot be viewed.

NOTICE Since the camera is a precision

device, do not subject it to strong impacts. Otherwise, mal- function, fire or electric shock may occur.

If mud or snow sticks to or is fro- zen on the camera, you must be very careful when removing it. Otherwise, damage to the cam- era may cause a fire or electric shock. Pour water or lukewarm water over the camera to remove mud and ice, and wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.

Do not put a flame close to the camera or wiring. Otherwise, damage or fire may occur.

When replacing the fuse, be sure to use a fuse with the spec- ified rating. Use of a fuse with a different rating may result in a malfunction.

If you use the rear view camera for a long time while the engine is not operated, the battery may become completely discharged.

How to use the rear view camera

Viewing range on the screen

2514-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

Also, the image from the rear view camera looks shorter than the actual distance. Range of view

Image from camera

The area above the camera cannot be viewed. If there is an object that has a wide projection on its upper part such as a sign pole behind the vehicle, the pro- jection cannot be seen on the screen.

Range of view

Image from camera

The help lines are a guide to help you realize the actual dis- tance from the screen image.

WARNING The range that can be viewed with the rear view camera is lim- ited. Always be sure to check with your eyes when moving backward and proceed slowly. Otherwise, it may cause an accident or injury.

Help lines

252 4-6. Using other driving systems

Help lines

Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line) Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper (green horizontal line) Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper (green horizontal line) Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper (yellow horizontal line) Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper (red horizontal line) Vehicle centerline Dynamic guidelines

When the shift lever is set to R, the multimedia system screen the help lines together with the rear view image.

If you shift to the R range within sev- eral seconds after turning on the ignition switch, the warning mes- sage may not be displayed. Wait for several seconds after turning on the ignition switch before shifting to the R range. Then, the warning mes- sage will be displayed.

When Steering Angle Lines is off, the dynamic guidelines will be dis- appear on the multimedia system screen. To turn the dynamic guide- lines on and off, refer to MULTIME- DIA OWNER'S MANUAL.

Difference between screen image and actual road

The distance markers show the distance for a level road when the vehicle is not loaded. It may be different from the actual dis- tance depending on the loading conditions or road conditions. When there is an upward

slope at the back

A

C

D

WARNING When moving backward, always

check the back with your eyes without relying on the help lines. Otherwise, it may cause an accident or injury.

The actual position may be dif- ferent from the indication of the help lines.

Differences may occur due to the number of passengers or the loaded cargo.

When the vehicle is on a slope or inclined against the road, the indication is different from the actual position.

2534-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

3 ft (1 m) The distance on the screen looks farther than the actual dis- tance. When there is a downward

slope at the back

3 ft (1 m) The distance on the screen looks nearer than the actual dis- tance.

When cargo is loaded, the rear view distance on the screen looks farther than the actual distance as in an upward slope.

Feature of distance marker

3 ft (1 m) line 10 ft (3 m) line

The distance marker shows the distance on the road. If there is a car or another object close

behind, distance cannot be cor- rectly displayed.

A

A

A

254 4-6. Using other driving systems

Conventional Cruise Control enables you to maintain a con- stant vehicle speed without hold- ing your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is operative when the vehicle speed is 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.

Make sure the Conventional Cruise Control system is turned off when the Conventional Cruise Control is not in use to avoid unin- tentionally setting of the Conven- tional Cruise Control.

1 After the engine has started, press the ON-OFF switch of the cruise control switch.

The Conventional Cruise Control indicator (white) on the meter will illuminate.

2 Depress the accelerator pedal until the vehicle reaches the desired speed.

Conventional Cruise Control (vehicles with- out the EyeSight)

Conventional Cruise Con- trol is a driving support sys- tem intended to allow more comfortable driving on expressways, freeways and interstate highways. It can be used to travel at a con- stant speed by maintaining the vehicle speed set by the driver. Please remember that you should not exceed posted speed limits.

WARNING Do not use the Conventional

Cruise Control under any of the following conditions. These may cause loss of vehicle control.

In heavy traffic

On roads with sharp bends

On winding roads

On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

During emergency towing

When using the Conventional Cruise Control, always set the speed appropriately according to the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, and other con- ditions.

To set Conventional Cruise Control

2554-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

3 When the vehicle reaches the desired speed, push the cruise control switch to the + RES side or the - SET side. The vehicle speed at the time when the switch is pushed will become the set vehicle speed, and constant speed driving will initiate.

At this time, the Conventional Cruise Control indicator (green) is illuminated in the meter. The set speed will be shown on the meter. You can change the displayed units by operating the meter display. (P.400) The vehicle will maintain the desired speed. Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while driving with the Conventional Cruise Control acti- vated. Simply depress the acceler- ator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to and maintain the previous cruising speed.

When setting the displayed unit as MPH When setting the displayed unit as km/h

The Conventional Cruise Con- trol can be temporarily canceled in the following ways. When the Conventional Cruise Control is cancelled, the Conven- tional Cruise Control indicator in the meter will change from green to white. Pulling the cruise control

switch. Depress the brake pedal. Depress the clutch pedal.

To resume the Conventional Cruise Control after it has been temporarily canceled and with vehicle speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more, push the lever up to return to the orig- inal cruising speed automati- cally. At this time, the Conventional

To temporarily cancel the Conventional Cruise Con- trol

A

256 4-6. Using other driving systems

Cruise Control indicator in the meter will change from white to green.

There are two ways to turn off the Conventional Cruise Con- trol: Press the ON-OFF switch of

the cruise control switch again.

Turn the engine switch to the ACC or OFF (but only when the vehicle is completely stopped).

To increase the speed (by the cruise control switch)

Push the cruise control switch to the +RES side and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the switch. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set speed.

When setting the displayed unit as MPH:

The set speed can be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pushing the cruise control switch to the +RES side. When setting the displayed

unit as km/h: The set speed can be increased 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each time by pushing the cruise control switch to the +RES side.

To increase the speed (by accelerator pedal)

1 Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- cle to the desired speed.

2 Push the cruise control switch to the -SET side once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without depressing the accel- erator pedal.

To decrease the speed (by the cruise control switch)

Push the cruise control switch to the -SET side and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired

To turn off the Conven- tional Cruise Control

To change the cruising speed

2574-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

speed. Then, release the switch. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set speed. When setting the displayed

unit as MPH: The set speed can be decreased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pushing the cruise control switch to the -SET side. When setting the displayed

unit as km/h: The set speed can be decreased 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each time by pushing the cruise control switch to the -SET side.

To decrease the speed (by brake pedal)

1 Depress the brake pedal to release Conventional Cruise Control temporarily.

2 When the speed decreases to the desired speed, push the cruise control switch to the -SET side once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

*: If equipped

Press the sport mode switch or snow mode switch to change between normal mode and sport mode or snow mode respectively. To cancel sport mode or snow mode, press the same switch again. 1 Normal mode Provides an optimal balance of fuel economy, quietness, and dynamic performance. Suitable for normal driving. 2 Sport mode Use sport mode for sporty driving or when driving in mountainous regions with lots of curves. The SPORT indicator comes on. Also, if the mode is changed to sport mode while driving with the shift lever in the D position, the selected gear, from D1 to D6, will be displayed on the meter. 3 Snow mode

Driving mode select switch*

The driving modes can be selected to suit driving con- dition.

Selecting a drive mode

258 4-6. Using other driving systems

Use snow mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road sur- faces such as snow. The snow mode indicator comes on.

Sport mode In sport mode, lower gears are

used and gears change at a higher engine speed.

In the following situations, it may not be possible to change to sport mode. When the mode cannot be changed to sport mode, a buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

When the Adaptive Cruise Control or Conventional Cruise Control is operating

When the engine is cold Snow mode To prevent slipping, 1st gear cannot be selected when in snow mode. Automatic deactivation of sport

mode and snow mode In the following situations, the driv- ing mode is automatically deacti- vated: When the engine is turned off after

driving in sport mode or snow mode.

When the Adaptive Cruise Control or Conventional Cruise Control is activated while driving in sport mode.

When in sport mode and stop- ping/starting off is automatically performed in second gear. (P.150)

When the engine switch is turned to ON, the hill-start assist control ON indicator will illumi- nate. When the hill-start assist control operates, the indicator will flash.

1 Park your vehicle in a flat, safe location.

Make sure that the parking brake is securely engaged. 2 Stop the engine by turning

the engine switch off.

Hill-start assist con- trol

Hill-start assist control helps to maintain braking force to assist starting off forward while facing uphill or starting off backward while facing downhill.

Hill-start assist control ON indicator

Disabling hill-start assist control

2594-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

3 Start the engine and check that the ABS warning light and slip indicator are off.

4 Press and hold the switch for approximately 30 seconds.

Check that the TRAC OFF and VSC OFF indicators illuminate and then turn off.

5 Within 5 seconds after the indicator lights turn off, release the switch. Then,

press the switch again within 2 seconds of releasing it.

The hill-start assist control ON indi- cator will turn off and then illumi- nate. 6 Turn the engine switch off. 7 Start the engine again and

check that the hill-start assist control ON indicator turns off.

Hill-start assist control will be dis- abled. To enable hill-start assist con- trol, perform steps 1 through 7 again.

When enabling the hill-start assist control

If the hill-start assist control ON indicator does not turn off or a mistake was made during the pro- cedure, turn the engine switch off and start the procedure from step 4 again.

If the switch is pressed and held for 30 seconds or more, the TRAC OFF indicator and VSC OFF indicator will turn off and the switch will become inoperable. In this case, the VSC will operate in normal mode. (P.262) If the engine switch is turned off and then the engine is started again, operation of the switch will become possible.

Operating conditions of hill-start assist control

When the following conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate: Vehicles with an automatic trans-

mission: The shift lever is in D or M (when starting off forward on while facing uphill) or in R (when starting off backward while facing downhill).

Vehicles with a manual transmis- sion: The shift lever is in a position other than R (when starting off for- ward while facing uphill) or in R (when starting off backward while facing downhill).

The vehicle is stopped. The accelerator pedal is not

depressed. The parking brake is not engaged. Hill-start assist control will not

operate when Hill-start assist control will not oper- ate when any of the following condi- tions are met: Vehicles with an automatic trans-

260 4-6. Using other driving systems

mission: The shift lever is in a position other than D or M (when facing uphill) or in a position other than R (when facing downhill).

Vehicles with a manual transmis- sion: The shift lever is in R (when facing uphill) or in a position other than R (when facing downhill).

Vehicles with an automatic trans- mission: The accelerator pedal is depressed.

The parking brake is applied. Vehicles with a manual transmis-

sion: The clutch is engaged. Approximately 2 seconds have

elapsed since the brake pedal was released.

The hill-start assist control ON indicator is not illuminated.

The engine switch is turned to ACC or OFF.

Notes for hill-start assist con- trol

A slight jolt may be felt when start- ing off backward with the shift lever in R and then moving for- ward.

If the braking power of hill-start assist control is insufficient, depress the brake pedal.

While the vehicle is stopped, make sure to depress the brake pedal.

The system may be malfunc- tioning when

In the following situations, the sys- tem may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. The slip indicator is illuminated. The hill-start assist control ON

indicator turns off and a buzzer sounds.

WARNING Hill-start assist control pre-

cautions Do not overly rely on hill-start

assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effec- tively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.

Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle sta- tionary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an acci- dent.

Do not stop the engine while hill-start assist control is operat- ing, as hill-start assist control will stop operating, possibly leading to an accident.

2614-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- tem)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slip- pery road surface Brake assist Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop sit- uation VSC (Vehicle Stability Con-

trol) Helps the driver to control skid- ding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road sur- faces TRAC (Traction Control) Helps to maintain drive power

and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slip- pery roads The TRAC system is also equipped with the brake LSD function. Hill-start assist control P.258 EPS (Electric Power Steer-

ing) Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel

When the TRAC/VSC systems are operating

The slip indicator will flash while the TRAC (Including brake LSD func- tion)/VSC systems are operating.

Disabling the TRAC system If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing switch to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it. In this case, the brake LSD function remains on. To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release switch.

Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supple- mentary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

Summary of the driving assist systems

262 4-6. Using other driving systems

The TRAC OFF indicator will come on.

Press switch again to turn the system back on.

TRACK mode Your vehicle is equipped with two types of control modes to accommo- date various driving preferences. The control modes can be selected with the TRACK switch. Normal mode allows secure and smooth normal driving. When the switch is pressed and held for 1 second or more, TRACK mode is activated. When TRACK mode is selected, the control characteristics of VSC, TRAC, etc. will be changed and sportier than normal driving will be possible. When TRACK mode is selected, the multi-information display will change to the TRACK mode dis-

play and the TRACK indicator and VSC OFF indicator will illuminate. To change back to normal mode

while in TRACK mode, press switch or the TRACK switch.

Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems

To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold switch for more than 3 seconds while the vehi- cle is stopped. The TRAC OFF indicator and the VSC OFF indicator will come on. However, on vehicles with an auto- matic transmission, the brake LSD function will remain on.

Press switch again to turn the systems back on.

Selecting TRAC mode and VSC mode Modes can be selected to suit your driving conditions as follows:

Driving condi- tions TRAC modes VSC modes Brake LSD

function Indicators

Normal roads Normal mode Normal mode Normal mode

Rough roads OFF Normal mode Normal mode

2634-6. Using other driving systems

4

D riving

*1:Vehicles with an automatic transmission *2:Vehicles with a manual transmission

Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, TRAC and VSC systems

A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeat- edly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indi- cate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

Any of the following conditions may occur when the above sys- tems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.

The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

EPS operation sound When the steering wheel is oper- ated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction. Automatic reactivation of TRAC

and VSC systems After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be

automatically reactivated in the fol- lowing situations: When the engine switch is turned

off. If only the TRAC system is turned

off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed is more than approximately 31 mph (50 km/h). If both the TRAC and VSC sys- tems are turned off, automatic reactivation will not occur when vehicle speed increases.

Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS sys- tem is reduced to prevent the sys- tem from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steer- ing wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should return to normal after a little while. Automatic deactivation of

TRACK mode When the engine switch is turned off after driving in TRACK mode, the mode is automatically deactivated.

Sport driving

TRACK mode

TRACK mode

TRACK mode

OFF OFF

TRACK mode*1

OFF*2

Driving condi- tions TRAC modes VSC modes Brake LSD

function Indicators

264 4-6. Using other driving systems

WARNING The ABS does not operate

effectively when The limits of tire gripping perfor-

mance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).

The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.

Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicles stopping dis- tance. Always maintain a safe dis- tance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following sit- uations:

When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

When driving with tire chains

When driving over bumps in the road

When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces

TRAC may not operate effec- tively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

When the VSC and/or brake LSD function is activated

The slip indicator flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator flashes.

When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the sys- tems to help ensure vehicle stabil- ity and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

Replacing tires Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pat- tern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level. The ABS, TRAC and VSC sys- tems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle. Contact your Toyota dealer for fur- ther information when replacing tires or wheels.

Handling of tires and the sus- pension

Using tires with any kind of prob- lem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist sys- tems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

2654-7. Driving tips

4

D riving

4-7.Driving tips

Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem- peratures.

Engine oil Engine coolant Washer fluid Have a service technician

inspect the condition of the battery.

Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires.

Make sure to install 4 tires that are of the specified size, and that all 4 tires are the same size, same maker, same brand and tread pat- tern.

Perform the following according to the driving conditions: Do not try to forcibly open a

window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the wind- shield.

Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicles roof,

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspec- tions before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a man- ner appropriate to the pre- vailing weather conditions.

Preparation for winter

WARNING Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

Use tires of the specified size, and that are the same size, same maker, same brand and tread pattern.

Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.

Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

NOTICE Repairing or replacing snow

tires Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

Before driving the vehicle

266 4-7. Driving tips

chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.

Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.

If a door is opened and closed when its side window is fro- zen, the window safety device will operate and the side win- dow open/close function linked to door operation may not operate correctly. If this occurs, perform the following after the ice has melted.

After opening the window to the approximately half open posi- tion, perform initialization. (P.129)

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suit- able to road conditions.

Park the vehicle and shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission), or 1 or R (man- ual transmission) without set- ting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the

parking brake, make sure to block the wheels. Failure to do so may be dan- gerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpect- edly, possibly leading to an accident.

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P*.

*: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any other position without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be shifted from P, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehi- cle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle because of the lack of clearance between the tires and vehicle body. When tire chains cannot be used, use of another type of traction device (such as spring chains) may be acceptable if use on your vehicle is recom- mended by the device manufac- turer, taking into account tire size and road conditions. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions, especially regard- ing maximum vehicle speed.

When driving the vehicle

When parking the vehicle

Tire chains

2674-7. Driving tips

4

D riving

To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is con- tacting your vehicle, and do not spin your wheels. Damage caused to your vehicle by use of a traction device is not covered under warranty. Make certain that any traction device you use is an SAE class S device, and use it on the rear wheels only. Always use the utmost care when driving with a traction device. Overconfidence because you are using a traction device could easily lead to a serious accident.

We recommend that you consult your Toyota dealer for informa- tion about the chains that you can use.

Selecting tire chains

268 4-7. Driving tips

269

5

5

Interior features

Interior features

.

5-1. Using the air conditioning system

Automatic air conditioning system....................... 270

Seat heaters................ 276 5-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list .......... 277 5-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features .................................. 279

Trunk features ............. 282 5-4. Using the other interior

features Other interior features . 283

270 5-1. Using the air conditioning system 5-1.Using the air conditioning system

Left-hand side temperature setting display Left-hand side temperature control switch Climate control mode display Fan speed control switch Right-hand side temperature control switch Right-hand side temperature setting display MAX A/C switch SYNC switch Outside/recirculated air mode switch A/C switch Airflow mode control switch Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch ON/OFF switch Windshield defogger switch Automatic mode switch

Automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets are automatically selected and fan speed is auto- matically adjusted according to the set temperature setting.

Air conditioning controls

A

C

D

2715-1. Using the air conditioning system

5

Interior features

Adjusting the temperature setting

To adjust the temperature set- ting, turn the temperature con- trol switch clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool). If A/C switch is not pressed, the system will blow ambient tempera- ture air or heated air. The air conditioning system switches between individual and synchronized modes each time SYNC switch is pressed. Synchronized modes (indicator on): The left-hand side temperature control switch can be used to adjust the temperature for the drivers and front passengers side. At this time, operate the right-hand side tem- perature control switch to enter individual mode. Individual modes (indicator off): The temperature for the drivers and front passengers side can be adjusted separately. Setting the fan speed To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control switch clock- wise (increase) or counterclock- wise (decrease). Pressing the ON/OFF switch to turns off the fan. Change the airflow mode Press the airflow mode control switch. The airflow mode changes as fol- lows each time the switch is pressed.

1 Upper body 2 Upper body and slightly to

the feet 3 Upper body and feet 4 Feet 5 Feet and the windshield

defogger operates Switching between outside

air and recirculated air modes

Press the outside/recirculated air mode switch. The mode switches between out- side air mode and recirculated air mode each time the switch is oper- ated. When recirculated air mode is selected, the indicator illuminates on the outside/recirculated air mode switch. Set cooling and dehumidifi-

cation function Press the A/C switch. When the function is on, the indica- tor illuminates on the A/C switch.

272 5-1. Using the air conditioning system

Fast cooling function Press the MAX A/C switch. When the switch is turned on, the air conditioning will turn on, the temperature will be set to LO, the fan speed will be set to MAX, the air outlets will be set to upper body, and the air mode will change to recirculated air mode automatically. To turn off fast cooling function and return the previous setting, press the MAX A/C switch again. Suspend function Press the ON/OFF switch. While the air conditioning system is being used, when the ON/OFF switch is pressed, the air condition- ing system will stop and the tem- perature setting display, etc. will turn off. If the ON/OFF switch is pushed and turned on, the air conditioning system will operate in the operating state it was in when turned off. However, if the fast cooling function was operating when the air condi- tioning system was turned off, it will operate in the operating state it was in before the fast cooling function was turned on. Defogging the windshield Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side win- dows. Press the windshield defogger switch. Set the outside/recirculated air mode switch to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (Changes automatically)

To defog the windshield and the side windows quickly, turn the air flow and temperature up. To return to the previous mode, press the windshield defogger switch again when the windshield is defogged. When the windshield defogger switch is on, the indicator illumi- nates on the windshield defogger switch. Defogging the rear window

and outside rear view mir- rors

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors. Press the rear window and out- side rear view mirror defoggers switch. The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 min- utes. When the rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch is on, the indicator illuminates on the rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch.

Fogging up of the windows The windows will easily fog up

when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning A/C on will dehu- midify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.

If you turn A/C off, the windows may fog up more easily.

The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

2735-1. Using the air conditioning system

5

Interior features

When driving on dusty roads Close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake mode be set to outside air mode and the fan speed to any setting except off. Outside/recirculated air mode Setting to the recirculated air

mode temporarily is recom- mended in preventing dirty air from entering the vehicle interior and helping to cool the vehicle when the outside air temperature is high.

Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32F (0C)

The dehumidification function may not operate even when A/C switch is pressed. Ventilation and air conditioning

odors To let fresh air in, set the air condi-

tioning system to the outside air mode.

During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.

To reduce potential odors from occurring:

It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to out- side air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air con- ditioning system is started in auto- matic mode.

When the engine switch is changed to the OFF or ACC posi-

tion from ON, the air inlet mode will automatically change to the outside air mode regardless of whether it is the auto mode or manual mode.

Air conditioning filter P.327 Air conditioning system refrig-

erant A label regarding the refrigerant of

the air conditioning system is attached to the hood at the loca- tion shown in the following illustra- tion.

The meaning of each symbol on the label are as follows:

When continuous operation is set

During continuous operation, the defogger stops operating for 2 min- utes after every 15 minutes of con- tinual operation. Even during the 2 minutes that operation stops, the

Caution

Air conditioning sys- tem

Air conditioning sys- tem lubricant type

Requires registered technician to service air conditioning sys- tem

Flammable refrigerant

274 5-1. Using the air conditioning system

operating light remains illuminated. The rear window defogger will con- tinue to operate in this cycle until it is turned off. Customization Some functions can be customized. (P.400)

1 Press the automatic mode switch.

2 Adjust the temperature set- ting.

3 To stop the operation, press the ON/OFF switch.

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained.

Using automatic mode Fan speed is adjusted automati- cally according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions. Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after the auto- matic mode switch pressed.

Location of air outlets The air outlets and air volume changes according to the selected air flow mode.

WARNING To prevent the windshield

from fogging up Do not use the windshield defog- ger switch during cool air opera- tion in extremely humid weather. The difference between the tem- perature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the wind- shield to fog up, blocking your vision.

When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are operat- ing

Do not touch the outside rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

NOTICE To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.

When repairing/replacing parts of the air conditioning system

Have repair/replacement per- formed by your Toyota dealer. When a part of the air conditioning system, such as the evaporator, is to be replaced, it must be replaced with a new one.

Using automatic mode

Air outlet layout and oper- ations

2755-1. Using the air conditioning system

5

Interior features

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Center

1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down

2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent

Side

1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down

2 Open the vent 3 Close the vent

WARNING To prevent the windshield

defogger from operating improperly

Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defog- ging.

276 5-1. Using the air conditioning system

*: If equipped

Seat heaters Press the switch to warm the seats. The indicator light comes on when

a seat heater is turned on.

1 Rapid heating 2 Normal heating When not in use, put the switch in the neutral position. The indicator will turn off.

The seat heaters can be used when

The engine switch is in ON. When not in use Turn the seat heater off. The indica- tor light goes off.

Seat heaters*

Warm up the seat uphol- stery.

WARNING To prevent minor burn inju-

ries Care should be taken if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with the seats when the heater is on:

Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physi- cally challenged

Persons with sensitive skin

Persons who are fatigued

Persons who have taken alco- hol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

NOTICE To prevent damage to the

seat heaters Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

To prevent battery discharge Do not use the functions when the engine is off.

Operation instructions

WARNING To prevent overheating and

minor burn injuries Observe the following precautions when using the seat heaters.

Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater.

Do not use seat heater more than necessary.

2775-2. Using the interior lights

5

Interior features

5-2.Using the interior lights

Interior lights (P.277) Door courtesy lights (if equipped) Engine switch light

Turns the light on/off

Turns the door position on/off

1 On 2 Off

Illuminated entry system When the door position is on, the lights will automatically turn on/off according to the presence of an

Interior lights list

Location of the interior lights

A

C

Operating the interior lights

278 5-2. Using the interior lights

electronic key, locking/unlocking and opening/closing of the doors, and the engine switch mode. To prevent the battery from

being discharged When the door position is on, if the engine switch is turned off with a door not fully closed and the interior lights remain illuminated, they will automatically be turned off after approximately 20 minutes. Customization Some functions can be customized. (P.400)

NOTICE To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

2795-3. Using the storage features

5

Interior features

5-3.Using the storage features

Bottle holders (P.280) Glove box (P.279) Cup holders/Auxiliary boxes (if equipped) (P.281) Console box (P.280)

Pull up the lever to open the glove box.

List of storage features

Location of the storage features

A

C

D

WARNING Items that should not be left

in the storage spaces Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.

Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into con- tact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

Glove box

280 5-3. Using the storage features

Bottle holders When storing a bottle, close the

cap. The bottle may not be stored

depending on its size or shape.

Opening the lid Push the button

Closing the lid Push the lid toward the center If one side is pushed, the opposite side will move simultaneously.

WARNING Caution while driving Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sud- den swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the items stored inside.

Bottle holders

WARNING Items unsuitable for the bottle

holders Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.

NOTICE Items unsuitable for the bottle

holder Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.

Console box

2815-3. Using the storage features

5

Interior features

Center console (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Console box

WARNING When the console box is not

in use Keep the console box closed when it is not being used. If left open, in the event of sudden braking, etc., stowed items may fly out, possibly leading to an accident.

Cup holders/Auxiliary boxes (if equipped)

WARNING Caution while driving If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

Observe the following precautions when putting items. Failure to do so may cause items to be thrown out in the event of sudden braking or steering. In these cases, the items may interfere with pedal operation or cause driver distrac- tion, resulting in an accident.

Do not store items that can eas- ily shift or roll out.

Do not stack items higher than the edge.

Do not put items that may pro- trude over the edge.

282 5-3. Using the storage features

Lift the luggage mat.

The warning reflector can be stored.

Warning reflector storage box Depending on the size and shape of the warning reflector case, it may not be able to be stored.

Trunk features

Auxiliary box

Warning reflector storage box

WARNING When storing a warning

reflector Make sure that the warning reflec- tor is stored securely. Failure to do so may cause it jump out of position in the event of sud- den braking, etc., causing an acci- dent.

2835-4. Using the other interior features

5

Interior features

5-4.Using the other interior features

Use the USB terminal to use or charge an electronic device. The USB charging port can be used to supply 2.1 A of electric- ity at 5 V to external devices. Depending on the external device, it may not charge prop- erly. Refer to the manual included with the device before using a USB charging port. Using the USB charging

port Open the console box lid.

The USB charging port can be used when

The engine switch is in ACC or ON. Situations in which the USB

charging port may not operate correctly

If a device which consumes more than 2.1 A at 5 V is connected

If a device designed to communi- cate with a personal computer, such as a USB memory device, is connected

If the connected external device is turned off (depending on device)

If the temperature inside the vehi-

cle is high, such as after the vehi- cle has been parked in the sun

About connected external device

Depending on the connected exter- nal device, charging may occasion- ally be suspended and then start again. This is not a malfunction.

Other interior features

USB charging port

NOTICE To prevent damage to the

USB charging ports Do not insert foreign objects into

the ports.

Do not spill water or other liq- uids into the ports.

When the USB charging ports are not in use, close the lids. If a foreign object or liquid enters a port may cause a short circuit.

Do not apply excessive force to or impact the USB charging ports.

Do not disassemble or modify the USB charging ports.

To prevent damage to exter- nal devices

Do not leave external devices in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to an external device.

Do not push down on or apply unnecessary force to an exter- nal device or the cable of an external device while it is con- nected.

To prevent battery discharge Do not use the USB charging port for a long period of time with the engine stopped.

284 5-4. Using the other interior features

The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on 10 A or less. Open the glove box lid and open the lid.

The power outlet can be used when

The engine switch is in ACC or ON. When turning the engine switch

off Disconnect electrical devices with charging functions, such as mobile battery packs. If such devices are left connected, the engine switch may not be turned off normally.

1 To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.

2 To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.

Open the cover to use. The vanity light turns on. (if equipped)

Power outlets

NOTICE To prevent the fuse from

being blown Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.

To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.

To prevent the battery from being discharged

Do not use the power outlet lon- ger than necessary when the engine is not running.

Sun visors

Vanity mirrors

2855-4. Using the other interior features

5

Interior features

NOTICE To prevent the battery from

being discharged Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is stopped.

286 5-4. Using the other interior features

287

6

6

M aintenance and care

Maintenance and care

.

6-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior .......... 288

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior ........... 291

Cleaning and protecting the Ultrasuedearea ....... 293

6-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements

.................................. 295 General maintenance.. 296 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) pro- grams ........................ 299

6-3. Do-it-yourself mainte- nance

Do-it-yourself service pre- cautions..................... 300

Hood ........................... 302 Positioning a floor jack

.................................. 303 Engine compartment... 305 Tires ............................ 312 Replacing the tire ........ 319 Tire inflation pressure.. 324 Wheels ........................ 326 Air conditioning filter.... 327 Electronic key battery.. 329 Checking and replacing fuses.......................... 331

Headlight aim .............. 333

Light bulbs................... 334

288 6-1. Maintenance and care 6-1.Maintenance and care

Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

If very dirty, use a car wash soap that does not contain abrasives and then thor- oughly rinse with water.

Wipe away any water. Wax the vehicle when the

waterproof coating deterio- rates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehi- cle body is cool.

Automatic car washes Fold the mirrors before washing

the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.

Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface, parts (wheel, etc.) and harm your vehicles paint.

High pressure car washes As water may enter the cabin, do not bring the nozzle tip near the gaps around the doors or perimeter of the windows, or spray these areas continuously. When using a car wash If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction pro- cedures to wash the vehicle: Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2

m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

Set the electronic key to bat- tery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (P.111)

Wheels and wheel ornaments Remove any dirt immediately by

using a neutral detergent. Wash detergent off with water

immediately after use. To protect the paint from damage,

make sure to observe the follow- ing precautions.

Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent

Do not use hard brushes Do not use detergent on the

wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather

Wheels and wheel ornaments (vehicles with matte painted wheels)

As matte painted wheels require dif- ferent cleaning methods than con- ventional wheels, be sure to observe the following. For details, consult your Toyota dealer. Remove dirt using water. If the

wheels are excessively dirty, use a sponge or soft cloth dampened with a diluted neutral detergent to remove the dirt.

Cleaning and protect- ing the vehicle exte- rior

Perform cleaning in a man- ner appropriate to each component and its material.

Cleaning instructions

2896-1. Maintenance and care

6

M aintenance and care

To protect the matte paint from damage, make sure to observe the following precautions.

Do not scrub or polish the wheels using a brush or dry cloth

Do not use any wheel coatings or abrasive detergents

Brake pads and calipers Rust may form if the vehicle is parked with wet brake pads or disc rotors, causing them to stick. Before parking the vehicle after it is washed, drive slowly and apply the brakes several times to dry the parts. Bumpers Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. Plated portions If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as follows: Use a soft cloth dampened with an

approximately 5% solution of neu- tral detergent and water to clean the dirt off.

Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.

To remove oily deposits, use alco- hol wet wipes or a similar product.

WARNING When washing the vehicle Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical com- ponents, etc. to catch fire.

Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes and diffusers until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers can cause burns.

Precaution regarding the rear bumper

If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the follow- ing systems may not function cor- rectly. If this occurs, consult your Toyota dealer.

BSD/RCTA (if equipped)

RAB (if equipped)

NOTICE To prevent paint deteriora-

tion and corrosion on the body and components (alumi- num wheels, etc.)

Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

After driving near the sea coast

After driving on salted roads

If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface

If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface

After driving in an area contami- nated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chem- ical substances

If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud

If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

To prevent the wheels from cor- roding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humid- ity when storing the wheels.

290 6-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE Protective film for side sill

plates (if equipped) Make sure to remove the protec- tive film. Failure to do so may cause rust, depending on condi- tions.

Cleaning the exterior lights Wash carefully. Do not use

organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

Do not apply wax to the sur- faces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms

When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.

When using a high pressure car wash

When washing the vehicle, do not spray the camera or its sur- rounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.

Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manu- factured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water.

Traction related parts

Suspension parts

Steering parts

Brake parts

Keep the cleaning nozzle at least 11.9 in. (30 cm) away from the vehicle body. Otherwise resin section, such as moldings and bumpers, may be deformed and damaged.

Also, do not continuously hold the nozzle in the same place.

Do not spray the lower part of the windshield continuously.

If water enters the air conditioning system intake located near the lower part of the windshield, the air conditioning system may not operate correctly.

Do not wash the underside of the vehicle using a high pres- sure car washer.

2916-1. Maintenance and care

6

M aintenance and care

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth damp- ened with lukewarm water.

If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral deter- gent diluted to approximately 1%.

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

Shampooing the carpets There are several commercial foam- ing-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Handling the seat belts Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts. Meter visor Do not place anything on top of meter visor. The color of the meter visor may transfer.

Cleaning and protect- ing the vehicle interior

Perform cleaning in a man- ner appropriate to each component and its material.

Protecting the vehicle interior

WARNING Water in the vehicle Do not splash or spill liquid in

the vehicle. Doing so may cause electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

Do not get any of the SRS com- ponents or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (P.27)

An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

Cleaning the interior (espe- cially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the drivers view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE Cleaning detergents Do not use the following types

of detergent, as they may dis- color the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:

Non-seat portions: Organic sub- stances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solu- tions, dye, and bleach

Seats: Alkaline or acidic solu- tions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panels or other interior parts painted surface may be damaged.

292 6-1. Maintenance and care

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth damp- ened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent. Wring out any excess water

from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces

NOTICE Do not use a chemical agent

containing silicone (highly-polymerized silicon com- pound) when cleaning any of the electrical appliances such as the air conditioning, all switches and their surrounding areas. If silicon (highly-polymerized sil- icon compound) contacts these components, it may cause the electrical appliances to malfunc- tion.

Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deteriora- tion of leather surfaces:

Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.

Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended peri- ods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up signifi- cantly.

Water on the floor Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

When cleaning the inside of the windshield

Do not allow glass cleaner to con- tact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens. (P.174)

Cleaning the inside of the rear window

Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the win- dow in strokes running parallel to the heater wires.

Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.

When cleaning the instrument panel

When small grains of sand and so forth have gotten into instrument panels surface and cannot be wiped away using a cloth, use a clay bar without adding water. Forcibly trying to wipe the surface clean with a brush or sponge may scratch the surface or fragments of the cloth may be left in the sur- face.

Cleaning the leather areas

2936-1. Maintenance and care

6

M aintenance and care

of detergent. Wipe the surface with a dry,

soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Caring for leather areas Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicles interior.

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral deter- gent diluted to approximately 1%.

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

*: If equipped *: Ultrasuede is a registered trade-

mark of Toray Industries, Inc.

Periodic cleaning once a month is recommended.

1 Wipe the entire Ultrasuede area with a soft cloth that has been dampened with luke- warm water (approximately 104F [40C]) and squeezed out.

Do not wipe too hard. Doing so may make the Ultrasuede upholstery surface become uneven. Also, only use a clean cloth. 2 Once dry, brush the area with

a soft brush.

Removing stuck-on dirt If fluff is attached to your clothes, etc. remove it by brushing it off with a soft brush. If this does not remove the fluff, remove it using adhesive

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

Cleaning and protect- ing the Ultra- suedearea*

Perform cleaning in a man- ner appropriate to each component and its material.

Day-to-day cleaning

NOTICE When cleaning the Ultra-

suede surfaces As Ultrasuede is a suede-like product, do not brush it strongly. Doing so may cause fluff or pilling.

294 6-1. Maintenance and care

tape.

If liquid is spilled, lightly pat the area with a tissue paper or similar to soak up the liquid.

When mud, coffee, etc., has dried on the Ultrasuede upholstery, remove it by lightly brushing the area with a soft brush or similar.

We recommend using a vacuum cleaner to clean up the area after the above has been performed. When a stain cannot be removed using the above proce- dures, remove it by performing the following: 1 Lightly wipe the stained area

from the outside to the inside from multiple angles with a soft cloth that has been dampened with lukewarm water (approximately 104F [40C]) and squeezed out.

Do not wipe too hard. Doing so may make the Ultrasuede upholstery surface become uneven. Also, only use a clean cloth.

2 If the Ultrasuede upholstery surface becomes uneven, lightly brush it with a soft brush.

3 Allow the surface to dry com- pletely.

You will need the following items: A cloth that has been damp-

ened with benzene A dry cloth 1 Using a dry cloth or tissue

paper, wipe away as much of the oil as possible to prevent the stained area from expanding.

2 After patting the area from the outside to the inside from multiple angles using the cloth dampened with ben- zene, soak up the oil and benzene that floats up by pat- ting the area with a dry cloth.

3 If the Ultrasuede upholstery surface becomes uneven, lightly brush it with a soft brush.

Liquid stains

NOTICE When soaking up spilled liq-

uids Do not press down too firmly with the cloth, tissue paper etc., as doing so may cause the liquid to further penetrate the material, making soaking up the liquid more difficult.

Oily stains

2956-2. Maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

6-2.Maintenance

Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each sys- tem. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty cover- age. Allow inspection and repairs to

be performed by a Toyota dealer

Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest ser- vice information. They are well informed about the operation of all systems on your vehicle.

Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under war- ranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.

General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified inter- vals according to the mainte- nance schedule. For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.

Maintenance require- ments

To ensure safe and econom- ical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owners responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the maintenance below.

WARNING If your vehicle is not properly

maintained Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or seri- ous injury.

Handling of the battery Engine exhaust, some of its

constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components con- tain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste pro- duced by component wear con- tain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after han- dling. (P.309)

General maintenance

Scheduled maintenance

296 6-2. Maintenance

You can perform some mainte- nance procedures by yourself. Please be aware that do-it-your- self maintenance may affect warranty coverage. The use of Toyota repair manuals is recommended. For details about warranty cover- age, refer to the separate Owners Warranty Information Booklet or Owners Manual Supplement.

Do-it-yourself mainte- nance

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the Owners Warranty Informa- tion Booklet or Owners Manual Supplement/Sched- uled Maintenance Guide. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

WARNING If the engine is running Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

Engine compartment

Items Check points

Battery Check the connec- tions. (P.309)

Brake fluid/Clutch fluid

Is the brake fluid and clutch fluid at the correct level? (P.308)

Engine coolant Is the engine cool- ant at the correct level? (P.307)

Engine oil Is the engine oil at the correct level? (P.305)

2976-2. Maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

Exhaust sys- tem

There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.

Radiator/con- denser

The radiator and condenser should be free from for- eign objects. (P.308)

Washer fluid Is there sufficient washer fluid? (P.311)

Vehicle interior

Items Check points

Accelerator pedal

The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).

Automatic transmission Park mecha- nism

When parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?

Brake pedal

Does the brake pedal move smoothly?

Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?

Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play?

Items Check points

Brakes

The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.

The brakes should work effectively.

The brake pedal should not feel spongy.

The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.

Clutch pedal

Does the clutch pedal move smoothly?

Does the clutch pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?

Does the clutch pedal have the correct amount of free play?

Head restraints

Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?

Indica- tors/buzzers

Do the indica- tors and buzzers function prop- erly?

Lights Do all the lights come on?

Items Check points

298 6-2. Maintenance

Parking brake

Does the park- ing brake move smoothly?

When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?

Seat belts

Do the seat belts operate smoothly?

The seat belts should not be damaged.

Seats Do the seat con-

trols operate properly?

Steering wheel

Does the steer- ing wheel rotate smoothly?

Does the steer- ing wheel have the correct amount of free play?

There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steer- ing wheel.

Items Check points Vehicle exterior

Items Check points

Doors/trunk Do the

doors/trunk oper- ate smoothly?

Engine hood Does the engine

hood lock system work properly?

Fluid leaks

There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.

Tires

Is the tire infla- tion pressure correct?

The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn.

Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?

The wheel nuts should not be loose.

Windshield wipers

The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, split- ting, wear, con- tamination or deformation.

The wiper blades should clear the windshield with- out streaking or skipping.

2996-2. Maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

The OBD system determines that a problem exists some- where in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

When the battery is discon- nected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set. When the fuel tank cap is

loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The error code in the OBD sys- tem will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-test- ing.

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection pro- grams which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control sys- tem.

If the malfunction indica- tor lamp comes on

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the follow- ing situations:

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

300 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 6-3.Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to fol- low the correct procedure as given in these sections.

Maintenance

Items Parts and tools

Battery condi- tion (P.309)

Warm water Baking soda Grease Conventional

wrench (for ter- minal clamp bolts)

Brake fluid and Clutch fluid level (P.308)

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid and clutch fluid)

Engine cool- ant level(P.307)

TOYOTA Genu- ine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life Cool- ant BLUE or a similar high qual- ity ethylene gly- col-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate cool- ant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

For the U.S.A.: TOYOTA Genu- ine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life Cool- ant BLUE is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.

For Canada: TOYOTA Genu- ine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life Cool- ant BLUE is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.

Funnel (used only for adding coolant)

Items Parts and tools

3016-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

Engine oil level (P.305)

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

Fuses (P.331)

Fuse with same amperage rating as original

Light bulbs (P.334)

Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original

Phillips-head screwdriver

Flathead screw- driver

Radiator and condenser (P.308)

Tire inflation pressure (P.324)

Tire pressure gauge

Compressed air source

Washer fluid (P.311)

Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

Items Parts and tools WARNING The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions.

When working on the engine compartment

Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fans and engine drive belt.

Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust mani- fold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compart- ment.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It con- tains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

When working near the elec- tric cooling fans or radiator grille

Be sure the engine switch is off. With the engine switch in ON, the electric cooling fans may auto- matically start to run if the air con- ditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P.308)

Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.

302 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

1 Pull the hood lock release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

2 Push the auxiliary catch lever to the left and lift the hood.

3 Hold the hood open by insert- ing the support rod into the slot.

NOTICE If you remove the air cleaner

filter Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air.

Hood

Opening the hood

3036-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

Front

WARNING Pre-driving check Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or seri- ous injury.

NOTICE When opening the hood Do not lift up or operate the wip-

ers. Doing so may cause the hood and wipers to contact, scratching the hood.

Use caution when opening the hood in windy weather as it may close suddenly in strong wind.

Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota prod- ucts to the hood. Such addi- tional weight on the hood may cause it to be too heavy to be supported by the supporting rod when opened.

When closing the hood Do not apply excessive weight or force when closing the hood as doing so may result in damage.

Positioning a floor jack

When using a floor jack, fol- low the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the opera- tion safely. When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

Location of the jack point

304 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Rear

3056-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

Fuse boxes (P.331) Battery (P.309) Engine oil level dipstick (P.305) Clutch fluid reservoir (P.308) Engine oil filler cap (P.305) Brake fluid reservoir (P.308) Washer fluid tank (P.311) Electric cooling fans Condenser (P.308) Radiator (P.308) Engine coolant reservoir (P.307)

With the engine at operating

temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dip- stick.

Engine compartment

Components

A

C

D

Checking and adding the engine oil

306 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking the engine oil 1 Park the vehicle on level

ground. After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bot- tom of the engine.

2 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

3 Wipe the dipstick clean. 4 Reinsert the dipstick fully. 5 Holding a rag under the end,

pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

When checking the oil, look at both sides of the dipstick and use the lower measurement to determine the level of oil. 6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert

it fully.

Low

Full Checking the oil type and

preparing the item needed Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil. Engine oil selection P.382

Oil quantity (Low Full) 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.)

Item Clean funnel

Adding engine oil If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

2 Add engine oil slowly, check- ing the dipstick.

3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

Engine oil consumption A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consump- tion may increase, and engine oil A

3076-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals. When the engine is new, for

example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine

If low quality oil or oil of an inap- propriate viscosity is used

When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently

When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving fre- quently through heavy traffic

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the FULL and LOW lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold. Engine coolant reservoir

Reservoir cap FULL line LOW line

If the level is on or below the LOW line, add coolant up to the FULL line. (P.374)

Coolant selection Only use TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life Coolant BLUE or a similar high quality eth- ylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life

WARNING Used engine oil Used engine oil contains poten-

tially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recy- cling or disposal.

Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE To prevent serious engine

damage Check the oil level on a regular basis.

When replacing the engine oil Be careful not to spill engine oil

on the vehicle components.

Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

Check the oil level on the dip- stick every time you refill the vehicle.

Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

Checking the coolant

A

C

308 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

hybrid organic acid technology. U.S.A.: TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life Coolant BLUE is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum tem- perature: -31F [-35C]) Canada: TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life Coolant BLUE is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum tem- perature: -44F [-42C]) For more details about coolant, con- tact your Toyota dealer. If the coolant level drops within

a short time of replenishing Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling sys- tem.

Check the radiator and con- denser and clear away any for- eign objects. If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Checking fluid level The brake fluid and clutch fluid level should be between the MAX and MIN lines on the tank.

WARNING When the engine is hot Do not remove the engine coolant reservoir cap. (P.376) The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot cool- ant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE When adding coolant Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

If you spill coolant Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

Checking the radiator and condenser

WARNING When the engine is hot Do not touch the radiator or con- denser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

Checking and adding the brake fluid and clutch fluid

3096-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

Brake fluid

Clutch fluid

Adding fluid Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item. Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 Item Clean funnel

Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of brak- ing efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

Check the battery as follows. Battery exterior Make sure that the battery termi- nals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Hold-down clamp Terminals

WARNING When filling the reservoir Take care as brake fluid and clutch fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE If the fluid level is low or high It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

Battery

A

310 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking battery fluid Check that the level is between the UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL lines.

UPPER LEVEL line LOWER LEVEL line

If the fluid level is at or below the LOWER LEVEL line, add distilled water. Adding distilled water 1 Remove the vent plug. 2 Add distilled water.

If the UPPER LEVEL line cannot be seen, check the fluid level by looking directly at the cell. 3 Put the vent plug back on

and close it securely.

Before recharging When recharging, the battery pro- duces hydrogen gas which is flam- mable and explosive. Therefore,

observe the following before recharging: If recharging with the battery

installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

After recharging/reconnecting the battery

The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the sys- tem. 1 Shift the shift lever to P (auto-

matic transmission) or depress the brake pedal with the shift lever in N (manual transmission).

2 Open and close either door. 3 Restart the engine. Unlocking the doors using the

smart key system may not be pos- sible immediately after reconnect- ing the battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.

Start the engine with the engine switch in ACC. The engine may not start with the engine switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from the sec- ond attempt.

The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the bat- tery is disconnected and recon- nected, the vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was dis- connected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnecting the battery. Take extra care when connecting the battery if the engine switch mode prior to the battery being disconnected is unknown.

If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toy- ota dealer.

A

3116-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

If the washer fluid level is at LOW, add washer fluid.

Using the gauge The washer fluid level can be checked by observing the position of the level on the liquid-covered holes in the gauge. If the level falls below the second hole from the bot-

WARNING Chemicals in the battery Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precau- tions while working on or near the battery:

Do not cause sparks by touch- ing the battery terminals with tools.

Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

Never inhale or swallow electro- lyte.

Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

Keep children away from the battery.

Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the bat- tery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventila- tion.

Emergency measures regard- ing electrolyte

If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while trav- eling to the nearest medical facil- ity.

If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thor- oughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

If you accidentally swallow elec- trolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

NOTICE When recharging the battery Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Adding the washer fluid

312 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

tom (the LOW position), refill the washer fluid.

Current fluid level Check if the treadwear indica- tors are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread. Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

New tread Worn tread Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a TWI or mark,

WARNING When adding washer fluid Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine, etc.

NOTICE Do not use any fluid other

than washer fluid Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicles painted surfaces, as well as damaging the pump lead- ing to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.

Diluting washer fluid Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing tempera- tures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

A

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with mainte- nance schedules and tread- wear.

Checking tires

A

C

3136-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire. Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

When to replace your vehicles tires

Tires should be replaced if: The treadwear indicators are

showing on a tire. You have tire damage such as

cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage

A tire goes flat repeatedly or can- not be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult your Toy- ota dealer. Tire life Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious. Low profile tires Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip perfor- mance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions. Maximum load of tire Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure men- tioned on the sidewall of the tire. (P.390)

Tire types Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed perfor- mance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When install- ing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. All season tires All season tires are designed to pro- vide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most win- ter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, how- ever, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in accelera- tion and handling performance com- pared with summer tires in highway driving. Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con- struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow

314 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P.265) If the tread on snow tires wears

down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

WARNING When inspecting or replacing

tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause dam- age to parts of the drivetrain as well as dangerous handling char- acteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or seri- ous injury.

Make sure to install 4 tires that are of the specified size, and that all 4 tires are the same size, same maker, same brand and tread pattern.

Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.

Only use radial tires.

Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle. Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previ- ously.

NOTICE Low profile tires Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:

Be sure to use proper tire infla- tion pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely.

Avoid potholes, uneven pave- ment, curbs and other road haz- ards. Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel dam- age.

If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

Driving on rough roads Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicles wheels and body.

Tire rotation

3156-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

Front To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. The tire pressure detected by

the tire pressure warning sys- tem can be displayed on the multi-information display.

If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a

screen display and a warning light. (P.354)

Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks. Tire inflation pressure It may take a few minutes to dis-

play the tire inflation pressure after the engine switch is turned to ON. It may also take a few min- utes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.

Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.

Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly

In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used.

A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.

A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.

Tire chains, etc. are equipped. An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire

Tire pressure warning system

A

316 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

is equipped. If a window tint that affects the

radio wave signals is installed. If there is a lot of snow or ice on

the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings.

If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the speci- fied level.

If tires not equipped with tire pres- sure warning valves and transmit- ters are used.

If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.

Performance may be affected in the following situations.

When driving near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

If tire position information is not cor- rectly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions. When the vehicle is parked, the

time taken for the warning to start or go off could be extended.

When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not function.

Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system

The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accordance with driving conditions. For this reason, the system may give a warning even if the tire pres- sure does not reach a low enough level, or if the pressure is higher than the pressure that was adjusted to when the system was initialized.

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed. When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (P.318)

Replacing tires and wheels If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.

Installing tire pressure warning valves and trans- mitters

NOTICE Repairing or replacing tires,

wheels, tire pressure warn- ing valves, transmitters and tire valve caps

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmit- ters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled cor- rectly.

3176-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circum- stances:

When rotating the tires. When the tire inflation pres-

sure is changed such as when changing traveling speed.

When changing the tire size. When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch off.

Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving. 2 Adjust the tire inflation pres-

sure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level.

Make sure to adjust the tire pres- sure to the specified cold tire infla- tion pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will oper- ate based on this pressure level. 3 Turn the engine switch to

ON. 4 Press and hold the tire pres-

sure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times.

5 Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch ON and

NOTICE Make sure to install the tire

valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves could be bound.

When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.

To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warn- ing valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid seal- ant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. After use of liquid sealant, make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when repair- ing or replacing the tire. (P.316)

Initializing the tire pres- sure warning system

318 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

then turn the engine switch off.

If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch acciden- tally

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again. Initialization procedure Make sure to carry out initializa-

tion after adjusting the tire inflation pressure. Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment.

If you have accidentally turned the engine switch off during initializa- tion, it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initializa- tion will restart automatically when the engine switch has been turned to ON for the next time.

If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and con- duct initialization again.

When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the follow- ing cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pres- sure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. When operating the tire pressure

warning reset switch, tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.

After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warn- ing light blinks for 1 minute then

stays on after driving for 20 min- utes.

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replac- ing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Toy- ota dealer.

Registering ID codes The ID codes of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters for two sets of wheels can be regis- tered. It is not necessary to register the ID codes when replacing normal tires with snow tires, if the ID codes for the wheels of both normal tires and snow tires are registered before- hand. In addition to the set of tire pressure warning system sensor ID codes ini- tially registered to the vehicle, a sec- ond set of ID codes can be registered. A second set of tire pressure warn- ing system sensor ID codes can be registered at your Toyota dealer.

WARNING When initializing the tire pres-

sure warning system Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pres- sure to the specified level. Other- wise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire infla- tion pressure is actually normal.

Registering ID codes

3196-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

When 2 sets of ID codes have been registered, either ID code set can be selected.

1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch to ON.

2 Press the tire pressure warn- ing reset switch 3 times within 3 seconds.

3 The tire pressure warning light will illuminate for 3 sec- onds and then blink 3 times.

4 The tire pressure warning light will blink for 1 minute and then illuminate.

5 When the ID code change has completed, the tire pres- sure warning light will turn off.

Check that tire pressures are dis- played on the multi-information dis- play.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.

Set the parking brake. Shift the shift lever to P (auto-

matic transmission) or R (manual transmission).

Stop the engine.

Jack and Jack handle As your vehicle is equipped with an emergency tire puncture repair kit, a jack and jack handle for replacing a tire are not included with your vehi- cle. To purchase a jack and jack handle, contact your Toyota dealer. Jack Jack handle

Changing the ID code set

Replacing the tire

When raising your vehicle with a jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury. If necessary tire replace- ment seems difficult to per- form, contact your Toyota dealer.

Before jacking up the vehicle

320 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Towing eyelet Screwdriver Jack handle (if equipped) Wheel nut wrench Jack (if equipped)

Location of the jack and tools

A

C

D

WARNING Using the tire jack Observe the following precau- tions. Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury.

Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.

Do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.

Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is sup- ported by the jack.

Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.

Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.

When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

Use a jack stand if it is neces- sary to get under the vehicle.

3216-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

1 Chock the tires.

2 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).

3 Turn the tire jack portion by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

4 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

5 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid

WARNING When lowering the vehicle,

make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.

Removing a tire

Flat tire Wheel chock positions

Front left-hand side

Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Front right-hand side

Behind the rear left-hand side tire

Rear left-hand side

In front of the front right-hand side tire

Rear right-hand side

In front of the front left-hand side tire

A

322 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

scratching the wheel surface.

1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel con- tact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.

2 Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

Turn the wheel nuts until the wash- ers come into contact with the disc wheel.

Tapered portion Disc wheel

3 Lower the vehicle.

4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustra- tion.

Tightening torque:

WARNING Replacing a flat tire Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes imme- diately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

Installing the tire

A

3236-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

89 ftlbf (120 Nm, 12.2 kgfm)

5 Stow the jack and all tools.

WARNING When installing the tire Failure to follow these precau- tions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tight- ened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 89 ftlbf (120 Nm, 12.2 kgfm) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

Do not attach a heavily dam- aged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehi- cle is moving.

When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been spe- cifically designed for that wheel.

If there are any cracks or defor- mations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

324 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P.386)

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge 1 Remove the tire valve cap. 2 Press the tip of the tire pres-

sure gauge onto the tire valve.

3 Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.

4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.

5 After completing the tire infla- tion pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

6 Put the tire valve cap back on.

Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pres- sure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Effects of incorrect tire inflation

pressure Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: Reduced fuel economy Reduced driving comfort and poor

handling Reduced tire life due to wear Reduced safety Damage to the drivetrain If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

Tire inflation pressure

Checking the specified tire inflation pressure

Inspection and adjust- ment procedure

A

3256-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pres- sure, observe the following: Check only when the tires are

cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

Always use a tire pressure gauge. It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.

It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.

Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehi- cle is balanced.

WARNING Proper inflation is critical to

save tire performance Keep your tires properly inflated. If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or seri- ous injury:

Excessive wear

Uneven wear

Poor handling

Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

Air leaking from between tire and wheel

Wheel deformation and/or tire damage

Greater possibility of tire dam- age while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges on the road, etc.)

NOTICE When inspecting and adjust-

ing tire inflation pressure Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on. If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

326 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diam- eter, rim width and inset*. Replacement wheels are avail- able at your Toyota dealer. *: Conventionally referred to as off-

set. Toyota does not recommend using the following: Wheels of different sizes or

types Used wheels Bent wheels that have been

straightened

When replacing wheels The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pres- sure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P.316)

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

Wheel selection

WARNING When replacing wheels Do not use wheels that are a dif-

ferent size from those recom- mended in the Owners Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.

Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

When installing the wheel nuts

Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, lead- ing to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, caus- ing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Use of defective wheels pro- hibited

Do not use cracked or deformed wheels. Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, pos- sibly causing an accident.

NOTICE Replacing tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters Because tire repair or replace-

ment may affect the tire pres- sure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmit- ters at your Toyota dealer.

3276-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.

When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

Use only Toyota genuine bal- ance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber ham- mer when balancing your wheels.

1 Turn the engine switch off. 2 Open the glove box. Slide off

the damper.

3 Push in each side of the glove box and pull the glove box toward you to disconnect the claws.

4 Lower the glove box slowly until surface ( ) is horizontal with the floor, then pull it out. (Simply pulling with gentle

NOTICE Ensure that only genuine Toyota

wheels are used on your vehi- cle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

Aluminum wheel precau- tions

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

Removing the air condi- tioning filter

A

328 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

force will disengage the lower claws.)

Do not forcibly pull the glove box. Otherwise, the lower claws ( ) or the lower claw engagement points ( ) may be deformed, making it difficult to reinstall or close the glove box.

5 Remove the filter cover.

6 Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.

The UP marks shown on the filter and the filter case should be pointing up.

7 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

Checking interval Inspect and replace the air condi- tioning filter according to the mainte- nance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the Owners Manual Supplement or Scheduled Mainte- nance.) If air flow from the vents

decreases dramatically The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

B

C

NOTICE When removing the glove box Do not forcibly pull the glove box. Otherwise, the lower claws or the lower claw engagement points may be deformed, making it diffi- cult to reinstall or close the glove box.

When using the air condition- ing system

Make sure that a filter is always installed. Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

3296-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

If the electronic key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur: The smart key system and wire-

less remote control will not func- tion properly.

The operational range will be reduced.

Flathead screwdriver Lithium battery CR2032

Use a CR2032 lithium battery Batteries can be purchased at

your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

Dispose of used batteries accord- ing to local laws.

1 Take out the mechanical key.

2 Insert the tip of a flathead screwdriver into the groove ( ) and remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the flathead screw- driver with a rag.

3 Remove the depleted battery. To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the flathead screw- driver with a rag.

Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted. As the key may be damaged if the following procedure is not performed properly, it is recommended that key bat- tery replacement be per- formed by your Toyota dealer.

Items to prepare

Replacing the battery

A

330 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4 Install a new battery with the + terminal facing up, as shown in the illustration.

5 Align the protruding part with the slot and install the cover.

WARNING Battery precautions Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Do not swallow the battery. Doing so may cause chemical burns.

A coin battery or button battery is used in the electronic key. If a battery is swallowed, it may cause severe chemical burns in as little as 2 hours and may result in death or serious injury.

Keep away new and removed batteries from children.

If the cover cannot be firmly closed, stop using the electronic key and stow the key in the place where children cannot reach, and then contact your Toyota dealer.

If you accidentally swallow a battery or put a battery into a part of your body, get emer- gency medical attention imme- diately.

To prevent battery explosion or leakage of flammable liq- uid or gas

Replace the battery with a new battery of the same type. If a wrong type of battery is used, it may explode.

Do not expose batteries to extremely low pressure due to high altitude or extremely high temperatures.

Do not burn, break or cut a bat- tery.

NOTICE For normal operation after

replacing the battery Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.

Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

3316-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

1 Turn the engine switch off. 2 Open the fuse box cover. Engine compartment Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Instrument panel Remove the lid.

3 Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.

Only type A fuses can be removed

using the pullout tool.

4 Check if the fuse is blown. Type A and B: Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. Type C: Contact your Toyota dealer. Type A

Normal fuse Blown fuse

Type B

Normal fuse

Checking and replac- ing fuses

If any of the electrical com- ponents do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Checking and replacing fuses

A

A

332 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Blown fuse Type C

Normal fuse Blown fuse

After a fuse is replaced If the lights do not turn on even

after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement.

If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If there is an overload in a cir- cuit

The fuses are designed to blow, pro- tecting the wiring harness from damage. When replacing light bulbs Toyota recommends that you use genuine Toyota products designed for this vehicle. Because certain bulbs are con- nected to circuits designed to pre- vent overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.

A

WARNING To prevent system break-

downs and vehicle fire Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause dam- age to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indi- cated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.

Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE Before replacing fuses Have the cause of electrical over- load determined and repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

3336-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

Adjustment bolt A Adjustment bolt B

Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gasoline and the area around the headlight is not deformed.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Make sure the tire inflation pressure is at the specified level.

Have someone sit in the drivers seat.

Bounce the vehicle several times.

1 Using a Phillips-head screw- driver, turn bolt A in either direction.

Remember the turning direction and the number of turns.

2 Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1.

If the headlight cannot be adjusted using this procedure, take the vehi- cle to your Toyota dealer to adjust the headlight aim.

Headlight aim

Vertical movement adjust- ing bolts

Before checking the head- light aim

A

Adjusting the headlight aim

334 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P.387)

Back-up light Bulbs that need to be

replaced by your Toyota dealer

Headlights Parking lights/daytime run-

ning lights Front turn signal lights Side marker lights Stop/tail lights

Rear turn signal lights High mounted stoplight License plate lights Door courtesy lights (if

equipped)

LED light bulbs The lights other than the back-up light each consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced. Condensation build-up on the

inside of the lens Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situa- tions: Large drops of water have built up

on the inside of the lens. Water has built up inside the

headlight. When replacing light bulbs P.332

Back-up light 1 Remove the clips. To prevent damage to the vehicle, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Light bulbs

You may replace the follow- ing bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replace- ment varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.

Preparing for light bulb replacement

Bulb locations

A

Replacing light bulbs

3356-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

6

M aintenance and care

2 Pull the cover to disengage each claw and remove it.

3 Turn the bulb base counter- clockwise.

4 Remove the light bulb.

5 Install a new light bulb then install the bulb base to the light unit by inserting it and

turning the bulb base clock- wise.

6 Install the cover. Align the cover with the claws on the vehicle and push the cover toward the front of the vehicle to engage each claw and install it.

7 Install the clips.

336 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING Replacing light bulbs Turn off the lights. Do not

attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb. Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Fail- ure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the light unit. This may damage the lights or cause condensa- tion to build up on the lens.

When changing the back-up lights

Stop the engine and wait until the exhaust pipes and sur- rounding parts have cooled down sufficiently. The lights are located near the exhaust pipe and touching a hot exhaust pipe and surrounding parts can cause burns.

To prevent damage or fire Make sure bulbs are fully

seated and locked.

Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.

337

7

7

W hen trouble arises

When trouble arises

.

7-1. Essential information Emergency flashers .... 338 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency .................................. 338

If the vehicle is submerged or water on the road is ris- ing ............................. 339

7-2. Steps to take in an emer- gency

If your vehicle needs to be towed......................... 341

If you think something is wrong ........................ 346

Fuel pump shut off system .................................. 347

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds .................................. 348

If a warning message is dis- played........................ 357

If you have a flat tire.... 358 If the engine will not start

.................................. 367 If you lose your keys ... 368 If the fuel filler door cannot be opened ................. 369

If the electronic key does not operate properly .. 369

If the vehicle battery is dis- charged ..................... 371

If your vehicle overheats .................................. 374

If the vehicle becomes stuck .................................. 376

338 7-1. Essential information 7-1.Essential information

Press the switch. All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn them off, press the switch once again.

Emergency flashers If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating, the battery may dis- charge.

1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle. 2 Shift the shift lever to N. If the shift lever is shifted to N 3 After slowing down, stop the

vehicle in a safe place by the road.

4 Stop the engine. If the shift lever cannot be

shifted to N 3 Keep depressing the brake

pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.

4 To stop the engine, press and hold the engine switch for 2 consecutive seconds or

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped on the road due to a breakdown, etc.

Operating instructions

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emer- gency

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following proce- dure:

Stopping the vehicle

3397-1. Essential information

7

W hen trouble arises

more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession.

5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

If the door can be opened, open the door and exit the vehicle.

If the door cannot be opened, open the window using the power window switch and ensure an escape route.

If the window can be opened, exit the vehicle through the window.

If the door and window cannot be opened due to the rising water, remain calm, wait until the water level inside the vehicle rises to the point that the water pressure inside of the vehicle equals the water pressure outside of the vehi- cle and then open the door after waiting for the rising water to enter the vehicle, and exit the vehicle. When the

WARNING If the engine has to be turned

off while driving Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as pos- sible before turning off the engine.

If the vehicle is sub- merged or water on the road is rising

This vehicle is not designed to be able to drive on roads that are deeply flooded with water. Do not drive on roads where the roads may be submerged or the water may be rising. It is danger- ous to remain in the vehicle, if it anticipated that the vehi- cle will be flooded or set a drift. Remain calm and fol- low the following.

340 7-1. Essential information

outside water level exceeds half the height of the door, the door cannot be opened from the inside due to water pres- sure.

Water level exceeds the floor When the water level exceeds the floor and time has passed, the elec- trical equipment will get damaged, the power windows will not operate, the engine stop, and the vehicle may not be able to get moving. Using an emergency escape

hammer*

Laminated glass is used in the wind- shield on this vehicle. Laminated glass cannot be shat- tered with an emergency hammer*. Tempered glass is used in the win- dows on this vehicle. *: Contact your Toyota dealer or

aftermarket accessory manufac- turer for further information about an emergency hammer.

WARNING Caution while driving Do not drive on roads where the roads may be submerged or the water may be rising. Otherwise the vehicle may be damaged and cannot move, as well as become flooded and set a drift, which may lead to death.

3417-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

7-2.Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toy- ota dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flat- bed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws. If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck from the front, the vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be in good conditions. (P.342) If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flatbed truck.

WARNING Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

When towing the vehicle Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain and related parts may be damaged or an acci- dent may occur due to a change in direction of the vehicle.

While towing When towing using cables or

chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious dam- age.

Do not turn the engine switch off. There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.

Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing.

342 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service before towing. The engine is running but the

vehicle does not move. The vehicle makes an abnor-

mal sound.

From the front

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. From the rear

WARNING After towing Make sure to remove the towing eyelet. If not removed, the SRS airbags may not deploy correctly if the vehicle is involved in a frontal col- lision, or the fuel pump shutoff system may not operate correctly if involved in a rear collision.

NOTICE To prevent damage to the

vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is off. The steering lock mecha- nism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clear- ance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. With- out adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing

Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.

When towing down a long slope

Use a wheel lift-type or flat bed truck. If a wheel lift-type or flat bed truck is not used, the brakes may over- heat, leading to poor brake perfor- mance.

Situations when it is nec- essary to contact dealers before towing

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

3437-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

When using a flat-bed truck to transport the vehicle, use tire strapping belts. Refer to the owners manual of the flat-bed truck for the tire strapping method. In order to suppress vehicle movement during transporta- tion, set the parking brake and turn the engine switch off.

If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for at most 19 miles (30 km) at under 18 mph (30 km/h). A driver must be in the vehicle to

steer and operate the brakes. The vehicles wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition. For vehicles with an automatic transmission, only the front tow- ing eyelets may be used.

To have your vehicle towed by another vehicle, the towing eye- let must be installed to your vehicle. Install the towing eyelet using the following procedure. 1 Take out the wheel nut

wrench, flathead screwdriver and towing eyelet. (P.359)

2 Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.

To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the

NOTICE Towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.

Using a flatbed truck

Emergency towing

Emergency towing proce- dure

344 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

illustration.

3 Remove the upper cover from the bumper.

When removing the cover, pull it toward the center of the vehicle to remove it.

4 Remove the lower cover from the bumper.

When removing the cover, pull it upward and then outward to

remove it.

5 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.

6 Tighten down the towing eye- let securely using a wheel nut wrench or hard metal bar.

7 Securely attach cables or chains to the towing eyelet.

Take care not to damage the vehi- cle body. 8 Enter the vehicle being towed

and start the engine. If the engine does not start, turn the

3457-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

engine switch to ON. 9 Shift the shift lever to N and

release the parking brake. Vehicles with an automatic trans- mission: When the shift lever can- not be shifted: P.150

Towing eyelet purpose The towing eyelet is to be used to tow your vehicle, not to tow other vehicles. While towing If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult. Wheel nut wrench Wheel nut wrench is installed in trunk. (P.359) Rear towing eyelet If the towing eyelet is installed to the rear, it can be used in an emergency to tow a vehicle lighter than your vehicle on a normal road, using a rope.

When towing another vehicle For vehicles with BSD/RCTA, make sure to turn BSD/RCTA off. As the radar waves will be blocked by the towed vehicle, this system will not operate properly. When installing a towing eyelet

to the rear When installing a towing eyelet to the rear, install it using the following procedure.

1 Take out the wheel nut wrench, flathead screwdriver and towing eyelet. (P.359)

2 Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.

To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illus- tration.

3 Remove the cover from the bumper.

4 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.

5 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench or hard metal bar.

346 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Fluid leaks under the vehicle. (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is nor- mal.)

Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

Engine coolant temperature gauge continually points higher than normal.

Changes in exhaust sound Excessive tire squeal when

cornering Strange noises related to the

suspension system Pinging or other noises

related to the engine

Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly

Appreciable loss of power Vehicle pulls heavily to one

side when braking Vehicle pulls heavily to one

side when driving on a level road

Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the fol- lowing symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Con- tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms

Audible symptoms

Operational symptoms

3477-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the sys- tem is activated. 1 Turn the engine switch to

ACC or OFF. 2 Restart the engine.

Fuel pump shut off system

When the vehicle sustains an impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump shut off system operates to stop supplying fuel in order to minimize fuel leakage.

Restarting the engine

NOTICE Before starting the engine Inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

348 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

High coolant temperature warning light (warning buzzer)

Charging system warning light

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers

Warning light Details/Actions

(U.S.A.) or

(red) (Canada)

Indicates that: The brake fluid level is low; The vacuum pressure system is malfunctioning; or The brake system is malfunctioning This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-

tact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehi- cle may be dangerous.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Handling method (P.374)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicles charging system Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

3497-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

Low engine oil pressure warning light

Malfunction indicator lamp

SRS warning light (warning buzzer)

ABS warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

Warning light Details/Actions

(U.S.A.) or

(Canada)

Indicates a malfunction in: The electronic engine control system; The electronic throttle control system; or The electronic automatic transmission control system (if

equipped) Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in: The SRS airbag system; or The seat belt pretensioner system P.53

Warning light Details/Actions

(U.S.A.) or

(Canada)

Indicates a malfunction in: The ABS; or The brake assist system Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately.

350 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

Slip indicator (warning buzzer)

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light (warning buzzer) (if equipped)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steer- ing) system Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

When illuminated, indicates: Malfunction of the VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system; Malfunction of the TRAC (Traction Control) system; or Malfunction of the hill-start assist control system Depending on the situation, the light may illuminate even when there is no malfunction. It does not indicate a mal- function if the light turns off after a short time. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately. When flashing, indicates: Indicates that the TRAC, VSC or brake LSD function

is operating. Always drive safely. Driving recklessly may lead to an accident. Drive with extra care when the indicator is flashing.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high Stop the vehicle in a safe place and shift the shift

lever to P. If the light goes off after a little while, the vehicle can be driven. If the light does not go off, contact your Toyota dealer.

3517-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

Open door warning light

Low fuel level warning light (warning buzzer)

Drivers and front passengers seat belt reminder light (warn- ing buzzer)*1, 2

*1:The front passengers seat belt reminder light is located on the overhead console.

*2:Drivers seat belt warning buzzer: The drivers seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to ON, the buzzer sounds. If the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer sounds inter- mittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed. Front passengers seat belt warning buzzer: The front passengers seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfas- tened, the buzzer sounds intermittenly for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that a door or the trunk is not fully closed Check that both side doors and the trunk are closed.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 1.8 gal. (7.0 L, 1.5 Imp. gal.) or less Refuel the vehicle.

Warning light Details/Actions

Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts Fasten the seat belt.

If the front passengers seat is occupied, the front passengers seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.

352 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Rear passengers seat belt reminder lights (warning buzzer)*1, 2

*1:This light illuminates on the overhead console. *2:Rear passengers seat belt warning buzzer: The rear passengers seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear pas- senger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfas- tened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time, after the vehicle reaches a certain speed. Conventional cruise control indicator (if equipped)

BSD/RCTA warning light (if equipped) (warning buzzer)

SRH warning light (if equipped) (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts Fasten the seat belt.

If the rear passengers seat is occupied, the rear pas- sengers seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.

Warning light Details/Actions

(yellow)

Indicates a malfunction in the conventional cruise control system Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the BSD/RCTA system Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the SRH function Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately.

3537-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

RAB warning light (if equipped) (warning buzzer)

LED headlight warning light (if equipped) (warning buzzer)

Automatic headlight leveling system warning light (if equipped) (warning buzzer)

Master warning light (warning buzzer)

EyeSight warning light (if equipped) (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the RAB system Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the LED headlights Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction. P.357

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the EyeSight Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately.

354 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Tire pressure warning light (warning buzzer)

Front passenger detection sen- sor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer

If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passen- ger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a pas- senger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following: Is the fuel tank empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately. Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely. The light will go off after several driving trips. If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporar- ily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound. When the tire pressure warning

light comes on Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light. The tire pressure warning light

may come on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by tem- perature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes). Conditions that the tire pres-

sure warning system may not function properly

P.315

Warning light Details/Actions

When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure such as Natural causes (P.354) Flat tire (P.358) Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified

level. The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does not turn off even if the tire infla- tion pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute: Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

3557-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blink- ing for 1 minute

If the tire pressure warning light fre- quently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the engine switch is turned to ON, have it checked by your Toyota dealer. Warning buzzer In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio sound.

WARNING If both the ABS and the brake

system warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toy- ota dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS sys- tem may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy. When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual.

If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle con- trol and result in death or serious injury.

Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immedi- ately.

If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire infla- tion pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, repair the flat tire by using emergency tire puncture repair kit.

Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires dete- riorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

Maintenance of the tires Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufac- turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load infor- mation label], you should deter- mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

356 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning sys- tem) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi- nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- cles handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- nance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-infla- tion has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pres- sure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pres- sure warning system) malfunc- tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pres- sure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi- nated. This sequence will con- tinue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc- tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning sys- tem) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction tell- tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

NOTICE To ensure the tire pressure

warning system operates properly

Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

3577-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

Warning messages The warning messages explained below may differ from the actual messages according to operation conditions and vehicle specifica- tions.

Warning buzzer In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio sound. If Check Owners Manual is

displayed If the following messages are

shown, following the instructions, accordingly.

High Coolant Temperature (P.374)

Transmission Oil Temperature (P.149)

If any of the following messages are shown on the multi-informa- tion display, it may indicate a mal- function. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

EyeSight OFF Headlights Disabled ABS Steering System Vehicle Stability Control Transmission Low Tire Pressure RAB Disabled BSD/RCTA Disabled Keyless Access System Dis-

abled Auto Headlight Leveler Disabled SRH Disabled If any of the following messages

are shown on the multi-informa- tion display, it may indicate a mal- function. Immediately stop the vehicle and contact your Toyota dealer.

Brake System Check Engine SRS Airbag System

If a warning message is displayed

The multi-information dis- play shows warnings of sys- tem malfunctions, incorrectly performed oper- ations, and messages that indicate a need for mainte- nance. When a message is shown, perform the correc- tion procedure appropriate to the message.

Master warning light The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is cur- rently being displayed on the multi-information display.

Multi-information display Follow the instructions of the message on the multi-information display.

A

358 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.

Set the parking brake. Shift the shift lever to P (auto-

matic transmission) or R (manual transmission).

Stop the engine. Turn on the emergency flash-

ers. (P.338) Check the degree of the tire

damage. A tire should only be repaired with the emergency tire punc- ture repair kit if the damage is caused by a nail or screw pass- ing through the tire tread. Do not remove the nail or

screw from the tire. Removing the object may widen the opening and disenable emer- gency repair with the kit.

To avoid sealant leakage, move the vehicle until the area of the puncture, if known, is positioned at the top of the tire.

A flat tire that cannot be repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit

In the following cases, the tire can- not be repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit. Contact your Toyota dealer. When the tire is damaged due to

driving without sufficient air pres- sure

When the tire lost air pressure due to a crack or damage in the tire sidewall

When the tire is visibly separated from the wheel

When the cut or damage to the tread is 0.16 in. (4 mm) long or

If you have a flat tire

Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire, but instead is equipped with an emer- gency tire puncture repair kit. A puncture caused by a nail or screw passing through the tire tread can be repaired temporarily with the emergency tire puncture repair kit.

WARNING If you have a flat tire Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair. Driving with a flat tire may cause a cir- cumferential groove on the side wall. In such a case, the tire may explode when using the emer- gency tire puncture repair kit, resulting in death or serious injury.

Before repairing the vehi- cle

3597-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

more When the wheel is damaged When 2 or more sharp objects,

such as nails or screws, have passed through the tread on a sin-

gle tire When there is more than one hole

or cut in the damaged tire When the sealant has expired

Towing eyelet Screwdriver Emergency tire puncture repair kits Wheel nut wrench

Location of the emergency tire puncture repair kit and tools

A

C

D

360 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Sealant Sticker Quick reference Compressor

Compressor

Compressor switch Hose

Sealant

Hose Valve

Emergency tire puncture repair kit

The sealant has a limited lifespan. The expiry date is marked on the bottle. The sealant should be replaced before the expiry date. Contact your Toyota dealer for replacement.

The sealant stored in the emer-

Emergency tire puncture repair kit components

A

C

D

A A

3617-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

gency tire puncture repair kit can be used only once to temporarily repair a single tire. If the sealant has been used and needs to be purchased, contact your Toyota dealer. The compressor is reus- able.

The sealant can be used when the outside temperature is from -22F (-30C) to 140F (60C).

The kit is exclusively designed for size and type of tires originally installed on your vehicle. Do not use it for tires that a different size than the original ones, or for any other purposes.

If the sealant gets on your clothes, it may stain.

If the sealant adheres to a wheel or the surface of the vehicle body, the stain may not be removable if it is not cleaned at once. Immedi- ately wipe away the sealant with a wet cloth.

During operation of the kit, a loud operation noise is produced. This does not indicate a malfunction.

Do not use the emergency tire puncture repair kit to check or to adjust the tire pressure.

In extremely low temperatures -22F to -4F (-30C to -20C), the viscosity of the sealant increases and the sealant will flow more slowly. In such temperatures, bring the sealant into the vehicle to warm it up before use.

Note for checking the emer- gency tire puncture repair kit

Check the sealant expiry date occa- sionally. The expiry date is shown on the bot- tle. Do not use sealant whose expiry date has already passed. Other- wise, repairs conducted using the emergency tire puncture repair kit may not be performed properly.

1 Remove the luggage mat.

2 Take out the emergency tire puncture repair kits. (P.359)

WARNING Caution while driving Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may cause an accident.

The emergency tire puncture repair kit is made exclusively for your vehicle. Do not use it on other vehicles.

Do not use the emergency tire puncture repair kit for tires that are a different size than the specified ones or for any other purpose. Doing so may cause the tires to not be repaired prop- erly.

Precautions for use of the sealant

Ingesting the sealant is hazard- ous to your health. If you ingest sealant, consume as much water as possible, then immedi- ately consult a doctor.

If sealant gets in eyes or adheres to skin, immediately wash it off with water. If discom- fort persists, consult a doctor.

If a person who is allergic to nat- ural rubber comes in contact the sealant, allergy symptoms may occur.

Taking out the emer- gency tire puncture repair kits

362 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

1 Shake the sealant bottle up and down several times and loosen the hose.

2 Connect the air compressor hose to the valve on the bot- tle.

The sealant may leak if the fitting is not tight enough.

Valve 3 Remove the valve cap from

the valve of the punctured tire.

Valve Cap

4 Connect the sealant bottle hose by threading it on the valve.

The sealant may leak if the fitting is not tight enough.

5 Turn the bottle upside down and tilt the bottle cap into the bottle holder of the air com- pressor.

6 Make sure that the air com- pressor switch is off.

Emergency repair method

A

A

3637-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

7 Connect the compressor power plug to the power out- let.

The engine switch must be in ACC.

Power plug Power outlet

8 To inject the sealant and inflate the tire, turn the com- pressor switch on.

9 Adjust the air pressure to the appropriate level (green zone of the air gauge).

After the compressor starts to oper- ate, the air pressure will temporarily rise to 44 psi (300 kPa, 3.0kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher. After about 30 seconds when all of the sealant is inside the tire, the air pressure will lower, representing the air pressure

in the tire.

10While filling the tire with air, attach the speed limit label on the position shown in the illustration.

11Turn the air compressor power switch off when the air pressure reaches the green zone of the air gauge. Remove the power plug from the accessory power socket.

12With the compressor switch off, disconnect the hose from the valve on the tire and then

A

364 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

pull out the power plug from the power outlet socket.

Some sealant may leak when the hose is removed.

13Install the valve cap onto the valve of the emergency repaired tire.

14Connect the hose of the bot- tle to the valve of the bottle in a circular fashion to avoid leakage of the remaining sealant.

The sealant may stain clothing.

15Stow the kit back in the vehi- cle and drive your vehicle immediately for 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km).

16After driving for 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), pull your vehi-

cle over in a safe place and reconnect the compressor.

17Turn the compressor switch on and wait for several sec- onds, then turn it off. Check the tire inflation pressure.

18If the air pressure is in red zone of the air gauge, the kit did not successfully seal the puncture. In this case, please stop driving and contact your Toyota dealer.

19Taking precautions to avoid sudden braking, sudden

3657-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

acceleration and sharp turns, drive carefully at under 50 mph (80 km/h) to the nearest Toyota dealer that is less than 124 miles (200 km) away for tire repair or replacement.

After a tire is repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter should be replaced.

Even if the tire inflation pressure is at the recommended level, the tire pressure warning light may come on/flash.

WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with

a flat tire Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair. Driving with a flat tire may cause a cir- cumferential groove on the side wall. In such a case, the tire may explode when using a repair kit.

When fixing the flat tire Stop your vehicle in a safe and

flat area.

Do not touch the wheels or the area around the brakes immedi- ately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven, the wheels and the area around the brakes may be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts may result in burns.

Connect the valve and hose securely with the tire installed on the vehicle.

If the hose is not properly con- nected to the valve, air leakage may occur or sealant may be sprayed out.

If the hose comes off the valve while inflating the tire, there is a risk that the hose will move abruptly due to air pressure.

After inflation of the tire has completed, the sealant may splatter when the hose is dis- connected or some air is let out of the tire.

Follow the operation procedure to repair the tire. If the proce- dure is not followed, the sealant may spray out.

Keep back from the tire while it is being repaired, as there is a chance of it bursting while the repair operation is being per- formed. If you notice any cracks or deformation of the tire, turn off the compressor switch and stop the repair operation imme- diately.

The kit may overheat if operated for a long period of time. Do not operate the compressor contin- uously for more than 10 min- utes.

Parts of the kit become hot during operation. Be careful handling the kit during and after operation. Do not touch the metal part around the connect- ing area between the bottle and compressor. It will be extremely hot.

Do not attach the vehicle speed warning sticker to an area other than the one indicated. If the sticker is attached to an area where an SRS airbag is located, such as the pad of the steering wheel, it may prevent the SRS airbag from operating properly.

366 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING Driving to spread the liquid

sealant evenly Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

Drive the vehicle carefully at a low speed. Be especially careful when turning and cornering.

If the vehicle does not drive straight or you feel a pull through the steering wheel, stop the vehicle and check the tire. The tire may have separated from the wheel.

NOTICE When performing an emer-

gency repair Perform the emergency repair

without removing the nail or screw that has punctured the tread of the tire. If the object that has punctured the tire is removed, repair by the emer- gency tire puncture repair kit may not be possible.

The kit is not waterproof. Make sure that the kit is not exposed to water, such as when it is being used in the rain.

Do not put the kit directly onto dusty ground such as sand at the side of the road. If the kit vacuums up dust etc., a mal- function may occur.

Make sure to stand the kit with the bottle vertical. The kit can- not work properly if it is laid on its side.

Handling the emergency tire puncture repair kit

The compressor power source should be 12 V DC suitable for vehicle use. Do not connect the compressor to any other source.

If gasoline splatters on the kit, the kit may deteriorate. Take care not to allow gasoline to contact it.

Store the emergency tire punc- ture repair kit in the trunk. The kit may be thrown around during sudden braking and so forth, damaging the kit.

Place the repair kit in a storage to prevent it from being exposed to dirt or water.

Store the kit in its assigned place out of reach of children.

Do not disassemble or modify the kit. Do not subject parts such as the air pressure indica- tor to impacts. This may cause a malfunction.

To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warn- ing valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid seal- ant is used, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. After use of liquid sealant, make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when repair- ing or replacing the tire. (P.316)

3677-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

One of the following may be the cause of the problem: There may not be sufficient

fuel in the vehicles tank. Refuel the vehicle.

The engine may be flooded. Try to restart the engine again following correct starting pro- cedures. (P.145)

There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer sys- tem. (P.79)

One of the following may be the cause of the problem: The battery may be dis-

charged. (P.371)

The battery terminal connec- tions may be loose or cor- roded. (P.309)

The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as elec- tronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, an interim measure is available to start the engine. (P.367)

One of the following may be the cause of the problem: One or both of the battery ter-

minals may be disconnected. (P.309)

The battery may be dis- charged. (P.371)

There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start

If the engine will not start

If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being fol- lowed (P.145), consider each of the following points:

The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates normally.

The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.

The starter motor does not turn over

The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

Emergency start function

368 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

the engine if the engine switch is functioning normally: 1 Set the parking brake. 2 Shift the shift lever to P (auto-

matic transmission) or N (manual transmission).

3 Turn the engine switch to ACC.

4 Press and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunction- ing. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If you lose your keys

New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using another mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

NOTICE When an electronic key is lost If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that were provided with your vehicle.

3697-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

Remove the access cover at the rightside of the trunk trim.

Push the yellow lever to unlock the fuel filler lid.

When the electronic key does not work properly

Make sure that the smart key sys- tem has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.

Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (P.112)

Unlocking the door Use the mechanical key (P.102) in order to perform the

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened by pressing the center of the rear edge of the fuel filler door with the doors unlocked, the follow- ing procedure can be used to open the fuel filler door.

Opening the fuel filler door

If the electronic key does not operate prop- erly

If communication between the electronic key and vehi- cle is interrupted (P.112) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and the engine can be started by following the procedure below.

NOTICE In case of a smart key system

malfunction or other key-related problems

Take your vehicle with all the elec- tronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Locking and unlocking the doors

370 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

following operations:

1 Unlocks drivers door 2 Locks drivers door

1 Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal. Vehicles with a manual trans- mission: Shift the shift lever to N and depress the clutch pedal.

2 Touch the area behind the lock button and unlock button on the electronic key to the engine switch.

When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the engine switch will turn to ON. When the smart key system is deactivated in customization set- ting, the engine switch will turn to

ACC.

3 Firmly depress the brake pedal (automatic transmis- sion) or clutch pedal (manual transmission) and check that

is shown on the multi-information display.

4 Press the engine switch. In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Toyota dealer.

Stopping the engine Vehicles with an automatic trans- mission: Shift the shift lever to P and press the engine switch as you nor- mally do when stopping the engine. Vehicles with a manual transmis- sion: Shift the shift lever to N and press the engine switch as you nor- mally do when stopping the engine. Electronic key battery As the above procedure is a tempo- rary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the bat- tery is depleted. (P.329) Alarm Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm sys- tem. If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm sys- tem is set, the alarm may be trig- gered.

Starting the engine

3717-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

Changing engine switch modes Release the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or clutch pedal (man- ual transmission) and press the engine switch in step 3 above. The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (P.147)

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below. 1 Confirm that the electronic

key is being carried. When connecting the jumper (or booster) cables, depending on the situation, the alarm may activate and doors locked.

2 Open the hood. (P.302)

3 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to on your vehicle and connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to on the second vehicle. Then, connect a negative cable clamp to

If the vehicle battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicles bat- tery is discharged. You can also call your Toy- ota dealer or a qualified repair shop.

Restarting the engine

A

B

C

372 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

on the second vehicle and connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to .

Positive (+) battery terminal (your vehicle) Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle) Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle) Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration.

4 Start the engine of the sec- ond vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

5 Open and close any of the door of your vehicle with the engine switch off.

6 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the engine of your vehicle by turning the engine switch to ON.

7 Once the vehicles engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact

reverse order from which they were connected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Starting the engine when the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-starting. To prevent battery discharge Turn off the headlights and the

audio system while the engine is off.

Turn off any unnecessary electri- cal components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

D

A

C

D

3737-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

When the battery is removed or discharged

Information stored in the ECU is cleared. When the battery is depleted, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer. When removing the battery ter-

minals When the battery terminals are removed, the information stored in the ECU is cleared. Before remov- ing the battery terminals, contact your Toyota dealer. Charging the battery The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to nat- ural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appli- ances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges auto- matically during driving.) When recharging or replacing

the battery In some cases, it may not be pos-

sible to unlock the doors using the smart key system when the bat- tery is discharged. Use the wire- less remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.

The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.

The engine switch mode is memo- rized by the vehicle. When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the battery was dis- charged. Before disconnecting the battery, turn the engine switch off. If you are unsure what mode the engine switch was in before the battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the battery.

WARNING When removing the battery

terminals Always remove the negative (-) terminal first. If the positive (+) ter- minal contacts any metal in the surrounding area when the posi- tive (+) terminal is removed, a spark may occur, leading to a fire in addition to electrical shocks and death or serious injury.

Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emit- ted from the battery:

Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct termi- nal and that it is not unintention- ally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.

Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other.

Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.

Battery precautions The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery:

When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any bat- tery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

Do not lean over the battery.

374 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air con- ditioning system, and then stop the engine.

2 If you see steam: Carefully lift the hood after the steam sub- sides. If you do not see steam: Carefully lift the hood.

3 After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the

WARNING In the event that battery fluid

comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other bat- tery-related parts.

Do not allow children near the battery.

To prevent damage to the vehicle

Do not pull- or push-start the vehi- cle as the three-way catalytic con- verter may overheat and become a fire hazard.

NOTICE When handling jumper cables Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fans or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

When closing the doors While pushing the door glass towards the inside of the vehicle, slowly close the door. Because the side window open/close function linked to door operation will not operate, the window may interfere with the vehicle body, possibly scratching both the vehicle body and win- dow, or even shattering the win- dow.

If your vehicle over- heats

The following may indicate that your vehicle is over- heating. The engine coolant tem-

perature gauge (P.88) is in the red zone or a loss of engine power is experi- enced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)

High Coolant Temperature Check Owner's Manual is shown on the multi-informa- tion display.

Steam comes out from under the hood.

Correction procedures

3757-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

hoses and radiator core (radi- ator) for any leaks.

Radiators Cooling fans

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. 4 The coolant level is satisfac-

tory if it is between the FULL and LOW lines on the reservoir.

Reservoir FULL line LOW line Radiator cap

5 Add engine coolant if neces- sary.

Water can be used in an emer- gency if engine coolant is unavail-

able.

6 Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cool- ing fans operate and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.

The fans operate when the air con- ditioning system is turned on imme- diately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.) 7 If the fans are not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and contact your Toyota dealer. If the fans are operating: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.

A

A

C

D

WARNING When inspecting under the

hood of your vehicle Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may result in seri- ous injury such as burns.

376 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

1 Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).

2 Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.

3 Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to help provide trac- tion.

4 Restart the engine. 5 Shift the shift lever to D or R

(automatic transmission) or 1 or R (manual transmission) and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the acceler- ator pedal.

When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press the switch to turn off TRAC.

WARNING If steam is seen coming from

under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has sub- sided. The engine compart- ment may be very hot.

Keep hands and clothing (espe- cially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fans and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in serious injury.

Do not loosen the coolant reser- voir caps while the engine and radiator are hot. High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.

NOTICE When adding engine coolant Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down suffi- ciently. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.

To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precau- tions:

Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).

Do not use any coolant additive.

If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following pro- cedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

Recovering procedure

3777-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7

W hen trouble arises

WARNING When attempting to free a

stuck vehicle If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

When shifting the shift lever (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE To avoid damaging the trans-

mission and other compo- nents

Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary.

If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

378 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

379

8

8

Vehicle specifications

Vehicle specifications

.

8-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.).................. 380

Fuel information .......... 388 Tire information ........... 390

8-2. Customization Customizable features

.................................. 400

380 8-1. Specifications 8-1.Specifications

*: Unladen vehicle

Vehicle identification num- ber

The vehicle identification num- ber (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the pri- mary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in regis- tering the ownership of your vehicle. This number is stamped under the right-hand front seat.

This number is located on the top left of the body panel.

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weight

Overall length 167.9 in. (4265 mm)

Overall width 69.9 in. (1775 mm)

Overall height* 51.6 in. (1310 mm)

Wheelbase 101.4 in. (2575 mm)

Tread Front 59.8 in. (1520 mm)

Rear 61.0 in. (1550 mm)

Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + lug- gage)

Details are described on the tire and loading information label. (P.324)

Seating capacity

Seating capacity 4 (Front 2, Rear 2)

Vehicle identification

3818-1. Specifications

8

Vehicle specifications

This number is also on the Certi- fication Label.

Engine number The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

*: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 (98 RON) is not available, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (95 RON) may be used

Engine

Model FA24

Type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline

Bore and stroke 3.70 3.39 in. (94.0 86.0 mm)

Displacement 146 cu. in. (2387 cm3)

Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment

Fuel

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only

Octane Rating 93 (Research octane number 98) or higher*

Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 13.2 gal. (50.0 L, 11.0 Imp. gal.)

382 8-1. Specifications

with no detriment to engine durability or driveability.

Oil capacity (Drain and refill [Reference*])

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 min- utes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

Engine oil selection Toyota Genuine Motor Oil is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved Toyota Genu- ine Motor Oil or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity. Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multi- grade engine oil Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20 SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather. If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE 5W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.

Outside temperature Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example): The 0W in 0W-20 indicates

the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high tem- perature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:

Lubrication system

With filter 5.3 qt. (5.0 L, 4.4 Imp. qt.)

Without filter 5.1 qt. (4.8 L, 4.2 Imp. qt.)

A

3838-1. Specifications

8

Vehicle specifications

The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Commit- tee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

Cooling system

Capacity

Vehicles with an automatic transmission 8.1 qt. (7.7 L, 6.8 Imp. qt.) Vehicles with a manual transmission 7.8 qt. (7.4 L, 6.5 Imp. qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following. TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super

Long Life Coolant BLUE Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based

non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system (spark plug)

Make Gap

DENSO ZXE27HBR8 0.031 in. (0.8 mm)

NOTICE Iridium-tipped spark plugs Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.

384 8-1. Specifications

*: Your Toyota vehicle is filled with Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LX at the factory. Use Toyota approved Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LX or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

*: The fluid capacity is provided as a reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

Electrical system

Battery Specific gravity reading at 68F (20C):

1.2501.290 Fully charged 1.1601.200 Half charged 1.0601.100 Discharged

Charging rates Quick charge Slow charge

15 A max. 5 A max.

Differential

Oil capacity (Reference) 1.22 qt. (1.15 L, 1.01 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity* Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LX Other LSD gear oil that meets API GL-5

and SAE 75W-85

NOTICE Differential gear oil type Using a differential gear oil other than Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LX may cause occurrences of noises, vibrations and poor fuel con- sumption. Never use different brands together.

Automatic transmission

Fluid capacity* 7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

3858-1. Specifications

8

Vehicle specifications

*: The recommended oil grade is API GL-4. However, API GL-3 can also be used.

NOTICE Transmission fluid type Using automatic transmission fluid other than TOYOTA Genuine ATF WS may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmis- sion accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.

Manual transmission

Fluid capacity* 2.3 qt. (2.2 L, 1.9 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type

Use either of the following: MT GEAR OIL LV 75W Other gear oil that meets API GL-4* and

SAE 75W specifications

NOTICE Transmission fluid type If oil other than MT GEAR OIL LV 75W is used, the following may be experienced:

The overall performance and function of the transmission may be adversely affected.

Rattling noises may occur during idling and fuel consumption may increase.

Never use different brands together.

Clutch

Pedal free play 0.170.65 in. (4.316.4 mm)

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

Brakes

Pedal clearance*1 2.91 in. (74 mm) Min.

Pedal free play 0.0200.059 in. (0.51.5 mm)

386 8-1. Specifications

*1:Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 67 lbf (300 N, 30 kgf) while the engine is running.

Carpet Brake pedal Pedal clearance

*2:Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45.0 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf).

Type A

Brake pad wear limit

Fro nt 0.06 in. (1.5 mm)

Rea r 0.06 in. (1.5 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit 0.06 in. (1.5 mm)

Parking brake lever travel*2 7 - 8 clicks

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

A

C

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Tires and wheels

Tire size 215/45R17 87W

Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size 17 7 1/2 J

Wheel nut torque 89 ftlbf (120 Nm, 12.2 kgfm)

3878-1. Specifications

8

Vehicle specifications

Type B

A: Wedge base bulbs (clear) B: Double end bulbs

Tire size 215/40R18 85Y

Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Driving under normal conditions

Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size 18 7 1/2 J

Wheel nut torque 89 ftlbf (120 Nm, 12.2 kgfm)

Light bulbs

Light bulbs Bulb No. W Type

Exterior Back-up lights W16W 16 A

Interior

Vanity lights (if equipped) 2 B

Interior light 8 A

Door courtesy lights (if equipped) W5W 5 A

Trunk light #194 3.8 A

388 8-1. Specifications

Gasoline quality In very few cases, driveability prob- lems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your

Toyota dealer. Recommendation of the use of

gasoline containing detergent additives

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.

All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. con- tains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPAs lowest addi- tives concentration program.

Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gaso- line. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the offi- cial website www.toptiergas.com.

Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline

Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated gasolines, are avail- able in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, provid- ing they meet other fuel require- ments. Toyota recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions. Non-recommendation of the

use of blended gasoline Use only gasoline containing up to

15% ethanol. DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gas- oline that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E30 (30% ethanol [ ]), E50 (50% ethanol [ ]), E85 (85% ethanol [ ]) (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).

Fuel information

You must only use unleaded gasoline. The engine is designed to operate at maximum perfor- mance using unleaded gas- oline with an octane rating of 93 (98 RON) or higher. If an octane rating of 93 (98 RON) fuel is not readily available in your area, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (95 RON) may be used with no detri- ment to engine durability or driveability. However, you may notice a slight decrease in maximum engine performance and you may hear some knock- ing (pinging) of an engine while using an octane rating of 91 (95 RON) fuel. If the octane rating is less than 91, damage to the engine may occur and may void the vehicle warranty. At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A.. A B

C

3898-1. Specifications

8

Vehicle specifications

If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rat- ing no lower than 91.

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing metha- nol.

Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manga- nese Tricarbonyl). Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service. If your engine knocks Consult your Toyota dealer. You may occasionally notice light

knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

NOTICE Notice on fuel quality Do not use improper fuels. If

improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.

Do not use leaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicles three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle per- formance problems.

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated may cause persistent heavy knocking. At worst, this may lead to engine damage and will void the vehicle warranty.

When refueling with gasohol Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicles paint.

Fuel-related poor driveability If poor driveability (poor hot start- ing, vaporization, engine knock- ing, etc.) is encountered after using a different type of fuel, dis- continue the use of that type of fuel.

390 8-1. Specifications

Tire size (P.391) DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P.391) Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading that follows. Location of treadwear indicators (P.312) Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a bias-ply tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pres- sure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P.393) Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P.393)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. Summer tires or all season tires (P.313)

An all season tire has M+S on the sidewall. A tire not marked M+S is a summer tire.

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

A

C

D

3918-1. Specifications

8

Vehicle specifications

Type A

DOT symbol*

Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire manufacturers identifi- cation mark Tire size code Manufacturers optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) Manufacturing week Manufacturing year

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Fed- eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dards.

Type B

DOT symbol*

Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire manufacturers identifi- cation mark Manufacturers code Manufacturing week Manufacturing year

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Fed- eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dards.

Typical tire size information The illustration indicates typical tire size.

Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) Section width (millimeters) Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) Wheel diameter (inches) Load index (2 digits or 3 dig- its)

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

A

C

D

Tire size

A

C

D

A

C

D

392 8-1. Specifications

Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)

Tire dimensions

Section width Tire height Wheel diameter

Bead Sidewall Shoulder Tread Belt Inner liner Reinforcing rubber Carcass Rim lines Bead wires

Chafer

This information has been pre- pared in accordance with regu- lations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis- tration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with informa- tion on uniform tire quality grad- ing. Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. DOT quality grades All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Trac- tion AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a com- parative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150

Tire section names

A

C

A

C

D

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

3938-1. Specifications

8

Vehicle specifications

would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from high- est to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern- ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include corner- ing (turning) traction. Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A

(the highest), B, and C, repre- senting the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi- tions on a specified indoor labo- ratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Fed- eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo- ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa- rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire fail- ure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

Maximum inflation pressure The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

394 8-1. Specifications

Recommended inflation pres- sure

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as fac- tory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with stan- dard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight

Normal occupant weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occu- pants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows

Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below

Production options weight

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Tire related term Meaning

3958-1. Specifications

8

Vehicle specifications

Rim diameter (Wheel diame- ter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation The industry manufacturers designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicles designated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is deter- mined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

Vehicle normal load on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is deter- mined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and nor- mal occupant weight (distributed in accor- dance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two

Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between compo- nents in the bead

Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Carcass The tire structure, except tread and side- wall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire

Tire related term Meaning

396 8-1. Specifications

Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

CT

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cav- ity of the tire

Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

Intended outboard sidewall

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufac- turer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

Tire related term Meaning

3978-1. Specifications

8

Vehicle specifications

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, side- wall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.

Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materi- als, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substan- tially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, exclud- ing elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

Tire related term Meaning

398 8-1. Specifications

*: Table 1 - Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Trac- tion in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is

marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall

Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

Tread That portion of a tire that comes into con- tact with the road

Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire car- cass

Treadwear indicators (TWI) The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indica- tion of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

Tire related term Meaning

Designated seating capacity, Number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehi-

cle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat

3998-1. Specifications

8

Vehicle specifications

11 through 15 5 2 in front, 1 in second

seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

16 through 20 7 2 in front, 2 in second

seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

Designated seating capacity, Number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehi-

cle

400 8-2. Customization 8-2.Customization

Changing by using the mul- timedia system screen

1 Press .

2 Select or .

If the select 3 Select General or Car. 4 Select the preferred menu. For details on the multimedia system, refer to the MULTIME- DIA OWNERS MANUAL.

Changing by using the meter control switches

1 Press or of the meter control switch to select or

.

2 Press or of the meter control switch to select the desired item to be custom- ized.

3 Press .

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other func- tions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Settings that can be changed using the multimedia system screen Settings that can be changed using the meter control switches Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer

Definition of symbols: O = Available, = Not available

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a vari- ety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed using the multi-information display, the multimedia system screen or at your Toyota dealer.

Customizing vehicle fea- tures

WARNING During customization As the engine needs to be run- ning during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may col- lect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE During customization To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing features.

Customizable features

A

C

4018-2. Customization

8

Vehicle specifications

Alarm (P.80)

Gauges, meters and multi-information display (P.84, 88, 93)

*1:For details about each function: P.98 *2:Vehicles with manual transmission *3:On some models

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

Operation when doors are unlocked using the mechanical key

Off On O

Function*1 Default setting Customized set- ting

Language English French

O Spanish

Units miles, MPH, MPG

km, km/h, l/100 km O O

Clock 12H 24H O

Startup screen On Off O O

GSI (Gear Shift Indica- tor)*2

On Off O O

REV. (Indicator) Off On O O

REV. (rpm) Off (2000 rpm) 2000 rpm7400 rpm O O

REV. (Buzzer) Off On O O

Warning Volume Mid Min

O O*3 Max

Auto dimmer cancel 3 Off

O 1 to 5

A B C

A B C

402 8-2. Customization

Smart key system and wireless remote control (P.105, 107, 111)

Smart key system (P.105, 107, 111)

Wireless remote control (P.102, 105, 107)

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

Operation buzzer On Off O O O

Operation buzzer vol- ume 5

Off O

1 to 7

Operation signal (Emer- gency flashers) On Off O O O

Open door warning buzzer On Off O

Open door battery dis- charge prevention func- tion

On Off O

A B C

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

Door lock prevention function On Off O

The doors that are unlocked using the smart key system can be selected

Drivers door All the doors O O O

A B C

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

Wireless remote control On Off O

Trunk unlocking opera- tion

Press and hold (short)

One short press

OPush twice

Press and hold (long)

A B C

4038-2. Customization

8

Vehicle specifications

Trunk (P.107)

Turn signal lever (P.155)

ASC (Active Sound Control) (P.157)

Automatic light control system (P.158)

Panic function On Off O

Vehicle finder function On Off O

Function Default setting Customized set- ting A B C

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

Opening the trunk with- out an electronic key On Off O

A B C

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

One-touch lane change function On Off O O O

A B C

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

ASC (Active Sound Con- trol) On Off O

A B C

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

Light sensor sensitivity Mid

Min

O O O Low

High

Max

Time that the welcome lighting system oper- ates (when entering the vehicle)

30 seconds

60 seconds

O O O90 seconds

Off

A B C

404 8-2. Customization

Lights (P.158)

*1:Except for Canada *2: If equipped

High Beam Assist* (P.162)

*: If equipped

EyeSight* (P.170)

*: If equipped

Pre-Collision Braking System* (P.179)

*: If equipped

Time that the welcome lighting system oper- ates (when exiting the vehicle)

30 seconds

60 seconds

O O O90 seconds

Off

Windshield wiper linked headlight illumination On Off O O O

Function Default setting Customized set- ting A B C

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

Daytime running lights*1 On Off O

SRH (Steering Respon- sive Headlights)*2

On Off O O O

A B C

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

High Beam Assist On Off O

A B C

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

Driving lane Right lane Left lane O O

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

PCB (Pre-Collision Braking System) On Off O O

A B C

A B C

4058-2. Customization

8

Vehicle specifications

Adaptive Cruise Control* (P.190)

*: If equipped

LDW (Lane Departure Warning)* (P.219)

*: If equipped

Lead Vehicle Start Alert* (P.223)

*: If equipped

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)* (P.239)

*: If equipped

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

Lead vehicle acquisition sound On Off O O

Cruise control accelera- tion level Lv.3 (Standard)

Lv.1 (Eco)

O O Lv.2 (Comfort)

Lv.4 (Dynamic)

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

LDW (Lane Departure Warning) On Off O O

A B C

A B C

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

Lead Vehicle Start Alert On Off O O

A B C

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

Automatic Braking On Off O O

(Sonar Audible Alarm)

On Off O O

A B C

406 8-2. Customization

BSD/RCTA*(P.231)

*: If equipped Automatic air conditioning system (P.270)

Illumination (P.277)

In the following situations, cus- tomize mode in which the set- tings can be changed through the multi-information display will automatically be turned off

A warning message appears after the customize mode screen is dis- played

The engine switch is turned off. The vehicle begins to move while

the customize mode screen is dis- played.

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

BSD/RCTA On Off O O

A B C

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

Time elapsed before the rear window defogger turn off

15 minutes Continue O O O

A B C

Function Default setting Customized set- ting

Time elapsed before the interior lights turn off 15 seconds

7.5 seconds O O O

30 seconds

Operation after the engine switch is turned off

On Off O

Operation when the doors are unlocked On Off O

Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person

On Off O

Interior light illumination On Off O

A B C

407

9

9

For ow ners

For owners

.

9-1. For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners............... 408

Reporting safety defects for Canadian owners ...... 409

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)...................... 409

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)...................... 411

Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in French)...................... 422

408 9-1. For owners 9-1.For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. own- ers

If you believe that your vehi- cle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti- fying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave. SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

4099-1. For owners

9

For ow ners

Droulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur l'paule, sans pour autant tre en contact avec le cou ou glisser de l'paule.

Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.

Rglez la position du dossier de sige. Asseyez-vous le dos droit et calez-vous bien dans le sige.

Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de

Reporting safety defects for Canadian owners

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defects Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510, mail Trans- port Canada - ASFAD, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5, or complete the online form at https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls.

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual. See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.

Utilisation correcte des ceintures de scurit

410 9-1. For owners

scurit.

Traitement des ceintures de scurit

Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une ponge humidifis avec de l'eau savonneuse tide. Vrifiez rgulirement que les ceintures ne sont pas uses, effiloches ou entailles excessivement.

Entretien et soin

AVERTISSEMENT Dtrioration et usure des

ceintures de scurit Inspectez le systme de ceintures de scurit rgulirement. Con- trlez l'absence de coupures, d'effilochages et de pices desserres. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de scurit endommage avant qu'elle ne soit remplace. Une ceinture de scurit endom- mage ne permet pas de protger un occupant de blessures graves ou mortelles.

4119-1. For owners

9

For ow ners

Emplacement des coussins gonflables SRS Les coussins gonflables SRS se trouvent aux emplacements suiva- nts.

Coussin gonflable frontal SRS du conducteur: dans la partie cen- trale du volant

Une inscription SRS AIRBAG est appose sur la garniture du coussin gonflable.

Coussin gonflable frontal SRS du passager avant: prs du haut ct droit du tableau de bord

Une inscription SRS AIRBAG se trouve sur langle droit du tableau de bord.

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instruc- tions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual. See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

Composants

A

412 9-1. For owners

Coussin gonflable latral SRS: dans le ct porte de chaque dos- sier de sige avant

Des marquages SRS AIRBAG sont apposs sur le ct porte de chaque assise de sige avant.

Coussin gonflable rideau SRS: du ct toit (entre le montant avant et un point au-dessus du sige arrire)

Des marquages SRS AIRBAG sont apposs en haut de chaque montant central.

Coussin gonflable de genoux SRS: sous la colonne de direction Une inscription SRS AIRBAG est appose au niveau du couvercle du coussin gonflable. Composants du systme de coussins gonflables SRS

Capteur dimpact avant (ct gauche) Capteur dimpact avant (ct droit) Tmoin d'avertissement SRS Module de coussin gonflable frontal (ct conducteur) Module de commande de coussin gonflable (y compris capteur dimpact et capteur de retournement) Tmoins ON et OFF du coussin gonflable frontal du passager avant Module de coussin gonflable frontal (ct passager avant)

C

D

A

C

D

4139-1. For owners

9

For ow ners

Contact de boucle de ceinture de scurit (ct passager avant) Module de coussin gonflable rideau (ct droit) Capteur dimpact latral (porte ct droit) Module de coussin gonflable latral (ct passager avant) Prtensionneur de ceinture de scurit et limiteur de force adap- tatif (ct passager avant) Capteur dimpact latral (ct droit du montant central) Cblage des coussins gonflables Capteur dimpact latral (ct droit du passage de roue arrire) Capteur du systme de dtection de loccupant du sige pas- sager avant Capteur dimpact latral (ct gauche du passage de roue arrire) Module de coussin gonflable latral (ct conducteur) Capteur dimpact latral (ct gauche du montant central) Prtensionneur de ceinture de scurit (ct conducteur) Capteur dimpact latral (porte ct gauche) Module de coussin gonflable de genoux (ct conducteur) Module de coussin gonflable rideau (ct gauche)

414 9-1. For owners

AVERTISSEMENT Prcautions gnrales con-

cernant le systme de couss- ins gonflables SRS

Pour obtenir une protection maximale en cas daccident, le conducteur et tous les passag- ers doivent toujours porter leur ceinture de scurit lorsquils sont dans le vhicule. Les cous- sins gonflables SRS ne sont conus que comme compl- ments la protection premire fournie par les ceintures de scurit. Ils ne dispensent pas de la ncessit du port des ceintures de scurit. En com- plment du port des ceintures de scurit, ils offrent la meil- leure protection en cas dacci- dent grave.

Ne pas porter la ceinture de scu- rit augmente les risques de bles- sures graves ou mortelles lors d'un accident, mme lorsque le vhicule est quip de coussins gonflables SRS. Pour les instructions dutilisation et les prcautions prendre au sujet du systme de ceintures de scurit, reportez-vous cein- tures de scurit. Les coussins gonflables

latraux SRS et les coussins gonflables rideaux SRS ne sont conus que comme compl- ments la protection premire fournie par la ceinture de scu- rit. Ils ne suppriment pas la ncessit du port des ceintures de scurit. Il est galement important de porter une ceinture de scurit pour prvenir les blessures qui peuvent survenir lorsquun occupant nest pas assis dans une position droite correcte.

Les coussins gonflables SRS se dploient une vitesse et avec une puissance considrables. Les occupants qui sont mal assis lorsque le coussin gon- flable SRS se dploie peuvent subir des blessures graves. Parce que le coussin gonflable SRS a besoin dun espace suff- isant pour son dploiement, le conducteur doit toujours se tenir droit et bien enfonc dans le sige, le plus loin possible du volant, tout en conservant le contrle complet du vhicule, et le passager avant doit dplacer son sige vers larrire aussi loin que possible, se tenir droit et bien en arrire dans le sige.

Ne vous asseyez pas ou ne vous penchez pas prs des portes. Les coussins gonflables latraux SRS sont logs dans les deux dossiers des siges avant ct de la porte. Ils assurent leur protection en se dployant rapidement en cas de collision par le ct. Toutefois, la force de dploiement dun coussin gonflable latral SRS peut blesser un passager dont le corps est trop prs du cous- sin gonflable SRS.

4159-1. For owners

9

For ow ners

AVERTISSEMENT Votre vhicule tant quip de

coussins gonflables rideaux SRS, ne vous asseyez pas ou ne vous penchez pas prs des portes. Ne passez pas de par- ties de votre corps par la vitre. Les coussins gonflables rideaux SRS des deux cts de lhabita- cle sont logs dans la partie latrale du toit (entre le montant avant et un point situ derrire la vitre de custode arrire). Ils assurent une protection en se dployant rapidement en cas de choc latral, de retournement ou de collision frontale dcale. Toutefois, leur force de dploie- ment peut blesser un passager dont le corps est trop prs du coussin gonflable SRS.

Ne vous asseyez pas et ne vous penchez pas inutilement prs des coussins gonflables SRS. Parce que les coussins gonflables SRS se dploient une vitesse considrable et avec une puissance conue pour vous protger lors de colli- sions haute vitesse, la puis- sance de dploiement dun coussin gonflable peut blesser un occupant dont le corps en est trop proche. Il est galement important de porter votre ceinture de scurit pour prvenir les blessures qui peuvent survenir lorsque le coussin gonflable SRS entre en contact avec un occupant qui ne serait pas assis dans la position adquate. Mme en tant correctement positionn, il nest pas impossi- ble que loccupant subisse des blessures mineures, telles que des brlures et des ecchy- moses sur le visage ou les bras, en raison de la puissance de dploiement des coussins gon- flables SRS.

Gardez les bras loin des portes ou de leur garniture interne. Ils pourraient tre blesss en cas de dploiement dun coussin gonflable latral SRS.

Ne placez pas d'objets au-des- sus ou proximit du cache du coussin gonflable SRS ou entre vous et le coussin gonflable SRS. En cas de dploiement du coussin gonflable SRS, ces objets pourraient interfrer avec son fonctionnement correct et pourraient tre propulss lintrieur du vhicule et causer des blessures.

En cas de dploiement dun coussin gonflable SRS

Lorsque le coussin gonflable SRS se dploie, un peu de fume est relche. Cette fume peut causer des prob- lmes respiratoires pour les personnes ayant des antc- dents d'asthme ou des diffi- cults respirer. Si vous ou vos passagers prouvez une diffi- cult respirer aprs le dploie- ment du coussin gonflable SRS, prenez ou faites-leur prendre l'air rapidement.

Un coussin gonflable SRS qui se dploie libre un gaz chaud. Les occupants pourraient se brler s'ils entrent en contact direct avec le gaz chaud.

416 9-1. For owners

AVERTISSEMENT Prcautions gnrales con-

cernant le systme de couss- ins gonflables SRS et les accessoires et objets de toute sorte

Ne mettez rien (notamment des sangles ou des cordons) sur le rembourrage du volant, le cou- vercle de la colonne ou le tab- leau de bord.

Ils peuvent semmler dans le volant et empcher le bon fonctionnement du coussin gon- flable frontal SRS, etc.

Si le coussin gonflable frontal SRS se dploie, ces objets peu- vent tre projets lintrieur du vhicule et provoquer des bles- sures.

Ne placez aucun objet sous le ct conducteur du tableau de bord. En cas de dploiement du coussin gonflable de genoux SRS, ces objets pourraient interfrer avec son fonctionne- ment correct et pourraient tre propulss lintrieur du vhicule et causer des bless- ures.

Ne fixez pas daccessoires sur le pare-brise et ne placez pas de miroir extra-large sur le rtro- viseur intrieur. Si le coussin gonflable SRS se dploie, ces objets peuvent devenir des pro- jectiles susceptibles de blesser gravement les occupants du vhicule.

Ne fixez pas daccessoires sur la garniture de la porte ou proximit des coussins gonfla- bles latraux SRS et ne placez pas dobjets proximit des coussins gonflables latraux SRS. En cas de dploiement des coussins gonflables latraux SRS, ils pourraient tre projets dangereusement vers les occupants du vhicule et causer des blessures.

4179-1. For owners

9

For ow ners

AVERTISSEMENT Ne fixez pas de microphone

mains libres ou tout autre accessoire sur un montant avant, un montant central, un montant arrire, le pare-brise, une vitre latrale ou toute autre surface de lhabitacle qui se trouverait proximit dun cous- sin gonflable rideau SRS qui se dploie. Un microphone mains libres ou un autre accessoire plac un tel endroit pourrait tre propuls travers lhabita- cle avec une grande force par le coussin gonflable rideau, ou pourrait empcher le dploie- ment correct du coussin gon- flable rideau. Dans les deux cas, le rsultat peut tre des blessures graves.

Ne posez pas de vtements ou dautres objets sur le dossier du sige avant et ne collez pas dtiquettes ou dautocollants sur la surface du sige avant sur ou prs de coussin gon- flable latral SRS. Ils pourraient empcher le dploiement cor- rect du coussin gonflable latral SRS, rduisant ainsi la protec- tion offerte loccupant du sige avant.

Ninstallez pas de housse de sige sauf sil sagit dune housse de sige dorigine Toy- ota exclusivement conue pour tre utilise avec le coussin gonflable SRS. Mme en util- isant une housse de sige dorigine Toyota, le systme de coussin gonflable latral SRS peut ne pas fonctionner nor- malement si la housse de sige nest pas installe correcte- ment.

418 9-1. For owners

AVERTISSEMENT Prcautions gnrales con-

cernant le systme de couss- ins gonflables SRS et les enfants

Placez les enfants sur le sige arrire en les attachant correcte- ment tout moment. Le coussin gonflable SRS se dploie une vitesse et avec une force con- sidrables et peut blesser ou mme tuer des enfants, surtout s'ils ne sont pas ou mal attachs. Parce que les enfants sont plus lgers et plus faibles que les adultes, le risque qu'ils courent d'tre blesss par le dploiement est plus grand. Pour cette raison, nous recom- mandons fortement que TOUS les enfants (y compris ceux qui sont dans des siges enfant) sassoient sur le sige ARRIRE en tant correctement attachs tout le temps dans un sige de scurit enfant ou avec une ceinture de scurit, selon ce qui est appropri pour lge, la taille et le poids de lenfant. Attachez TOUS les types de siges enfant (y compris les siges enfants type face la route) sur les siges ARRIRE, en toutes circonstances. Les statistiques relatives aux accidents prouvent que les enfants sont mieux protgs lor- squ'ils sont attachs correcte- ment l'arrire plutt qu' l'avant. Pour les instructions dutilisation et les prcautions prendre au sujet du sige enfant, repor- tez-vous Siges de scurit enfant.

NINSTALLEZ JAMAIS UN SIGE ENFANT SUR LE SIGE AVANT. NGLIGER CECI REVIENT FAIRE COURIR LE RISQUE L'ENFANT DE SUBIR DE GRAVES BLESSURES, VOIRE LA MORT, EN PLAANT LA TTE DE L'ENFANT TROP PRS DES COUSSINS GON- FLABLES SRS.

Ne laissez jamais un enfant se mettre debout ou genoux sur le sige passager avant. Le coussin gonflable SRS se dploie avec une force con- sidrable et peut blesser ou tuer l'enfant.

4199-1. For owners

9

For ow ners

AVERTISSEMENT Ne tenez jamais un enfant sur

vos genoux ou dans vos bras. Le coussin gonflable SRS se dploie avec une force con- sidrable et peut blesser ou tuer l'enfant.

Ne laissez jamais un enfant faire ce qui suit.

Sagenouiller sur nimporte quel sige de passager face la fentre latrale

Enrouler ses bras autour du dossier du sige avant

Mettre sa tte, ses bras ou dautres parties de son corps hors de la fentre

En cas daccident, la force de dploiement du coussin gonflable latral SRS et/ou du coussin gon- flable rideau SRS peut blesser gravement lenfant parce que sa tte, ses bras ou dautres parties de son corps sont trop proches du coussin gonflable latral SRS et/ou du coussin gonflable rideau SRS. Comme votre vhicule est

galement quip dun coussin gonflable frontal SRS du pas- sager avant, les enfants doivent tre placs sur le sige arrire et doivent tre correctement attachs en permanence.

Entretien du systme de coussins gonflables SRS

Le coussin gonflable SRS ne comporte aucune pice rparable par lutilisateur. Nutilisez pas dquipement de test lectrique sur un circuit li au systme de coussin gonflable SRS. Pour lentretien requis du coussin gon- flable SRS, consultez votre con- cessionnaire Toyota le plus proche. Laltration ou la dcon- nexion du cblage du systme peut entraner le gonflage acci- dentel dun coussin gonflable SRS ou rendre le systme inoprant, ce qui peut entraner des blessures graves. Prcautions relatives aux

modifications du vhicule Afin dviter le dclenchement

accidentel du systme ou de rendre le systme inoprant, ce qui peut entraner des blessures graves, aucune modification ne doit tre apporte aux com- posants ou au cblage du sys- tme de coussins gonflables SRS. Cela inclut les modifications suivantes.

420 9-1. For owners

AVERTISSEMENT Installation de volants person-

naliss Fixation de matriaux de garni-

ture supplmentaires au tableau de bord

Installation de siges person- naliss

Remplacement du tissu ou du cuir de sige

Installation de tissu ou de cuir supplmentaire sur le sige avant

Ne fixez pas un microphone mains libres ou de tout autre accessoire sur un montant avant, un montant central, un montant arrire, le pare-brise, une vitre latrale, une poigne dassistance ou toute autre sur- face de lhabitacle qui se trou- verait proximit dun coussin gonflable rideau SRS qui se dploie.

Il est dconseill dinstaller un quipement lectrique/lectro- nique supplmentaire, tel quune radio mobile bidirection- nelle, sur ou proximit des composants et/ou du cblage du systme de coussins gonfla- bles SRS. Cela pourrait nuire au bon fonctionnement du systme de coussins gonflables SRS.

Modifications sur ou lintrieur des panneaux de porte en vue du remplacement dun haut-parleur ou de lisolation acoustique

Les capteurs dimpact, qui dtectent la pression dun impact, sont situs dans les portes. Ne modifiez aucun l- ment des portes ou des garni- tures de porte, comme lajout de haut-parleurs de porte par exemple. Toute modification des portes entrane un risque de dysfonctionnement du systme de coussins gonflables ou de dploiement involontaire de coussins gonflables.

Neffectuez pas lune des opra- tions suivantes. De telles modi- fications peuvent nuire au bon fonctionnement du systme de coussins gonflables SRS.

Fixation dun quipement (barre dappui, treuils, chasse-neige, plaque de protection, etc.) autre que des pices accessoires Toyota dorigine sur le train avant.

Modification du systme de sus- pension ou de la structure avant.

Installation dun pneu de taille et de construction diffrentes des pneus spcifis sur la plaque didentification du vhicule fixe au montant central du conduc- teur ou spcifis pour les modles de vhicules individu- els dans ce Manuel du pro- pritaire.

Fixation de tout quipement (marchepieds latraux ou pro- tections de bas de caisse, etc.) autre que des pices acces- soires dorigine Toyota sur la carrosserie latrale.

Consultez toujours votre conces- sionnaire Toyota si vous souhai- tez installer des pices accessoires sur votre vhicule.

4219-1. For owners

9

For ow ners

Un systme de diagnostic con- trle en permanence ltat de prparation du systme de coussins gonflables SRS (y compris les prtensionneurs de ceintures de scurit) lorsque le contact du moteur est sur ON. Le tmoin davertissement du systme SRS indique le fonctionnement normal du sys- tme en sallumant pendant environ 6 secondes lorsque vous placez le contact du moteur sur ON.

Les composants suivants sont contrls par le tmoin: Capteur dimpact avant Ct droit Ct gauche Module de commande de

coussin gonflable (y compris capteur dimpact et capteur de retournement)

Module de coussin gonflable frontal

Ct conducteur

Ct passager avant Module de coussin gonflable

de genoux Ct conducteur Capteur dimpact latral Montant central ct gauche Montant central ct droit Passage de roue arrire ct

gauche avant ou arrire Passage de roue arrire ct

droit avant ou arrire Porte ct gauche Porte ct droit Module de coussin gonflable

latral Ct conducteur Ct passager avant Module de coussins gonfla-

bles rideaux Ct droit Ct gauche Prtensionneur de ceinture

de scurit Ct conducteur Prtensionneur de ceinture

de scurit et limiteur de force adaptatif

Ct passager avant Contact de boucle de ceinture

de scurit Ct passager avant Capteurs du systme de

dtection de loccupant du sige passager avant

Tmoins ON et OFF du cous-

Moniteurs du systme de coussins gonflables SRS

422 9-1. For owners

sin gonflable frontal du pas- sager avant

Tous les cblages associs

Boulon de rglage A Boulon de rglage B

Vrifiez que le rservoir de carburant du vhicule est plein et que la zone autour des phares n'est pas dforme.

Stationnez le vhicule sur une surface plane.

Assurez-vous que la pression de gonflage des pneus est au niveau recommand.

AVERTISSEMENT Tmoin d'avertissement SRS Si le tmoin davertissement prsente lune des conditions suivantes, arrtez immdiatement le vhicule dans un lieu sr et consultez un concessionnaire Toyota. Si un technicien ne vrifie pas et ne rpare pas le systme si ncessaire, les prtensionneurs de ceinture de scurit et/ou le coussin gonflable SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement en cas de collision, ce qui peut entraner des blessures.

Clignotement du tmoin d'aver- tissement

Le tmoin davertissement ne sallume pas lorsque le contact du moteur est dabord plac sur ON

Le tmoin d'avertissement reste allum en permanence

Le tmoin d'avertissement s'allume pendant la conduite

Headlight aim instruc- tions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of headlight aim instructions from the head- light aim section in this manual.

Boulons de rglage du mouvement vertical

Avant de vrifier le rglage des phares

A

4239-1. For owners

9

For ow ners

Faites asseoir quelqu'un dans le sige conducteur.

Balancez le vhicule plu- sieurs fois.

1 l'aide d'un tournevis cruci- forme, tournez le boulon A dans n'importe quel sens.

Mmorisez le sens dans lequel vous avez tourn et le nombre de tours.

2 Tournez le boulon B du mme nombre de tours dans le mme sens qu' l'tape 1.

Si vous n'arrivez pas rgler le phare en procdant de la sorte, confiez le vhicule votre conces- sionnaire Toyota pour qu'il rgle le faisceau des phares.

Rglage du faisceau des phares

424 9-1. For owners

425

Index

.

What to do if... (Trouble- shooting) ................... 426

Alphabetical Index....... 429

426 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

1-1.What to do if... (Troubleshooting)What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechani- cal keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. (P.368)

If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Con- tact your Toyota dealer imme- diately. (P.368)

Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (P.329)

Is the engine switch in ON? When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. (P.147) Is the electronic key left inside

the vehicle?

When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person. The function may not operate

properly due to the condition of the radio wave. (P.112)

The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the trunk will operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take the key out from the trunk. (P.110)

Automatic transmission: Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal? (P.145)

Manual transmission: Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the clutch pedal? (P.145)

Automatic transmission: Is the shift lever in P? (P.145)

Is the electronic key any- where detectable inside the vehicle? (P.111)

If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Toyota dealer.

The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed

You lose your keys

The electronic key does not operate properly

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside

If you think something is wrong

The engine does not start

427What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

Is the steering wheel unlocked? (P.145)

Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?

In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (P.370) Is the battery discharged?

(P.371)

Is the engine switch in ON? If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the engine switch in ON. (P.150)

It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (P.145)

Is the window lock switch pressed?

The power window except for the one at the drivers seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (P.130)

The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACC or ON (the engine is not running) for a period of time. (P.148)

The seat belt reminder light is flashing

Are the driver and the passenger wearing the seat belts? (P.351) The brake system warning

light is on Is the parking brake released? (P.156) Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound. (P.348, 357)

Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?

The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (P.80) Do one of the following to deac- tivate or stop the alarm: Unlock the doors or open the

trunk using the entry function or wireless remote control.

Open the trunk using the entry function or wireless remote control.

The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake pedal (Automatic transmission)

The steering wheel can- not be turned after the engine is stopped

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches

The engine switch is turned off automatically

A warning buzzer sounds during driving

An alarm is activated and the horn sounds

428 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

Turn the engine switch to ACC or ON, or start the engine.

Is the message displayed on the multi-information display?

Check the message on the multi-information display. (P.357)

When a warning light turns on or a warning message is dis- played, refer to P.348, 357.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and repair the flat tire temporarily with the emer- gency tire puncture repair kit. (P.358)

Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. (P.376)

A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle

A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed

When a problem has occurred

If you have a flat tire

The vehicle becomes stuck

429Alphabetical Index

Alphabetical Index A

A/C Air conditioning filter.............327 Automatic air conditioning sys-

tem .....................................270 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

...............................................261 Warning light ........................349

Active Sound Control (ASC)..157 Adaptive Cruise Control ........190

Warning message ................357 Air conditioning filter .............327 Air conditioning system

Air conditioning filter.............327 Automatic air conditioning sys-

tem .....................................270 Airbags

Correct driving posture...........21 Front passenger occupant clas-

sification system...................55 Locations of airbags ...............27 SRS airbags ...........................27 SRS warning light.................349

Alarm .........................................80 Warning buzzer ....................348

Anchor brackets.................65, 72 Antennas (smart key system) 111 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

...............................................261 Warning light ........................349

ASC (Active Sound Control)..157 Audio system-linked display...98 Automatic air conditioning sys-

tem.........................................270 Automatic headlight leveling

system...................................159 Automatic light control system

...............................................159 Automatic transmission ........149

Manual mode .......................152 Paddle shift switches....151, 152

Auxiliary box...........................282 Auxiliary boxes.......................281 Average fuel consumption ......94 Average vehicle speed.............94

B

Back-up light Replacing light bulbs ............334 Wattage ................................387

Battery Battery checking...................309 If the battery is discharged ...371 Preparing and checking before

winter..................................265 Warning light.........................348

Blind Spot Detection (BSD) ...231 Bottle holders .........................280 Brake

Fluid......................................385 Parking brake .......................156 Warning light.........................348

Brake assist ............................261 Break-in tips............................133 Brightness control

Instrument panel light control .91 BSD (Blind Spot Detection) ...231

C

Camera High Beam Assist system.....162

Care Exterior .................................288 Interior ..........................291, 293 Seat belts .............................291 Ultrasuede..........................293 Wheels and wheel ornaments

...........................................288 Cargo capacity........................143 Chains......................................267 Child restraint system

Fixed with a LATCH system ...70

430 Alphabetical Index

Fixed with a seat belt .............66 Front passenger occupant clas-

sification system...................55 Points to remember................63 Riding with children ................62 Types of child restraint system

installation method ...............65 Using an anchor bracket ........72

Child safety Battery precautions ...... 311, 373 Child restraint system.............65 How your child should wear the

seat belt................................24 Power window lock switch....130 Removed electronic key battery

precautions.........................330 Seat belt precautions .............62 Seat heater precautions .......276 Trunk precautions.................107

Cleaning Exterior.................................288 Interior ..........................291, 293 Seat belts .............................291 Wheels and wheel ornaments

...........................................288 Clock ...................................88, 91 Condenser ..............................308 Console box............................280 Conventional Cruise Control207,

254 Cooling system ......................307

Engine overheating ..............374 Cruise control

Adaptive Cruise Control .......190 Conventional Cruise Control207,

254 Cup holders ............................281 Current fuel consumption .......94 Curtain shield airbags .............27 Customizable features...........400

D

Daytime running light system158 Daytime running lights

Replacing light bulbs ............334 Defogger

Outside rear view mirrors .....272 Rear window.........................272 Windshield............................272

Dimension ...............................380 Dinghy towing.........................144 Display

Driving information .................94 Multi-information display.........93

Display change button .............90 Do-it-yourself maintenance ...296 Door courtesy lights...............277 Door lock

Doors....................................105 Smart key system................. 111 Wireless remote control........103

Doors Door glasses ........................129 Door lock ..............................105 Open door warning buzzer ...106 Open door warning light .......351 Outside rear view mirrors .....127

Driving Break-in tips .........................133 Correct driving posture ...........21 Driving mode select switch...257 Procedures ...........................132 Winter drive tips....................265

Driving distance........................94 Driving information ..................94 Driving information display .....94 Driving range ............................94 Driving time...............................94

E

EDR (Event data recorder).........7

431Alphabetical Index

Electric Power Steering (EPS) ...............................................261 Warning light ........................350

Electronic key.........................102 Battery-saving function......... 112 If the electronic key does not

operate properly .................369 Replacing the battery ...........329

Emergency flashers ...............338 Emergency tire puncture .......358 Emergency, in case of

If a warning buzzer sounds ..348 If a warning light turns on .....348 If a warning message is dis-

played.................................357 If the battery is discharged ...371 If the electronic key does not

operate properly .................369 If the engine will not start .....367 If the fuel filler door cannot be

opened ...............................369 If the vehicle is submerged or

water on the road is rising ..339 If you have a flat tire.............358 If you lose your keys ............368 If you think something is wrong

...........................................346 If your vehicle becomes stuck

...........................................376 If your vehicle has to be stopped

in an emergency.................338 If your vehicle needs to be towed

...........................................341 If your vehicle overheats ......374

Engine ACCESSORY mode.............147 Compartment .......................305 Engine switch .......................145 Fuel pump shut off system ...347 Hood.....................................302 How to start the engine ........145 Identification number............381

If the engine will not start......367 If your vehicle has to be stopped

in an emergency.................338 Ignition switch (engine switch)

...........................................145 Overheating..........................374 Tachometer.............................88

Engine coolant Capacity ...............................383 Checking ..............................307 Preparing and checking before

winter..................................265 Engine coolant temperature

gauge.......................................88 Engine immobilizer system .....79 Engine oil

Capacity ...............................382 Checking ..............................305 Preparing and checking before

winter..................................265 Warning light.........................349

Engine oil temperature gauge .94 Engine switch .........................145

Auto power off function.........148 Changing the engine switch

modes.................................147 If your vehicle has to be stopped

in an emergency.................338 EPS (Electric Power Steering)

...............................................261 Warning light.........................350

Event data recorder (EDR).........7 EyeSight ..................................170

Adaptive Cruise Control .......190 Conventional Cruise Control 207 Lane Departure Warning ......219 Lane Sway Warning .............221 Lead Vehicle Start Alert ........223 Malfunction ...........................227 Pre-Collision Braking System

...........................................179

432 Alphabetical Index

Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment ...................................215

Temporary stop ....................227

F

Flat tire Tire pressure warning system

...........................................315 Vehicles without a spare tire 358

Floor mats.................................20 Fluid

Automatic transmission ........384 Brake............................308, 385 Clutch ...................................308 Manual transmission ............385 Washer ................................. 311

Front passenger occupant clas- sification system ....................55

Front position lights Wattage ................................387

Front seats Adjustment ........................... 119 Cleaning .......................291, 293 Correct driving posture...........21 Head restraints.....................123 Seat heaters.........................276

Front side marker light Light switch ..........................158

Front turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs ............334 Turn signal lever...................155 Wattage ................................387

Fuel Capacity ...............................381 Fuel gauge .............................88 Fuel pump shut off system ...347 Information ...........................388 Refueling ..............................167 Type .....................................381 Warning light ........................351

Fuel filler door If the fuel filler door cannot be

opened ...............................369 Refueling ..............................167

Fuel gauge.................................88 Fuel pump shut off system....347 Fuses .......................................331

G

Gauges ......................................88 G-force.......................................96 Glove box ................................279

H

Head restraints .......................123 Headlight aim..........................333 Headlights

High Beam Assist system.....162 Light switch...........................158 Replacing light bulbs ............334 Wattage ................................387

Heaters Automatic air conditioning sys-

tem .....................................270 Outside rear view mirrors .....272 Seat heaters .........................276

High Beam Assist ...................162 High mounted stoplight

Replacing light bulbs ............334 Hill-start assist control...........261 Hood

Open.....................................302 Hooks

Retaining hooks (floor mat) ....20 Horn .........................................125

I

I/M test .....................................299 Identification

Engine ..................................381

433Alphabetical Index

Vehicle..................................380 Ignition switch (engine switch)

...............................................145 Auto power off function ........148 Changing the engine switch

modes ................................147 If your vehicle has to be stopped

in an emergency.................338 Illuminated entry system .......277 Indicators ..................................85 Initialization

Power windows ....................129 Tire pressure warning system

...........................................317 Inside rear view mirror...........126 Instrument panel light control.91 Interior lights ..........................277

J

Jack Positioning a floor jack .........303 Vehicle-equipped jack ..........359

Jack handle.............................359 Jam protection function

Power windows ....................129

K

Keyless entry Smart key system................. 111 Wireless remote control .......103

Keys Battery-saving function......... 112 Electronic key.......................102 Engine switch .......................145 If the electronic key does not

operate properly .................369 If you lose your keys ............368 Key number plate .................102 Keyless entry................ 105, 111 Mechanical key ....................102 Replacing the battery ...........329

Warning buzzer .................... 111 Wireless remote control........103

Knee airbags.............................27

L

Lane Departure Warning........219 Lane Sway Warning................221 Language (multi-information dis-

play) .........................................98 LATCH anchors.........................70 Lead Vehicle Start Alert .........223 Lever

Auxiliary catch lever .............302 Hood lock release lever ........302 Shift lever .....................149, 153 Turn signal lever ...................155 Wiper lever ...........................165

License plate lights Light switch...........................158 Replacing light bulbs ............334

Light Wattage ................................387

Light bulbs Replacing .............................334

Lights Headlight switch ...................158 High Beam Assist system.....162 Interior lights.........................277 Interior lights list ...................277 Replacing light bulbs ............334 Trunk light.............................110 Turn signal lever ...................155 Vanity lights ..........................284 Wattage ................................387 Welcome light illumination con-

trol ......................................160 Lock steering column ............145

M

Maintenance Do-it-yourself maintenance ..300

434 Alphabetical Index

General maintenance...........296 Maintenance date.................380 Maintenance requirements...295

Malfunction indicator lamp....349 Manual transmission .............153 Master warning light ..............353 Menu icons ...............................93 Meter

Clock ......................................88 Indicators................................85 Instrument panel light control .91 Meters ....................................88 Multi-information display ........93 Settings ..................................98 Warning lights.......................348 Warning messages...............357

Mirrors Inside rear view mirror..........126 Outside rear view mirror defog-

gers ....................................272 Outside rear view mirrors .....127 Vanity mirrors .......................284

Multi-information display.........93 Audio system-linked display...98 Driving information .................94 Menu icons.............................93 Meter control switches ...........94 Navigation system-linked display

.............................................98 Pop-up display .......................93 Settings ..................................98 Sport information....................96 Tire pressure ........................315 Warning messages...............357

N

Navigation system-linked display .................................................98

Noise from under vehicle ..........5

O

Odometer...................................90 Odometer and trip meter display

Display change button............90 Display items ..........................91

Oil Engine oil..............................382

Opener Fuel filler door.......................167 Hood.....................................302 Trunk ....................................109

Outside rear view mirrors Adjustment ...........................127 BSD (Blind Spot Detection) ..231 Folding..................................127 Outside rear view mirror defog-

gers ....................................272 RCTA function.......................231

Outside temperature ................88 Overheating.............................374

P

Paddle shift switches .....151, 152 Panic mode .............................103 Parking brake

Operation..............................156 Parking lights

Light switch...........................158 Replacing light bulbs ............334

Power and torque curve...........96 Power outlets ..........................284 Power steering (Electric power

steering system)...................261 Warning light.........................350

Power windows Jam protection function ........129 Operation..............................129 Window lock switch ..............130

Pre-Collision Braking System179 Function................................179 Warning message.................357

435Alphabetical Index

Pre-Collision Throttle Manage- ment.......................................215

R

RAB (Reverse Automatic Brak- ing).........................................239

Radiator...................................308 RCTA

Function ...............................231 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

...............................................231 Rear seats ...............................121 Rear side marker lights

Light switch ..........................158 Rear turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs ............334 Turn signal lever...................155 Wattage ................................387

Rear view camera...................249 Rear view mirror

Inside rear view mirror..........126 Outside rear view mirrors .....127

Rear window defogger...........272 Refueling

Capacity ...............................381 Fuel types.............................381 If the fuel filler door cannot be

opened ...............................369 Opening the fuel tank cap ....167

Replacing Electronic key battery...........329 Fuses ...................................331 Light bulbs............................334 Tires .....................................319

REV indicator............................89 Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) .....................................239

S

Safety Connect .........................74 Seat belt reminder light .351, 352

Seat belts...................................23 Automatic Locking Retractor ..25 Child restraint system installation

.............................................65 Cleaning and maintaining the

seat belt..............................291 Emergency Locking Retractor 25 How to wear your seat belt .....24 How your child should wear the

seat belt................................24 Pregnant women, proper seat

belt use.................................23 Reminder light and buzzer .351,

352 Seat belt pretensioners ..........25 SRS warning light .................349

Seat heaters ............................276 Seating capacity .....................143 Seats

Adjustment ...........................119 Child seats/child restraint system

installation ............................63 Cleaning .......................291, 293 Head restraints .....................123 Properly sitting in the seat ......21 Seat heaters .........................276

Sensor Automatic headlight system .159 BSD (Blind Spot Detection) ..231

Shift lever Automatic transmission ........149 Manual transmission ............153

Side airbags ..............................27 Side marker lights

Light switch...........................158 Replacing light bulbs ............334

Side mirrors Adjustment ...........................127 BSD (Blind Spot Detection) ..231 Folding..................................127 RCTA function.......................231

436 Alphabetical Index

Side turn signal lights Turn signal lever...................155 Wattage ................................387

Side windows .........................129 Smart key system

Antenna location .................. 111 Entry functions .....................105 Starting the engine ...............145 Warning message ................357

Snow tires ...............................265 Specifications.........................380 Speedometer ............................88 Steering lock

Column lock release.............145 Steering lock system warning

message.............................145 Steering wheel

Adjustment ...........................125 Meter control switches ...........94

Stop lights Replacing light bulbs ............334 Wattage ................................387

Stopwatch .................................96 Storage features.....................279 Stuck

If the vehicle becomes stuck 376 Sun visors...............................284 Switch

Meter control switches ...........94 Switches

Display change button............90 Door lock switches ...............106 Driving mode select switch...257 Emergency flashers switch ..338 Engine switch .......................145 Ignition switch.......................145 Instrument panel light control

switches ...............................91 Light switches.......................158 Outside rear view mirror

switches .............................127 Paddle shift switches....151, 152

Power door lock switch.........106 Power window switches .......129 Rear window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers switch ...........................................270

Seat heater switches ............276 SOS button ..........................74 Tilt and telescopic steering con-

trol switch ...........................125 Tire pressure warning reset

switch .................................317 Trunk opener switch .............109 VSC OFF switch...................261 Window lock switch ..............130 Windshield wiper and washer

switch .................................165

T

Tachometer ...............................88 REV indicator .........................89

Tail lights Light switch...........................158 Replacing light bulbs ............334 Wattage ................................387

Theft deterrent system Alarm ......................................80 Engine immobilizer system.....79

Tire inflation pressure Maintenance data.................386 Tire inflation pressure display

function...............................315 Warning light.........................354

Tire information ......................390 Glossary ...............................393 Size ......................................391 Tire identification number .....391 Uniform Tire Quality Grading392

Tire pressure display .............315

437Alphabetical Index

Tire pressure warning system Function ...............................315 Initializing .............................317 Installing tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters ......316 Registering ID codes............318 Warning light ........................354

Tires Chains ..................................267 Checking ..............................312 Emergency tire puncture repair

kit........................................358 If you have a flat tire.............358 Inflation pressure..................324 Information ...........................390 Replacing .............................319 Rotating tires ........................314 Size ......................................386 Snow tires ............................265 Tire inflation pressure display

function...............................315 Tire pressure warning system

...........................................315 Warning light ........................354

Tools ........................................359 Top tether strap ........................72 Total load capacity .................380 Towing

Dinghy towing.......................144 Emergency towing................341 Towing eyelet .......................343 Trailer towing........................143

TRAC (Traction Control) ........261 Traction Control (TRAC) ........261 Trailer towing..........................143 Transmission

Automatic transmission ........149 Driving mode select switch...257 Manual mode .......................152 Manual transmission ............153 Paddle shift switches....151, 152

Trip meters................................90

Trunk........................................107 Smart key system.................109 Trunk features ......................282 Trunk light.............................110 Trunk opener switch .............109 Wireless remote control........110

Trunk light ...............................110 Turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs ............334 Turn signal lever ...................155 Wattage ................................387

U

USB charging port..................283

V

Vanity lights ............................284 Vanity mirrors .........................284 Vehicle data recording ...............6 Vehicle identification number380 Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)

...............................................261 Voltmeter ...................................94 VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

...............................................261

W

Warning buzzers Downshifting.................152, 153 Electric power steering .........350 High coolant temperature .....348 Low engine oil pressure .......349 Open door ............................106 Seat belt .......................351, 352

Warning lights.........................348 ABS ......................................349 Automatic headlight leveling sys-

tem warning light ................353 Automatic transmission fluid

temperature ........................350

438 Alphabetical Index

Brake system .......................348 BSD/RCTA warning light ......352 Charging system ..................348 Conventional cruise control indi-

cator ...................................352 Electric power steering.........350 EyeSight warning light..........353 High coolant temperature.....348 LED headlight warning light .353 Low engine oil pressure .......349 Low fuel level .......................351 Malfunction indicator lamp ...349 Master warning light .............353 Open door warning...............351 RAB warning light.................353 Seat belt reminder light 351, 352 Slip indicator.........................350 SRH warning light ................352 SRS......................................349 Tire pressure ........................354

Warning messages.................357 Warning reflector storage box

...............................................282 Washer

Checking .............................. 311 Preparing and checking before

winter..................................265 Switch...................................165

Washing and waxing..............288 Weight

Cargo capacity .....................143 Load limits ............................143 Weight ..................................380

Wheels Replacing wheels .................319 Size ......................................386

Window lock switch ...............130 Windows

Power windows ....................129 Rear window defogger .........272 Washer .................................165

Windshield wipers..................165

Winter driving tips ..................265 Wireless remote control

Battery-Saving Function .......112 Locking/Unlocking ................103 Replacing the battery ...........329

439Alphabetical Index

440

Engine immobilizer system

Certifications

441

Smart key system

442

443

BSD/RCTA

444

Tire pressure warning system

445

446

Safety Connect

447

448

For details, refer to the page listed in the OWNERS MANUAL.

GAS STATION INFORMATIO

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the GR86 Toyota works, you can view and download the Toyota GR86 2022 Sports Car Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Toyota GR86 as well as other Toyota manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Toyota GR86. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Toyota GR86 2022 Sports Car Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Toyota GR86 2022 Sports Car Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Toyota GR86 2022 Sports Car Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Toyota GR86 2022 Sports Car Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Toyota GR86 2022 Sports Car Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.